Home

NAiS GV42/52/62 Reference Manual

1. 4 46 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Transforming Patterns This section explains the commands in the Transform menu Dira Dura lem Eemer a Bugs Gate Meio red el Change zs Danae coh Seg Rotate Graphic Clicking this command rotates the registered pattern 90 Click Rotate Graphic Click Rotate Graphic again The rotated The image is rotated A image is rotated 90 5 further 90 SI a Mirror Horizontal Clicking this command flips the registered pattern horizontally Click Mirror Horizontal The image is flipped horizontally zs e Mirror Vertical Clicking this command flips the registered pattern vertically Click Mirror Vertical The image is flipped vertically RS 4 47 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Change Size Use this command when changing the size Clicki
2. Drag 4 38 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 3 To draw in the color for Background right click or right drag the mouse DST Right drag Eraser Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog U D 5 Pen Select a dot size for the eraser command O Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is necessary For more information on transparent color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the Reference Manual Function Eraser Command Usage 1 Select a dot size Pen 2 In the Pattern Edit window click or drag the mouse over the graphic The eraser in the size for Pen erases the graphic Ny Click or drag Operation by the eraser command is the same as drawing in dots using black y AS color 4 39 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Line Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Pumice Tara nr TT A P et OT CN Foreg
3. C Same Start End Angles Click icon C and click the part area of the pie graph part Handles are shown around the part SECH Click this icon Click the part Handles are shown Drag either handle on start angle or end angle They are put together The sector becomes a complete circle The start angle moves to the end angle m Q J O O O D o a D O s m D O 5 U o ech This is the start angle and also the end angle The start and end angles can be moved as you like D With Internal Circle The circle at the center of the pie graph is called the internal circle The graph looks like a donut This circle can be created or deleted as you like Click icon D once The icon is depressed and an internal circle hole is created in the pie graph part e gt d depressed H An internal circle is shown Click the depressed icon D It pops up The internal circle hole is deleted d E SCH s Click the depressed icon and it pops up The internal circle is deleted APP3 21 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Panel Meter Editing Procedure Basically the panel meter composition is similar to the pie graph The pie graph indicates the value with execution color but the panel meter uses an indicator Both start angle
4. I F Driver Extension tpb Only when the screen data is transferred to the GV series first the I F driver file is also transferred Afterwards I F driver file transfer will be executed automatically if the PLC model in the screen data is changed When the editor software GVWIN has been updated choose I F Driver for transfer to the GV series 0 cD Transferring Procedure 1 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu 2 The Transfer dialog is displayed Select I F Driver for Transfer Data 3 Click the PC gt button The Open dialog is displayed Select the I F driver file corresponding to the PLC model ep CH D OD gt O Di lt Q 02 a OD EI Bd ir py e Dosis ipi 2 Modos p sl Hdi a MA E Tri i a Fetes ki A ie t s it zeg Seer CAE Dai PaF pi ml Hicks L i a TE pe Fi a jit dej Ti 4 Click Open Data transfer starts On completion of transfer bring the GV series to the STOP mode Main Menu local main screen Check the I F driver model and the version on the screen Gvses o GK VF DRV VER 1 210 D SYSTEM MEWNET Mo Screen Data Information C Size 5832704 Connection 1 1 Signal Level RS232C Data PLC Stat No 0 Stop Bit 1 P 4 D Baud Rate 19200 Lebgth 8 arity Odd Send Delay 0 msec Editor MJ1 5 17 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiaut
5. Max Min Simulator running 00000000 GV series Check the following items e Wiring between GV series and personal computer e Settings of baud rate and COM port e PLC I F driver on the GV series side UNIPLC20 If the error is not recovered after checking the above items re start the simulator When sending a communication request to Check I F driver a personal computer simulator there is no reply from a personal computer Received Code 01 Communication error such as a parity error Received Code 02 Command error unregistered commands A communication error arises between GV DEEG Format error characters in nonconforming Series and the computer Check if there are ecelvea ode formats any adverse effects due to noise etc Memory address error unacceptable memory type address Select Memory Setting from the File menu and specify the correct memory address used for the GV series Received Code 05 8 30 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net eE Wizard EEN 9 1 Opening the Wizard Dialog 9 1 Wizard Us
6. EJ See ge e Refer button When comments for memory addresses are listed in a file it is possible to set the memory address while referring to the contents of the file The list file must have the file extension ale When setting the temperature control network or PLC2Way function the list file is automatically read 1 21 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Edit Window When the editor is started and a file is opened the Screen Edit window is displayed This section explains operations on the edit window Window Structure The Screen Edit window is taken as an example for explanation Calling up the Window Preview Next Icons if H ii a se i Clicking the Preview or Next icon in the icon bar brings up the previous or next window Jump in the Display Menu Click the Display menu and select Jump The dialog for specifying a screen number is displayed Enter the desired screen number and press OK The Screen Edit window of the specified screen number is displayed 1 22 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Double clicking on the Screen List Window Click the Screen List icon in the icon bar Or click Screen List from the Display menu The Screen List window
7. fee re ent Se re ei re ei end en et el e ei Zen en ve en e ei en e wg end ve e e e e ed ee et end pe et ei em re Zei pt ri ei e eg en e reg ei e ei Zei e e et e pt e ed re e Zei en el en ei Zen pn e en e ei en et mg ent e ei e et en ed em ei ei Telephone line modular socket Modular cable sae the modem Modem PW ER OH CD DA 00000 Computer LINE LD O z D D Si O o Q lt o 5 D L Ze REN RS 232C cable straight accompanying the modem 5 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Transfer Dialog Y Setting the Transfer dialog is required for data transfer except for transfer to a AS CF card When using a CF card CF card manager setting is required Select Transfer from the File menu or click the Transfer icon on the icon bar The Transfer dialog is displayed FP tad iO i Clee Po eo j za el D Sege See A A vs D e Transfer Display Select this option when the target source for transfer is a GV series Device unit Select this option when the target source for transfer is a memory card Transfer Data Screen Data Screen data is transferred If the PLC model setting or font data is different between the screen data and the data stored in the GV series the I F driver file or the font data is also transferred with the screen data I F Driver The I F driver file
8. lira oan Ka mm D D 5 Zoom 100 200 400 800 Select a zoom in for display Default is 800 M Grid Display Select whether or not to display grids in the background M Blink Display It is possible to distinguish the color set to flash on the pattern When unchecked the color set to flash is indistinguishable from the normal color Background Color When editing a pattern it is possible to view the actual screen background color When you click this command the Color dialog is displayed Select the desired color and click OK The pattern edit window background color changes Yoo He e Bee color EI BS 717 MERA 4 53 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Placing a Pattern Registered patterns can be placed on screens or in the graphic library using the Pattern icon on the drawing tool bar A For more information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools BEROA e L BR After a pattern placement the Pattern No can be changed and Rotate Mirror operations can be performed Double click the placed pattern within 4 088 dot size or select it with handles and click Detail Prop Change icon The Pattern dialog is displayed East me Fra dee Pd vs DES D CS ze Size of a Placed Pattern e f a pattern size is 128 kB or less the maximum permissible
9. mow o beer Sp gt Jess x n Sertich T D Z D D O D D gekst Al 8 To save the copied parts select Copy Target Save or Copy Target Save As from the File menu 9 To quit select Quit File Managing from the File menu APP3 37 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Part Editing Menu Use the following commands to create new parts or to edit existing parts In a Part Edit Window File Menu e New Choosing this command creates a new part file e Open Choosing this command brings up an existing part file name list e Save Choosing this command saves the most recent version of the opened part file and deletes its previous contents Save As Choosing this command saves the opened part file with a new file name different from the original Printer Setting Choosing this command allows you to specify the settings for printing a part file For more information see page APP3 34 e Print Choosing this command prints out the part files For more information see page APP3 34 CF Card Manager The CF card manager starts For more information see the Reference Manual Function File Managing Choosing this command allows you to copy parts between part files For more information see page APP3 36 Quit Part Edit Choosing this comm
10. 1 33 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 0 LA O O O D o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O wa Chapter 1 Basic Operation When a Normal Overlap is Placed 14 Base Overlap 0 Overlap 1 Overlap 2 for changing over the editing 1 34 layer When clicked it is checked and selected The selected one becomes the editing layer wl VC Col cers Car el A hl Pinging Grid Tce Sire rg di Co ie Eun When a Table Data Display Part is Selected This menu appears when a cell cells in a table data display part is are selected by right clicking or right dragging 15 Align Width All cells are adjusted to the width of the top left cell in the selected cells 16 Align Height All cells are adjusted to the height of the top left cell in the selected cells 17 Align Character The cells in a table are adjusted so that the largest data item fits into a cell 15 pr 16 label 17 1 cares L ER ege Za CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Useful Editing Commands This section explains useful editing commands included in the Edit menu of the menu bar or the tool bar Multi Copy A part or a graphic parts or graphics can be copied multiple times at one time Select a
11. 8 tet E 2S EUCIGT IA RK oe PREM A uo D Shes ere alle AS E ld lala Q el E o Q O be m x Y 3 fol D n 9 15 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard Deleting Placed Parts When deleting a part placed by the wizard function follow the procedure below 1 Select Undo Wizard from the Edit menu Eds Dote Pee Emi ew Spee ex ndo Lt Mrs Dee This message always indicates the final part placed by the wizard function and its screen number Click the OK button 9 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard 3 The specified part is deleted from the editing screen Deletion is completed Before deletion P fe Gs l e pi WC l g A er ba Sp Desen LE Ree SC d eee he I Error display part placed by the wizard function Messages are registered in the message editing area After deletion All settings are deleted O D D O ae D O et Q o a dp When a placed part is selected by clicking and then deleted by the command in the right click menu or the deletion icon the part is deleted from the screen however the settings in the message editing area and the buffering area remain To avoid such an instance go to the Edit menu and sel
12. Patter Haro Block Direct Bl korte Green Block li En Char le En Che H Dee kee Stain LEE Pr E A AAA 4 25 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Block Editing Parts Numerical data display character display and table data display parts can be placed in the same manner that they are placed on the screen A For more information see Chapter 2 Screen Composition in the Reference Manual Function Drawing Tools Except for the following the drawing tools can be used in the same manner as used on the screen A For more information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Offset Position Setting Every data block has a reference position called an offset A registered data block is always placed on the screen with respect to the offset position Data block display area on the screen Offset position on the data block A Line A Setting Data 1 1234 Data 2 1234 Line A Setting Data 3 1234 Data 1 1234 Data 4 1234 Data 2 1234 Data 5 1234 An offset position on the data block is shown with an OFF mark Every data block has an offset position at coordinates X Y 0 0 as default To change the position follow the procedure below 1 Click the Offset icon on the drawing tool bar ogs OOF 1 LH 2 Across cursor marked with OFF appears OFF 3 Click t
13. e o a H D O D 3 D D o LU r Gi 12345 MPA 12345 12345 MPA 12345 12345 MPA 12345 12345 12345 Algo eadh Align height Lop HF Detal Sebtira 3 Select Detail Setting from the menu The Table Data Display Num Display dialog is displayed When data cells of different types are selected the Table Data Display xxxx dialog for the top left cell is displayed Memo xxxx in Table Data Display xxxx indicates the type of the display part Num Display Char Display Message Disp or Text in Drawing 33 tt When the Table Data Display xxxx dialog has been set and OK is clicked the setting is reflected through the remaining selected cells When O Memory Inc is not checked the previous memory address setting is maintained 0 2 43 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Change of Cell Height and Cell Width e When changing the width of the cell specify a demarcation line in the top line as shown below The cursor changes into Drag it until the cell is adjusted to the desired width y E E O e Ee Be KKK DORE JCC 12345 112345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 123458 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 112345 112345 E e When changing the height of the cell specify a demarcation line in the first column as shown below
14. ooo gt T0020 iraazi I 3 DTODena NT Miro I a 0700703 OS i J otlekif DT Ged I Ch Kkropope D rEPutzaps i a DY OoZo6 0700204 i 3 Click here 2 To stop the memory counter either click on the clock icon on the left or press the space bar The icon will revert to a white square shape Ki When the memory counter reaches the upper or lower limit it will revert to O and continue counting Setting the Memory Counter for Multiple Pieces of Memory Simultaneously 1 Select the memory that will be set for the memory counter multiple selections possible Select sequentially by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking the mouse Select randomly by holding down the CTRL key and clicking the mouse 2 Right click on one of the selected lines and then click Change Setting Value 3 Set the memory counter according to the procedure described on the next page Hi 3 Q The way to set reset multiple bits simultaneously is the same as setting the memory counter Simultaneously Starting or Stopping the Memory Counters 1 Select all the memory that has a timer setting 2 Press the space bar All the timers will start simultaneously 3 Pressing the space bar again will cause all the timers to stop simultaneously 8 23 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Testing Sampling Mode with a CSV Fil
15. 5 Double click the calendar part The Calendar dialog is displayed To delete unnecessary items from the part open the Hour Minute Second and Week tab windows one by one and uncheck M Display in each window Clicking OK deletes hh mm ss and SUN from the calendar part YYMMDD The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window Le 6 Enlarge the calendar part if necessary Click the part and drag its handle until the part is enlarged as desired 7 Select the calendar part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon APP3 32 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Modify Part window 8 The Modify Part window for the calendar part is displayed Edit the part or change its size RG OOO 9 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part YY MM DD gt YY MM DD K The frame automatically Created text fits the calendar part including the text 10 Close the Modify Part window Calendar Part Edit window 11 The former edit window is displayed The modified calendar part appears in the window m Q J O v O O D o pmj D gt O m D O 5 U o ech Editing Display Area Parts The display
16. Base Screen Display During multi overlap editing a screen can be placed behind the overlap to check the actual image Only a multi overlap Multi overlap displayed on a screen _7 _8 _9 fue 21 81 ol ve 4 5 6 ow i ls e ow o or cr o fetal cal lt e S lt D Vi 1 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed 2 Check U Base Screen Dsp Screen becomes active 3 Click Screen and specify the desired number 4 Click OK The selected screen is placed behind the overlap es ee LR Fo hami Ci ne Loge O Fale z bhiam IFF Z cemi p el RL a r Lg Fs T mea TE Zeen Er Feed Cup M Gapira F E Meee Dep T Gee Lee r eae Sect Go Ormia ph ol Arete If no screen is displayed select Redraw from the Display menu or press the Home key on the keyboard 4 23 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Macro Setting Overlap parts registered in multi overlap editing can be used with OPEN Macro or CLOSE Macro These macros can be executed when the registered overlap part is displayed OPEN macro on or erased CLOSE macro from the screen y Macro is a function to execute computation processing for user programs using h the GV series commands For information on macro commands see Chapter 13 Macro
17. CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Square Select Area Icon This icon is used when specifying a pattern area Dragging the mouse over a pattern encloses it The enclosed area becomes a target for copy or deletion Square Select Area Usage 1 Select Square Select Area from the Edit menu or click the Square Select Area icon KT Lk Chiat ef L t em a jo Eeng e 2 Inthe Pattern Edit window drag the mouse from the start point to the end point as drawing a box Drag and release 3 A box is displayed Execute a necessary function such as copy or deletion To move the box drag it Drag the displayed box Release the mouse to finish the movement i
18. Count display Trend sampling Time display Up down switch 3 4 PT Awe na a e o a H D O D 3 D D o LU r Gi CH RBE a Display area Quit identical to the relay mode Up down switch Delete tool bar Count display Detail Time display Status display 9 tn ae GRO a identical to the relay sub mode tool bar Clicking the Trend Sampling icon allows a trend sampling part placement To establish a link between a trend sampling part and other parts like switch or data display parts available with the part give the same division number to them For the sampling icons other than trend sampling their tool bars contain Detail icons respectively Eu For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 10 Sampling in the Reference Manual Function 2 51 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Time Display Clicking the Time Display icon brings up the Time Display dialog la Med 5 Has la Pio Lage Fis 1 E ee er M iis bi irme Leg ge emm GG abe Loe T eri Tres D E Pen gpn O ae e In el ln De pe FEE A For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 11 Time Display Calendar in the Reference Manual Function When placin
19. Input the graphic is moved as shown below from the initial position Initial position Plus direction e Specifying a number Valid for patterns and graphic call Based on a placed pattern or graphic number regarded as 0 specifying a positive value in memory calls a pattern or a graphic of a greater number and specifying a negative value calls a pattern or a graphic of a smaller number 3 Pattern No 3 No 4 No 5 No 6 No 7 No 8 2 7 o H D H H D D H D DH l D H e L H ST s When 3 is specified under Incremental Input with pattern No 3 placed on the screen pattern No 6 is called 4 10 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Incremental Input When changing a graphic specify incremental coordinates in the minus direction e Specifying coordinates Based on a placed graphic position regarded as 0 0 specifying a positive coordinate value in memory moves it in the minus direction and specifying a negative coordinate value moves it in the plus direction When 200 200 is specified under Minus direction Incremental Input the graphic is moved KA as shown below from the initial position Minus direction Initial position D q Sb O O E e Q lt e Specifying a number Valid for patterns and graphic call Based on a
20. Left Margin Right Margin Upper Margin Bottom Margin Enter the desired values for each option The size of the printed screen depends on the settings of Left Margin and Right Margin M Header This option is checked M as default The PLC type and file name are indicated automatically The header setting can be changed as desired O Footer This option is unchecked O as default When a footer should be printed check the box Page No Left Center Right Page numbers are printed in any of the three positions When page numbers should not be printed uncheck the box Font Size Set this option to determine the character size The default value is 10 Print Setup Dialog Clicking Printer Setting brings up the Print Setup dialog Set paper size and portrait or landscape mode i Poon rip y 4 gt D gt OD n 6 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Print Print Procedure Print Setting Dialog Select Print from the File menu The Print Setting dialog is displayed as follows Puri aang Leama eee eee ee a a i II EN e rk i D bbb k ate A i Lei Leg rr LU it mo B Ty A E 7 l A r The following setting items are included O System Setting See page 6 9 Click this option for printing the syst
21. No 1 MX 12345 12345 1 12345 KEE 12345 RES 12345 12345 12345 12345 Relay Relay Sub and Message Modes Clicking the Relay Mode Relay sub Mode or Message Mode icon brings up the following corresponding tool bar GEO E la M Ae his a identical to the relay mode Quit tool bar Up down switch Up down switch A For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 6 Message Display in the Reference Manual Function 2 46 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Entry Mode and Data Block Area Clicking the Entry Mode or Data Block Area icon brings up the following corresponding tool bar Tn 2 ogna g identical to the relay sub Keypad Quit mode tool bar Data block Delete Entry target Detail Entry displa Min display Max display e o a H D O D 3 D D o LU r Gi WE For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 7 Entry Mode in the Reference Manual Function 2 47 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Bar Graph Pie Graph Panel
22. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Ladder Comm Prg This option is valid when Modular Jack 1 or 2 Ladder Tool is selected for QnH CPU Port as PLC model setting When the screen data is transferred to the GV series first the ladder communication program is also transferred automatically It is not transferred automatically afterwards When the editor software GVWIN has been updated choose Ladder Comm Pro for transfer to the GV series Modbus Comm Prg This option is valid when Modbus slave communication is in use When the screen data to be transferred contains Modbus slave communication settings that are different from the settings in the GV series the Modbus communication program is transferred Afterwards the program transfer will be executed automatically if any changes are made to the Modbus slave communication settings in the screen data When the editor software GVWIN has been updated choose Modbus Comm Pro for transfer to the GV series System Updating The Up date of System button is provided for updating the entire GV series system It is recommended that system updating be executed when the editor software GVWIN has been updated o O pmj D D O Q tr GN Q mD L I gt D s The files below are updated by the Up date of System button e F driver file e GV series system program e Font
23. Programmable Operator Terminal GV 42 52 62 Reference Manual Operation GV52S GV62S y V This manual was created using Adobe Acrobat A Adobe the Adobe logo and Acrobat are trademarks Adobe of Adobe Systems Incorporated CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Record of Revisions Reference numbers are shown at the bottom left corner on the back cover of each manual Printing Date Revised Contents CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Preface Congratulations on purchasing the drawing editing software GVWIN for the GV series For a clearer understanding the GV series Reference Manual focuses on the outline of each function and the way of using the drawing editing software GVWIN according to the operating procedures Notes The copyright of the software is possessed by Matsushita Electlic Works Ltd Reproduction of the contents of the software and this manual in whole or in part without permission of Matsushita Electlic Works Ltd is prohibited The specifications of the software and the information in this ma
24. Select sequentially by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking the mouse Select randomly by holding down the CTRL key and clicking the mouse 2 Right click on any of the lines that are selected and then click on Change Setting Value 3 Set the desired number and click OK The numbers of all the selected lines will be changed simultaneously Testing Overlap 1 Display the screen that has an overlap setting on the GV series 2 Click on one of the icons for Overlap 0 to Overlap 2 The registered overlap will be displayed on the GV series TT I Lp Gas x E Ka 3 Once the overlap is displayed on the GV series the overlap test sheet with items registered on it will be displayed on the Simulator If you click on the same icon again the overlap on the GV series and the overlap test sheet on the Simulator disappear 4 When an overlap switch registered on the screen is pressed the overlap will be displayed on the GV series An overlap test sheet will be displayed on the Simulator at the same time Note In the case of a multi overlap with the internal command setting it is impossible to open the overlap from the Simulator 8 19 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Hi 3 Q Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Useful Operations Creating a New SIM File Using a Shortcut Key By directly dragging an item display
25. Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net LU DI 2 O O O D ZA UI O 5 O h r gt D m o O TS Chapter 1 Basic Operation System Setting Menu The menu contains commands required for system setting For more information see Chapter 1 System Setting in the Reference Manual Function Tool Menu This menu contains useful commands for screen creation For more information see Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Window Menu Cascade Aligns and overlaps multiple windows Tile Aligns multiple windows like tiles Arrange Icons Aligns the minimized windows Window titles When multiple windows are opened their titles are indicated in the Window menu Clicking the title of a window brings it to the top Help Menu Topic Search Brings up the Help window The usage of the Help menu is the same as that in Windows Version Information Indicates the editor version information 1 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Dialog Setting and Operating Technique in Dialogs r ge Pe Goals Jie oor ee ES Ema Lacie lmi Sea Aldo cr Lcd E Pri f Iri iaka D s E Mee s a Leg Ki 1 Change over tab Click on a tab with the mouse The corresponding tab window of the dialog is displayed 2 Numerical data fi
26. 2 32 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens There is an icon like the Up down switch icon that brings up a pull down menu when it is clicked Select the desired option from the menu The corresponding dialog is displayed Place a part from the dialog Pai Oso BO SE Fol iir Select the desired part from the menu Redisplay of Tool Bar Click a registered icon in the Part auxiliary tool box When the Detail icon is clicked the Relay dialog containing the previously set data appears The remaining icons are the same as those used for placement Click it to check the previous settings Sp lt D n o V D O D D 3 D Baig Click them for new placement 2 33 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Parts Placement and Setting Overlap Click the Overlap icon The Overlap Setting dialog is displayed A lara KETTEN 2 xj QE 05378 rr lis Y uy 22 TM Ps Tiradas i Check a box as desired The associated buttons become active Normal Overlap This section explains placing a normal overlap Itis possible to create an overlap to be displayed on one specific screen Click the Normal button The Overlap Normal dialog is displayed aj M iip
27. APP1 3 available font oococcccncccncocccnccnccnononnnnos APP1 3 elle de Te ais ti ia APP1 2 A A 5 26 G graph display Pareado APP3 17 graphic ee 4 4 graphie ue 2 50 graphic relay mode EE 2 50 E A meeecteetemieas 2 13 2 14 2 15 H e Eet a EE 1 16 l A A A E 5 21 Mterval imer is alee 2 54 HNN LE SU EE 1 27 Hem MENU carioca talca 1 15 4 1 J JPEG ele E 2 56 A Se Aatavabsiuncoueckwasedd suivisevais severe 1 22 K keypad Dall CaIING asirios APP3 15 L ladder c m prg talados 5 28 AMD WEE 2 39 part eding corrio APP3 9 EE 2 35 let 2 6 ii M MACIO EE 2 54 er Be ele 4 55 MenO pad A a E 2 54 memory address USE ccccccccccccncnoncnoncncncnnnonononnnnnnos 7 5 MEMO card ee e 2 55 screen data transfer cccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 13 Memo USE eege Ee 7 4 Menu Dsp tab WiNdOW cccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 modify part modifying parts cooooccccccccnoccnnncnnonnncnnnnnnnannnnns APP3 3 MOAIYINO Paris sd lala APP3 3 monochrome 8 gradation ooooooooccoccccccccncnnnnonononos 2 16 MUN O DY saaa aa 1 35 MUItI IANQUAGE NEEN 4 84 WE Le EE 4 20 O ON GIG st Dee Z n 2 13 2 15 online edling cui da 5 30 Overlap ai 2 34 A eege secu sidan sausintavapnesecs APP3 7 D Dade ele 4 61 Panel IMCS eege eegen 2 48 part editing TEE Eesen inate eege APP3 17 calenda a ooo APP3 31 closed area graph cocccccccononocccccnccncncnncnnnnos APP3 26 COMPONENT ec APP3 2 data display ctricos APP3 14 data sampling di
28. Arrangements e PLC model check e Personal computer e Communication parameters check e GVWIN GV series screen editing software e Modular jack MJ1 2 and backlight setting check D Q NA Psoe 5 12 GV42 52 62 IT Page 5 15 ja 9 5 D Operations Operations D e Transfer with cable AIGV8103 e Data writing by CF card 2 COM port check manager da e Transfer on Ethernet on LAN D Ethernet connection check Arrangements D e CF card N Arrangements e CF card reader writer e With AIGV8103 GV series AIGV8103 e On EES Screen data transfer GV series to the GV42 52 62 Ethernet cable AIGV823 Operations e Data writing to the GV series Cue melee Page 5 23 Arrangements e Online editing Ly Page 5 25 9 e Transfer via modem e CF card e GV42 52 62 Connection to PLC IA Page 5 34 Operations For PLC Arrangements e Baud rate and parity check e PLC e PLC GV40 50 60 connection cable Start of communication with PLC 5 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Screen Data Check Data required for communication with PLC are set in the screen data file and the data is reflected in communications after its transfer to the GV series Go to System Setting to make the settings Setting for Communications with PLC PLC Type Setting Select the type of the PLC to be connected Following the selection the Comm Parameter dialog
29. Chapter 9 Wizard Wizard Usage Examples Radio Button Creation This section explains the procedure for creating four radio buttons with output memory DT100 0 to DT100 3 L Radio buttons operate in such a manner that only the button currently being pressed is xX activated in output memory and the others are deactivated in output memory DT100 DT100 DT100 0 9 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard Setting Procedure 1 In the Wizard dialog select Switch from the parts list and click the OK button a LE a y Na E PT Q a el E o Q O be m x Y 3 fol D n 9 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard 3 Four types of radio buttons are previewed ON and OFF tab Open either window to check the image Pull down menu Select a color as desired Click the desired type from the four The lower left type is selected in this example The selected type is enclosed in a red frame Click the Next button 4 The selected switch image is displayed Number of Switch Select the number of switches 4 is selected in this example Memory Allocate a memory address to the switches DT100 is allocated in this example Click the Next button 9 4
30. Each time the file is opened the registered colors for the file are displayed e In the case of data copy by means of the file management function Chapter 7 Useful Techniques between screen data files containing different registered colors the registered colors in the copy source file is not displayed on the color pallet in the target file but is displayed outside the pallet E Le linr L re ee Tamli sp T Line Bes Zeck Ta A D Eaa ol RS os vireg S Feed TI CL LLLLLLLLLLL SD l Es z e CLLCCLITITLLELELEI Pakea 1 Taie 2 F es 3 Emm e Colors in the copy source file that are not registered Not registered in the pallet in the copy target file are displayed in the Prop Change dialog in the target file 2 60 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens 128 color Type The color pallet shows the basic 16 colors as default When selecting a color other than the sixteen click the far right button W on the pallet The following dialog is displayed o O lt CH CD nm Q Q do OD nm Click the desired color and click OK The line including the clicked color is displayed The color is marked with x 2 61 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Blinking S
31. Email info ctiautomation r Macro Block 4 55 Macro Block Structure s nesensnnennnnnnnr nnn tntn rnnr rnnr rnnr nnen 4 55 Calling a Macro Reie 4 55 Macro Block EGItING E 4 56 cr Ae 4 61 Page Block Structure n naanenenenenenenene nanna nann nn nananana nnn 4 61 Calling a Page ee 4 61 Page Block Edrtmg ienaa 4 62 Ba AA 4 65 Direct Block Structure ccccccceccecececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 65 Calling a Direct Block ENEE 4 66 Direct Block Editing E 4 66 Screen Block 4 69 Screen Block Structure AAA 4 69 Calling a Screen Block 4 69 Screen Block Edtmg AAA 4 70 Eegeregie E 4 72 HIE et 4 72 RU leie WING ostras 4 72 Tile BANNO AA 4 73 Data SNS scores 4 75 Data Sheet Structure cocccconononenonenonononnnnonenenenonononenoss 4 75 Calling a Data heet 4 76 Data Sheet EONO A 4 76 Data Sheet Environment Setting AA 4 79 Screen Ee 14 EOAPPPOOOSO O_ 5 5 UAPAPP A 4 80 Screen Library Structure AAA 4 80 Calling a Screen Library coocoocccocccccccnccccccnccananananancnncnononos 4 80 Screen Library Editing vesical 4 81 Placing a Screen LUS wstcivecenssncescrsteverucvenrceninaceenemmaas 4 84 Multt oanguages ee 4 84 Animation For the V7 series except for VO 4 85 Animation Function Structure oococcccncnnnnnccnnnninininininininins 4 85 Calling the Animation Function coocccccccnninononannnnnnnnnnns 4 85 Animation GUNG DEE 4 86 Ee dl e WE 4 88 Ti Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 36
32. Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Tool Menu e Open File for Reference This command is used when choosing Pattern or Graphic Call from the Draw menu in part editing Part files do not contain graphics or patterns However graphics or patterns exist in screen data files using part files Therefore it is possible to use graphics or patterns for creating parts Graphics or patterns in a screen data file can be referred to and used in the part edit window using the Open File for Reference command Click Open File for Reference and choose the desired screen data file Graphics in the selected screen data file can be called up when Graphic Call or Pattern is selected from the Draw menu in part editing Tool Window Open Fee fo Heber y y T 2 5 GC Z D 3 Ue pore rain fee Window Menu The Window menu commands are the same as those for screen data files APP3 41 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing In a Modify Part Window File Menu e Quit Part Modifying Clicking this command closes the Modify Part window and brings up the former part edit window Edit Menu The Edit menu commands are the same as those for screen data files except for the following commands e Frame Auto Fitting When a gra
33. O A79 GV42C GV40 GV50T GV50C GV52S GV62S GV50S GV60 599 2 5 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Lines and Columns Lines and columns are used as units to designate coordinates of overlaps or sizes of character displays 0 8 16 24 dots Loo T T l Column 1 column 8 dots 1 line 20 dots SSES E GV42C GV40 GV50T GV50C 80 24 GV52S GV62S GV50S GV60 100 Line Screen Capacity Available memory on a screen is limited to 256 kB for the GV42 52 62 and to 128 kB for the GV40 50 60 One screen data file is capable of storing 1 024 screens The memory capacity of one screen data file differs depending on the model of GV as well as the font type in use A For more information on the memory capacity of one screen data file see Appendix 1 Fonts Make sure to check the use environment and available memory when registering screens If a screen data file stores a screen exceeding the maximum permissible memory the screen may not work normally after the file is transferred to the GV Make sure to create every screen within the capacity 1 If a screen data file exceeds the maximum permiss
34. O O D OQ pmj D LI h O m GN O gt U Q 12 Click the switch part and click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 13 The Modify Part window for the switch part is opened Edit the part for the ON display Paste the copied OFF display to the window After editing reset the part frame by choosing Frame Auto Fitting 14 Close the Modify Part window The ON display as created appears in the window Whether or not the created switches or lamps appear as desired in the ON OFF and P3 to P8 displays depends on the Draw Mode selection between XOR and REP IOC For a 3 to 8 notch part the same drawing or editing procedure applies APP3 13 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Editing Data Display Parts There are three different types of data display parts numerical data display character display and message display However the editing procedure is the same for all of them Editing Procedure Ex Numerical data display part Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Num Display Part Edit window 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 2 Click the New Part icon A dotted box and a mover tool appear 3 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new nume
35. OV OAD aa 2 34 panel meter closed area graph 2 48 relay and relay Sub modes occccccccnnnnooo 2 46 A r R 2 51 SOUNA Suri ot tachcetenbeteaetuntotanennentales 2 56 statistic grapi eena aa 2 49 switch and lamp W 2 39 ime TEE 2 52 A 2 50 VIGGO anida 2 56 A ss honors Gane bas ink ah teas A 2 17 ANAS TS adan benaaueadedeumienantensualaes 2 21 lge E 2 21 E 2 22 Parts tab WINdOW ici 2 17 DASSWON AAA ia males Ace aan 1 42 screen data eege ee ees 1 42 pasto DIMAG Zere pa 7 14 A Gees 4 37 Placas cipal 3 23 PIE a aio 2 48 lag te uscar 1 41 lgl dl Te 6 1 available printers AA 6 1 Option Setting dialog cccccoccncccooo o 6 2 E A Ea APP3 34 il AMS asar ii 6 1 preliminary steps AAA 6 1 Print Setting dialog oooccconconcncccooo o 6 4 printing currently opened window n 6 7 printing example later Le EE 6 11 WE gei tre EE 6 8 memory address use list 6 10 Screen OU IDU erris e e 6 8 system setting ccccooononnnccconnnccnnnnnnonnaconnnnnos 6 9 o 6 9 Use Cross reference EE 6 10 Prod dois dios Las dois 5 25 tel et A A etapa tesead 1 42 INDEX R registration item oocccccccnonnccnncnnononccnncnnonanconnnnnnonanons 4 1 lie Ve ME 4 85 CON naa 4 2 Gata DIOCK A st thee tasetence shes 4 25 environment setting AAA 4 27 dal E GE 4 75 daltectiblock it 4 65 ele lei Lei MAY ai ea N 4 4 data displasia coro 4 16 environment Setting ccccccc
36. Outline of Data Display in Graphic Library In the graphic library it is possible to use a function similar to data display parts as used on the screen The usage is as follows e Showing deleting a data display through bit setting ON resetting OFF Bit OFF Bit ON al gt 3426 e Moving a data display on the screen 3426 p O S426 eee gt 6243 4 14 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Display Setting Procedure 1 Go to the drawing tool bar and click the Data Display icon The Graphic Library Drawing dialog is displayed ABC Ae KGR DEF d ive m coe Te Po po nario See Gem Soke melt zap Di rl Daria Pl a Tid oe POE spas mm 2 ames Derrde Te MEC E ee T Desc e oe ot input Top CEC haban e D mal Sb O O E e Q lt ag For the description of the Data Main tab window see the following page For the Data Char Prop tab window see page 4 16 2 When the dialog setting is concluded drag the mouse on the screen A dotted line box as large as the data display is displayed with a cross cursor Drag 3 Release the mouse being dragged in the desired position The data display is shown in the position nr 1234 SN e e Rui e e d Release the mouse Data display is shown in the released pos
37. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Screen Data Transfer via CF Card For the GV42 52 62 Only Connecting Method Connection between CF Card and Computer CF card manager CF card reader writer CF card Connection between CF Card and GV42 52 62 e With a new GV42 52 62 just after being unpacked ep CH D OD gt O Di lt Q 02 a OD e With a GV42 52 62 other than the above nnection Signal Level PLC Stat No Ethernet Information Trans Speed 10BASE T Stat No 192 168 1 68 PORT 10 MAC 0050FF000035 Editor MJ1 POWER 5 15 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Screen Data Transfer between CF Card and Computer Screen Data Transfer to CF Card 1 Insert a CF card into the CF card reader writer 2 Start up the GVWIN software Select CF Card Manager from the File menu 3 Specify the drive in which the CF card is now inserted Click OK The CF card manager starts 4 Select Write to CF Card from the File menu The Write to CF Card dialog is displayed 5 Click the Refer button for File to be Converted Select a file extension G2P to be written to the CF card 6 Click OK The
38. T Res Fa Ae e A A Mile l Tr a A Fl A Lhe rae DE has Les Feu lees Tags wa 1 Ds i La r ssib Saa Jess Tess cas Dia a ims Ce ii a T Li ami Pe Le FP La lia Eed Belt T ebe zer CS TI zeg Only the items of the selected function are displayed By Selection The items selected by enclosing with the mouse are displayed Check the menu and keep the Item List window open Then enclose the desired item s with the mouse for selection The mouse cursor on the screen changes to a mark with sel as shown below Click the Item List window to make the window active Only the selected items are displayed rial lat ae NI IR AA eS E 1 29 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Hint By Selection can also be selected from the right click menu 3 Click the desired display format Closing the Item List Click the extreme left icon in the menu bar and click Close It is also possible to close the window by clicking the x button at the top right corner of the window Useful Operations Useful operations in placing or editing parts and graphics are explained Copy amp Paste Copy amp paste operation can be performed by using Copy and Paste in the Edit menu or the Copy and Paste icons in the icon bar Also the following operations can perfor
39. TVS OS Oy AA A sees eueecsvaigeceseot 2 52 Calendar DISPlAy vecina 2 52 MEMO PAO E 2 54 Macro and Interval Tmer reren 2 54 Memory Cal A Beer 2 55 e We A uo PA 2 55 PPP A 2 56 A A e 2 56 A 2 56 To be continued CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email infoOctiautomation Color Types and Gettngs 2 57 elei e Ke A 2 57 32 000 COlOr Ke 2 58 pases AAA gees 2 61 Monochrome TVnotas rada 2 62 Glen ME 2 63 i Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Screen Composition Each display of the GV series is called a screen A maximum of 1 024 screens can be registered in a screen data file This chapter explains screen composition and elements containing parts and graphics to be displayed on screens Screen Outline Overlap 0 O pmj D D gt O O 3 D O LD O Screen DLC Base A maximum of 1 024 screens can be registered One screen is composed of a base screen with a maximum of three overlaps Each of the base screen and the overlaps layers is composed of 256 divisions These 256 divisions are overlaid on a layer like invisible sheets Divisions 0 25 ca A KT EE A a ee 7 Ge fe Overlap Overlap D D D D D KETTER D Se veria or D D D D ge nb nemme ee ee ae ha ald fe ee eee eee GEET 2 1 CTi Autom
40. The cursor changes into SE Drag it until the cell is adjusted to the desired height sume 12345 12345 12345 12345 12 45 312345 12345 12345 112345 12345 12345 12345 12345 712345 _ 12345 12345 Cm Right Click Menu When cells are selected by right clicking or right dragging a pop up menu is displayed The same menu without Detail Setting is displayed when Table Data Display Editing is selected from the Edit menu For the description of Make Browser File selected from Table Data Display Editing in the Edit menu see Chapter 28 Web Server in the Reference Manual Function Aky Sin do Pear byi ue te II Ges Sean 2 44 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens e Align Width All cells are adjusted to the width of the top left cell in the selected cells This width is applied to all cells iA 12345 12345 12345 12345 WEE 12345 e Align Height All cells are adjusted to the height of the top left cell in the selected cells 12345 This height is applied to all cells cos 1724 123454 ESAE 12345 e o a H D O D 3 D D o LU d Gi 12345 12345 e Align Character Cell sizes in a table can be so adjusted that the largest data item fits into a cell It is not necessary to specify the cell in the following mann
41. This chapter explains applications attached to the editor such as Simulator This chapter explains screen creation using the wizard function The setting and editing procedures of font available with the GV series are explained The placement and editing procedure as well as notes for 3D parts are explained The part structure and editing procedure are explained 4 GV Series Models The following GV series models are available Generic Name Series GV42 52 62 or GV52 62 GV series GV40 50 60 Please note that the GV series model names are used as listed above in the manuals Denotations The following marks are used in this manual to attract attention of the reader g Describes important information that must be heeded O Rg Indicates cross references Ki Describes the reference or supplemental information CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Notes on Safe Use of GV In this manual you will find various notes categorized under the following levels with the signal words DANGER and CAUTION lt gt DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in N CAUTION P SC minor or moderate injury and could cause property damage Note that there is a possi
42. When M Italic is checked the text is italicized Ol Italic M Italic ABCD ABCD Normal 1 4 Bold Shadow The text is displayed as shown below ABCD 1 4 ABCD Bold ABCD ABC Do Background color Foreground color 1 4 is valid only for 1 byte characters Bold is valid only when 1 is set for O Enlarge X 3 20 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Text File It is possible to import data in a text file Follow the procedure below 1 Click the Text File button in the Text tab window The Open dialog is displayed r ate eee RA dci Tia Bes Des res 1 pg 1 Iw a Fada D rr ES pen B eee P ar Sage A A best O al 2 Choose the desired text file and click Open The Text Read dialog is displayed Here you can confirm the text in the text file 3 If the text that is displayed is not necessary click on the pull down menu The following lines of text can be reviewed this way so that you can search for the necessary text a ral a Eegen FF 3 21 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net w o gt O lt D 3 O o O Chapter 3 Drawing Tools 4 Once you have selected the text to import click OK Text is imported into the text fie
43. and end angle can be changed in the same manner as in pie graphs Basic area for the Indicator SS panel meter part Start angle End angle The panel meter always has an internal circle The With Internal Circle icon is therefore inactive when the panel meter is edited The panel meter has a size limit The inner radius must be 10 dots or more The difference between the inner and outer radii must be 16 dots or more Io A The procedure for editing and registering panel meter parts is the same as used for pie graph See the example for editing pie graphs explained previously page APP3 19 APP3 22 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Statistic Graph Bar Editing Procedure Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Stat Bar Graph Part Edit window 1 The edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened ES OOA e i a re y EI EI Ga Hormia Em Dph artical Es Gap 2 Click the New Part icon The statistic graph bar type pull down menu is displayed 3 Choose Horizontal Bar Graph for example A dotted box and a mover tool appear 4 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new graph part is placed m Q J O v O O D o pmj D gt O m D O 5 U o ech 5 Double click the part The Stat Bar Graph dialog is
44. base screen overlap No 0 overlap No 1 and overlap No 2 When starting one layer is chosen for editing The editing layer denotes the one that is currently chosen Editing layer one of them pF P Base screen Overlap Overlap Overlap No 0 No 1 No 2 2 35 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens L Changeover of Editing Layer Follow either method 1 Right click the mouse Change the editing layer from the pull down menu 2 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed In the Detail tab window change the setting for Edit Layer Choose the desired overlap number to select the layer E EA A FT CC ca a F Cilia Se Hay E lel e Zen Dee em H dea Editing layer change must be executed while a normal overlap is placed on the screen 0D selected overlap are indicated in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen When the editing layer is moved to the base screen the modes on the base screen are indicated in the auxiliary tool box Q When an overlap is selected as the editing layer the modes placed on the O L Display Non display by Right click Menu SW It is possible to decide display or non display of normal overlap on the base screen from the right click menu Select Hide Overlaps with Base Checked from the right click me
45. ci e Ma e tie Mai med Fra es F r Pe oe Cem Vee Dee Ir F Fira Lee ida ar Cta Dis Des O Donk cee ol cee 1 D RI ei v Select Display Environment when making display environment settings for AS one certain screen Select Change All Display Environment when making display environment settings for all screens in a screen data file Detail Tab Window Edit Layer This option is active for a screen with overlaps normal Select Base or Overlap 0 2 for the layer you are going to edit For more information on overlaps see Chapter 2 Overlap in the Reference Manual Function Switch Lamp Select from ON OFF and P3 P8 for the status of the switches or lamps displayed on the screen The current status is indicated on the icon bar as well as the status bar For more information on switches and lamps see Chapter 3 Switch in the Reference Manual Function Language Use this option to select the language used on the screen For more information see Chapter 29 Language Selection in the Reference Manual Function 2 10 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Overlap This option is active when normal overlaps are placed on the screen Select whether or not to display the overlaps Check the box M of the desired overlap number Uncheck the box when it is not displayed For more inform
46. mat Top Memory Specify a memory address for data sampling DT200 is specified in this example Timing for Storing Data in Buffering Area Specify the timing for storing data in the buffering area 1 sec is specified for Periodic in this example Number of Sample Specify the number of sampling times 100 is specified in this example Click the Next button 9 13 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Q el E o Q O be m x Y 3 fol D n Chapter 9 Wizard 5 Number of Graph Specify the number of lines in the trend graph 2 is specified in this example EZ ZE Points of X Direction Specify the number of points on the X axis in the trend graph 10 is specified in this example Graph Max and Graph Min Specify the maximum and minimum values in the trend graph 100 and 0 are specified respectively in this example Word Count Select the number of words for data sampling memory specified in step 4 1 Word is selected in this example Click the Next button 6 Select colors as desired Open each tab window and select a graph color 9 14 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard 7 Across cursor is displayed Click it in the desired position Cee BS
47. or less for such a computer When M Transfer through Ethernet is checked The IP address setting dialog is opened Set the IP address for the GV series as the transfer target For more information see the GV 42 52 62 Hardware Manual 5 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Screen Data Transfer via AIGV8103 Connecting Method Connect a GV series unit and a computer as illustrated below New GV Series Just after being unpacked AlGV8103 e POWER d Make sure to connect the cable to the modular jack MJ1 on the GV series GV Series Being put to use 1 300 1 000 1 000 iothic Screen Data PLC Type MATSUSHITA MEWNET rror Sto Information Comment ime Out 0 50 sec Size 5832704 etry 3 Connection 1 1 Baud Rate 19200 Signal Level RS232C DataLebgth 8 PLC Stat No 0 Stop Bit 1 Parity Odd Send Delay 0 msec Editor MJ1 STOP mode SYSTEM Communicating AlGV8103 RUN mode d Make sure to connect the cable to the modular jack MJ1 on the GV series 5 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer L When Modular Jack 1 Editor Port is specified in the Modular Jack dialog AS selecte
48. pd MO el e cel FA A Ki a bmn ee lt e EI Pt La El INM For the edit models see Chapter 1 System Setting in the Reference Manual Function 3 The Select PLC Type dialog is displayed Select the PLC model and click NA For compatible PLC models see the Hardware Manual 1 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Clik OK The Screen 0 Edit window is displayed q E Itten A ees Pr PE aa LE AA AAA rm Lai rieseg a z JU Cp e Q 3 gt Q gt oa O gt IT For more information on the menu items see page 1 7 1 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Opening an Existing File 1 Click the Open icon in the tool bar or select Open from the File menu Ji o ERI or a AT cereal 2 The Open a Screen Data File dialog is displayed Select the desired screen data file and click the Open button mm op Cay ben er P e Te eps lan EA BB Lee DT ee 1 M1 E t EC OO EE Mia oh A FOO BREA a 1I LAL IBM For more information on the menu items see page 1 7 1 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Qu
49. www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Create Color Clicking this button brings up the following dialog CEEE ie E D Fara In this dialog a maximum of 32 colors in addition to the provided three pallets can be registered as desired with the steps below 1 In the dialog displayed by the Create Color button click anywhere within the provided color area The color of the clicked point appears in the top right box Repeat clicking or move the scroll bars until the color in the box becomes your desired color Click around this point The color of the clicked point appears rae fa Naam Tapper Cink os j a 2 59 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net O o O lt CH CD nm Q Q do OD nm Chapter 2 Screens 2 When your desired color is shown click the Select button The color appears in the top left position Pise Pi dl Par 1 Cocot De co hel e gt To go back to the previous color pallet click OK When registering a different color next select its registration position in the pallet by clicking in advance If no position is selected the top left position is overwritten by the next color registration Notes on Color Creation e Registered colors as desired up to 32 colors are stored in the screen data file when the file is saved
50. www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Absolute Input When changing a graphic specify the value for change in absolute coordinates e Specifying coordinates With respect to coordinates 0 0 at the top left corner of the screen and 639 479 at the bottom right corner or 319 239 or 799 599 specify the coordinates for moving a graphic in memory When 300 200 is specified under Absolute Input the graphic is moved to the position below IO 0 300 200 p F oi D gt O 639 479 gt e oi lt e Specifying a number Valid for patterns and graphic call Specify a registered pattern number or a graphic number in the graphic library directly Pattern No 3 No 4 No 5 No 6 No 7 No 8 ONE D When 3 is specified under Absolute Input pattern No 3 is displayed 4 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Incremental Input When changing a graphic specify incremental coordinates in the plus direction e Specifying coordinates Based on a graphic position regarded as 0 0 specifying a positive coordinate value in memory moves it in the plus direction and specifying a negative coordinate value moves it in the minus direction When 300 200 is specified under Plus direction Incremental
51. your local distributor Notes on Installation e Operate or store GV under the conditions indicated in this manual and related manuals Failure to do so could cause fire malfunction physical damage or deterioration e Understand the following environmental limits for use and storage of GV Otherwise fire or damage to the unit may result Avoid locations where there is a possibility that water corrosive gas flammable gas solvents grinding fluids or cutting oil can come into contact with the unit Avoid high temperature high humidity and outside weather conditions such as wind rain or direct sunlight Avoid locations where excessive dust salt and metallic particles are present Avoid installing the unit in a location where vibration or physical shock may be transmitted e Equipment must be correctly mounted so that the main terminal of GV will not be touched inadvertently e Tighten the GV mounting screws to the specified torque Excessive tightening may distort the panel surface Loose tightening may cause GV to come off malfunction or be short circuited e Tighten terminal screws on the power input terminal block equally to a torque of 0 5 Nem e Check the appearance of GV when it is unpacked Do not use the unit if any damage or deformation is found e GV has aglass screen Do not drop or give physical shock to the unit Notes on Cable Connection e Connect the cables correctly to the terminals of GV in acc
52. 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts HK Gothic and HK Times Outline y On the GV series it is possible to use fonts similar to the Windows True Type fonts Arial SW and Times The font similar to Arial is called English Western Europe HK Gothic The font similar to Times is called English Western Europe Times ABCOEFS COB FS ABCDEFG ABCDEFG ABCDEFG ABCDEFG ABCDEFG ABCDEFG English Western Europe HK Gothic English Western Europe HK Times The English Western Europe HK Gothic and English Western Europe HK Times fonts used for the GV series are Matsushita Electric Works original fonts The English Western Europe HK Gothic and HK Times feature e The English Western Europe font creates a smooth typeface when the specified enlargement factors are even numbers however only a normal typeface is available when the factors are odd numbers With the English Western Europe HK Gothic or HK Times font a smooth typeface is created in any size English Western Europe font Enlargement factors odd 1 x 1 ERE GGG e3 ABCDEFG Enlargement factors even 2 x 2 ARCDEFG English Western Europe HK Gothic font 12 points ABCOEFE 20 points ABCDEFG 28 pos ABCDEFG mo ABCDEFG APP1 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts e In the case of the English Western Europe font th
53. 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Change Item Select Dialog Click Option in the Change All Memory dialog The Change Item Select dialog is displayed ee oe et E D Erni E M ra Bisi Pe pas 3 iia Bit P Auf gt Ai DMR Po aju pez a ES Data ae D Ste pu e CARE p e was F Promo suf Se A 3 ae ee p bi ES a D eenzeg F IT Cp Me lr T Gia T Corrado C Omm am ALEA CE m The following items are included Screen Macro Block Data Block M LIB Data Sheet S LIB Temp CTRL PLC2Way System Setting Check the desired items If a range should be set enter the numbers for Start and End A Compare Station No This option is valid when 1 n multi drop is selected for Connection Check this box to include port numbers of the PLCs for memory change O Compare CPU No Choose this option for setting the CPU number of PLC O Compare Temp Control Station No This option is valid when the temperature control network is used Check this box to include the port number of the temperature controller Compare File No Compare Record No Choose these options for specifying addresses in the memory card y This is not available during on line editing 7 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Chang
54. 1 Specify a level of diffusion Color 0 15 standard 8 Assign priority to brightness or color for depicting When a specified number gets smaller brightness takes priority over color Green 0 15 standard 8 Assign priority to blue green based color or red yellow based color for depicting When a specified number gets smaller green based color takes priority over other colors Convert Clicking this option depressed brings up the preview of the placed image Redraw When any setting TC Dither or O Pseudo Gradation has been changed click Convert depressed and Redraw The image according to the change is previewed 7 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 8 DXF File Convert A DXF file can be imported into a screen data file as graphic data Operation Procedure 1 Select DXF File Convert from the Tool menu The DXF File Select dialog is displayed 2 Choose the desired DXF file and click Open The Convert Setting dialog is displayed Commi alla 3 Specify Zoom in the range of 10 to 250 4 When setting conditions for file import click Detail Setting Ziedel Hing per pt ee Set Ss P zept ri ar tee E O r md Pan El imira a D ama m ipi jara Praga 1p ad pg PF ga d bey br ip Dapp esst apar paa C Gan Bugs T pas prada bg A Dep EL LE
55. 38400 57600 Select a data transfer rate between the computer and the modem TONE PULSE Select TONE pushbutton or PULSE dial according to the telephone line type in use Telephone No Specify the telephone number of the receiver Dial timeout sec Set a timeout period until a normal response is given from the receiver The default is 60 seconds 6 When the dialog setting is concluded click OK The Transfer dialog is displayed again 7 Click PC gt for Transfer Screen data transfer starts When screen data transfer with a modem is executed while the Main Menu local main screen is displayed a message Transferring Data appears at the bottom left of the screen The message disappears on completion of transfer For about 15 seconds after the message disappears the switches and the function switches on the Main Menu screen do not work 1O _ 5 32 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Transfer Error Messages Displayed on GVWIN The following error messages are added associated with the modem function If any occur the message is displayed on the GVWIN No response from target e Check the connection with the other end for power on off or cable disconnection e Timeout may occur before a response is returned Extend the timeout period The circuit is cut The telephone line is disconne
56. Appendix2 3D Parts 3 The Switch List window is displayed When the desired 3D parts file is already displayed go to step 5 Click the Parts File button mirk A rra ee eee Pa A Le 4 The Select Parts File dialog is displayed Select a parts file 3DStd G2p or 3Dnow_pLU G2p according to the number of the switch patterns Ex When the file 3Dnow_p4 G2p is selected a 4 pattern switch can be selected APP2 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts 5 3D parts are displayed in the Switch List window OO U U a JUMP lt gt These buttons scroll up down the parts list Parts File Click this button when selecting another parts file Select Click this button to select a switch part Display Pattern This option is used to check the displays of the OFF ON and P3 to P8 patterns Color Select This option is used to select a color from eight Select the desired part and color and click Select APP2 5 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts 6 The selected part is previewed in the Switch dialog OFF ON P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 OFF ON P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 Color Clicking each tab shows the preview of the corresponding pattern Color change 8 colors is possible while the previe
57. Electric Works Computer GV series With GV42 52 62 or PLC GV40 50 60 AIGV823 5 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Data Transfer to CF Card For GV42 52 62 only A CF card to which screen data has been transferred from the GVWIN software computer is inserted into a GV42 52 62 and the data is transferred from the card to the GV42 52 62 Arrangements e CF card For recommended CF cards see the GV42 52 62 Hardware Manual or Chapter 23 CF Cord in the Reference Manual Function e CF card reader writer GV series CF card manager Le N el y CF card reader writer Y D O D D Si O o Lem D lt o 5 gt D s 5 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer 5 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Data Transfer via Modem For more information see page 5 25 RS 232C cable straight AIGV8103 cross cable RS 232C cable accompanying the modem Modem PW ER OH CD DA O 0000 Modular cable accompanying the modem Telephone line modular socket
58. Ex Placing a Calendar Part in Screen Library In the example below a calendar part is registered in screen library No O and the screen library is placed on three screens 02 01 01 PAE E onff 02 01 01 PENES E el 02 01 01 Jee Wwe Screen No 0 Screen No 1 Screen No 2 oxoror 12 15 15 TUE Screen library No 0 02 01 01 SE 4 81 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items e Memory used by a Matsushita Electric Works standard calendar part is about 300 bytes When the calendar parts are placed on three screens directly 900 bytes are used 300 x 3 900 bytes e When a 300 byte calendar part is registered in a screen library and the part is placed on a screen 315 bytes and 7 bytes are used respectively 315 7 7 7 336 bytes e By using screen library 564 bytes 900 336 564 are saved Use of screen library saves memory loc Screen Parts Management Through Screen Library Should a part registered in a screen library be replaced after it has been placed on screens replace it in the screen library only The parts on the screens are also replaced simultaneously When the calendar part in screen library No 0 has been replaced the parts on screen Nos 0 to 2 are also replaced 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE el 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE wwf 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE Screen No 0 Screen No 1 Screen No 2 Scr
59. Finnish Faeroese French Character 6 x 11 dots SIZES 8 x 16 dots Displayed A 640x480 800 x 600 characters 100 characters 100 characters x 43 lines x 54 lines 80 characters 100 characters x 30 lines x 37 lines APP1 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts Setting Procedure 1 Font type setting page APP1 8 in this chapter Select English Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times for Font 2 Font setting for individual functions in use page APP1 9 in this chapter Specify the number of points as a character size in property setting when setting a part mode or text in drawing 3 Manual font setting page APP1 11 in this chapter When automatic font setting is not valid for any function set in step 2 make a manual font setting 4 Data transfer to the GV series page APP1 13 in this chapter Transfer the screen data using the HK font to the GV series APP1 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net lt CH OD n O TI O a n Appendix 1 Fonts Font Type Setting In the Font Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu select English Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times for Font If you attempt to change a Font setting from English We
60. Meter and Closed Area Graph Click the desired graph icon HSS Se suelo e E bs The graph dialog is displayed Has rd Lat Fi Ad amg Come A For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 8 Graph Display in the Reference Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button brings up the parts list Select the desired part and click Select The previous dialog is displayed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button 2 48 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Statistic Graph Clicking the Stat Graph icon brings up the following tool bar o Bj a ees Statistic bar graph display Statistic pie graph Click either Stat Bar Graph or Stat Pie Graph icon The corresponding dialog is displayed zj e o a H D O D 3 D D o LU r Gi Clicking the Display icon brings up a numerical data display part dialog To establish a link between numerical data display part and statistic graph specify the same division number for them IT For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 8 Graph Display in the Reference Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button brings up the parts list Select the desired part and click Select The previous dialog is disp
61. Pattern List window click the desired pattern of ce o emmmer WM Te Fleer To call the pattern click the JUMP button AS 3 23 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools 2 Click Place A dotted line box as large as a pattern is displayed with the cursor _ tC Seis ee a A Ne ee E el ee ee i ete EN er E ele i el 3 Click the mouse in the desired position The pattern is placed Clicking the mouse again places the same pattern on the screen To cancel pattern placement click the Select icon 1 Placing Multiple Patterns Continuously This is useful when placing split registered patterns in alignment 1 In the Pattern List window click the M Place button The Multiple Pattern dialog shown below is displayed The following options are included in the dialog Haupt alle Sia Ha if nm Nh w Deen oF ngi iiu E Re IW Lal Zeen Start No Specify the top pattern number to be placed Q ty X Y Specify the quantity of patterns along the X axis and the Y axis Direction RGT BTM Choose either direction of aligning patterns in multi placement No INC Check this box M No INC when placing patterns increasing the number by one When this is not checked O No INC the same patterns are copied for multi placement 3 24 CTi Automation Phone 800 89
62. Samples 100 Store Target Internal buffer Full Processing Continuous When a CSV file like this is created with Microsoft EXCEL Cia ia Bask a ee ps fg r Lee ee ra Cap IA Ree e Wen gam E o bt WEE ta SBA LR H Sp i d j 1st sampling data P ia ag i I Tig E J as rd al IR Td 1 i i mA Td a ir Mi Uu d i T mij 1 rf 1 a my ER TZ re ES I Jr IEF a i Ta iG i ae iz Tid 1 al ibe Til nF i 1 iff I r I Es i D I Pal El rd TH T I E TH E sc e CS AN d II Tt GE E I d a Fe 3 a LJ Cc i a4 i d D CT rara mua O s d Word No 0 Word No Ne Word No 2 Word No 3 y When the number of sampling times is smaller than the CSV file data amount Example Sampling frequency is 20 but the CSV file has 60 pieces of data Stop The program will stop after displaying 20 pieces of data 20 points are displayed on the GV series Continuous The first 20 pieces of data are continuously displayed 8 25 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Read Procedure 1 Go to the File menu and click on Read CSV File The Select CSV File dialog is displayed ETT O E Look 1 E Uy Lizzani m ES pa Sr dl lp CS Pei ae i D n ba I M Hals hi n CARD STE 2 Select the file name to read 3 Setthe buffer number for the stored data For the setting
63. Screen dialog is displayed Specify the screen number to be opened and click OK Screen Editing IT Refer to each individual chapter in this manual for editing a screen For limitations on screen editing such as a limited number of parts see Chapter 2 Screens 4 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Graphic Library Graphics or numerical data displays that will be displayed by bit setting ON are registered in the graphic library Graphic Library Structure A graphic library screen and a screen are the same in size A total of 2 560 graphic library screens are divided into 10 groups for registration Therefore one graphic library group is capable of storing 256 screens Group No 0 Group No 1 Group No 2 Group No 9 Graphic No 0 Graphic No 0 Graphic No 0 Graphic No 0 Graphic No 2 Graphic No 2 Graphic No 2 Graphic No 2 Graphic No 253 Graphic No 253 Graphic No 253 Graphic No 253 Graphic No 254 Graphic No 254 Graphic No 255 Graphic No 255 Calling the Graphic Library Graphic No 254 Graphic No 255 Graphic No 254 Graphic No 255 1 Select Graphic Library from the Item menu The Graphic Library dialog is displayed 2 Specify the graphic library group number to be opened and the desired graphic number 3 Click OK ben Zei Seating Linmep
64. Screen Number and Comment Display The comment registered during screen edit is displayed here When a screen is selected here the Im E 1 screen shown on the GV series will change 8 28 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Right click Menu A menu like the one shown here is displayed when the right mouse button is clicked el pal Copy fe e ANTES Be However the following menu items are only active for a new file e Cut e Paste e Delete e Change Display Address e Item Setting e Comment Setting Help Menu Help functions are accessible from the Help menu Information such as the operation method can be displayed on the personal computer by clicking on Help Index and Help Topics Additionally version information can be checked by clicking About V Simulator or the About V Simulator icon Help Help Indes Hi 3 Q Help Topics About Simulator 7 Bejm 2 8 29 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Error List The following errors may arise on the GV series screen during communication between the GV series and simulator computer Communication Error Error code received 05 Computer Numerical Data Entry Screen
65. Techniques File Management File Division and Combination The GV42 52 62 can create a screen data file of great capacity With the GV series it is also possible to create a screen data file using large amounts of memory depending on the model However such a file cannot be stored on only one floppy disk Using File Divide and File Combine the file can be divided into several sections for storage on floppy disks and can be recombined File Divide 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select File Divide The Divide File dialog is displayed 3 Specify the desired file name for Divide Source Clicking Refer brings up the File to Divide dialog A file can be selected from the dialog 4 Specify the desired file name for Store Target The extensions div is provided At this time the divided sections of the file cannot be stored on floppy disks Store them on the hard disk once IOoe 7 5 Select the floppy disk capacity from 1 44 Mbyte 1 25 Mbyte or 720 Kbyte ras the ES jc th teg od te Sal dt We D waha inan aar i D Leite a e F sch dw EECH io e D eTe Q Sar a AAA ATAA A A Tee S TE Zoe OH ETE gt l gt E 38 bam oF Cini 6 Click OK The file is divided automatically The divided sections of the file are stored in the format of file name n div o Save all the files to recombine them 7 41 CTi Automation Phone 800 8
66. Tile the screen edit window and the tray icon display window Hold down the AS CTRL key and drag the chosen item to the tray window The item can also be registered in this manner y lr yl Can e A Te mm Caidos a pen Hold down the Ctrl key and drag 4 When deleting a tray icon click it and press the DEL key or select Delete from the Edit menu 7 23 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Pasting Part in Tray to Screen 1 Tile the screen edit window and the tray window 2 Drag the tray icon of the desired part to the screen edit window The part is pasted to the window ie Ze bes remm zeen i mem Ce EA gt M1 8 Drag and place Tray Display Change e Right click on the tray window and select Change Window The Tray List Display window is displayed instead of the Tray Icon Display window The contents of each tray can be viewed Clicking Change Window again brings back the tray icon display window a AAA E A bam llran i SA 7 24 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques e Right click a tray icon on the Tray Icon Display window and select Property The Property dialog is displayed The information on the registered part and its image are displayed
67. Tools Drawing from the Line End Position 1 Select the right icon for the draw type We Bee Ges re pe Es Giph Secale Ee aie S cake Towel Gime Sikes ALT Make the required setting on the dialog beforehand Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point When the mouse is released the arc is displayed St 3 9 Se Clicking the mouse to the desired position draws the arc S l LI Start point ees End point Trend Graph Scale w Q O Z a SCH O o T Clicking the Trend Graph Scale icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below e f ee me Ire pes TI pe jamaikai Pace B T BR el coto ET RE RG o e s F eg eg Mr pa a pe R F Legokse ih F sl F 4 Length 1 16 Set the length of short gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button This setting is used for both X and Y axes Ol Line When this box is checked M the scale is drawn with lines When this box is not checked LJ the scale is drawn without lines 3 33 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Split No 1 255 Set the number of divisions of the scale Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button Separate settings for the X and Y axes are required O Long
68. a menu that contains some commands The commands included in the menu vary depending on the screen condition When No Items are Selected Right clicking a mouse brings up the following menu 2 i chi Q K g TART 10 ar aE 11 eran ain 12 _ Bii 3 Sji 4 Gi 5 ail ne i d fan D TEE ovariapa sith bg tech 13 mg 7 d re bre 8 PF Sara Es 1 Undo 2 Redo Same as Undo Redo in the Edit menu 3 ON Grid When this command is clicked once a check mark is added to the command The screen becomes the on grid status Clicking the command again clears the check mark The on grid status is canceled 4 Grid Display When this command is clicked once it is checked Grids are displayed on the screen Clicking the command again clears the check mark and the grids 5 Grid Type Select the grid type from 1 Byte Switch Mode and Free 6 Hide overlaps with Base checked When this command is clicked once it is checked When a normal overlap is placed on a screen it can be hidden by changing the editing layer from Overlap to Base When Overlap is checked again the overlap is shown Clicking the Hide overlaps with Base checked again clears the check mark and shows the overlap 7 On line Editing This command is valid when GV is connected to a personal computer using a screen data transfer cable When this command is clicked once a c
69. an area along the switch frame to select characters Do not select the switch Click Vertical Align or Horizontal Align in the Align sub menu The character graphics on the switch are center aligned in the switch area dk ABCD Characters are vertically aligned to this area r u Horizontal Align also works in the same manner m When the switch itself is enclosed together with characters it is also aligned When you want to align characters only do not select the switch Iloc 1 40 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Select Environment This command is used for editing screens or multi overlaps Items to be selected can be limited Clicking Select Environment brings up the following dialog Select Option All is chosen as default Clicking the Select button brings up the Select Option dialog Choose a desired option It is displayed in the Select Option field in the Select Environment dialog Only in the Current Division A division number can be specified for selecting parts When this option is checked the selection is valid for parts having the same division number as the current division Point Search Icon A graphic item can be snapped to a different graphic item with ease during drawing or screen editing This icon is useful in creating scr
70. and color pallets are copied 33 te ben Siem Setting Geier Seating Tool Weeer Seen PLC Ta raphe Libres Comm Patria Hiria Edi Hodel msnim New Eoi Sating Nee B iet Chien Seah See Fam Black Hubanng Aree Setting Direci Block _ Hema Led Searg 5055 B kak CF Card Satin Tis Fries 5 et En Char 15 Ven baing En Cha 32 Sound atra La Sheps Barcode Satire Sean Libra CM Let Seeing Naco er carter ee limpia fonra JAAN Sack dating Bubs Tee HARAN Fiir Table d Woda Sly Lon Piro Teen PTE RN Pa Ear 7 28 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques In addition to the function as mentioned above the following are e Copying files e Deleting files e Partitioning a file occupying large amounts of memory e Combining the partitioned sections of a file Part File Management The desired parts can be copied between part files File Management Screen Data File 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select Screen Data File The File Manage Screen Data displayed also available dialog is 3 Specify the desired files for Copy Source and Copy Target respectively Files can be selected by clicking Reference L n Manara Acre Bla 4 Click OK The File Managing dialog is displayed The contents to be displayed vary somewhat depending on the selected item from t
71. area part is used in relay mode or in message mode to display messages or in graphic mode to display graphics Editing Procedure IT The procedure for editing display area parts is almost the same as used for overlap parts See the procedure explained on page APP3 7 However the frame setting is used for display area parts Unlike overlap parts the basic part area and the part area of the display area part are independent This makes it necessary to reset the frame in editing N Graphic data Basic part area Part area APP3 33 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Printing the Part Part File An explanation of how to print out the contents of the part file is provided below Printing Procedure Option Setting Dialog 1 While a part edit window is opened select Printer Setting from the File menu Fm Eat np Ear Pat i 2 The Option Setting dialog is displayed M Screen Output Part graphics are printed O List Output Items set for parts are printed O Table Print The table of parts is printed When this option is checked the Screen Output and List Output options are not active O Reverse The parts are printed in reverse video Only the white and black portions are reversed O Monochrome If the printed part is difficult to see check this box Legibility m
72. data Follow the procedure below 1 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu 2 The Transfer dialog is displayed Click the Up date of System button 5 21 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer 3 The following confirmation message appears Loram lp pesii dd Darts Eni a a uid on de ere pe Parmi Lamm ok ea Dare Tigeris 2 i Transfer only New Data Only the data files in the GV series that are older than the counterparts in the transfer data are updated Note that no confirmation message appears in advance Transfer All All data files specified for updating are transferred Therefore transfer will be executed even if the transfer data is older than the data in the GV series Note that no confirmation message appears in advance Yes No When the transfer data is older than or the same as the data in the GV series the confirmation message is displayed by clicking either button To continue transfer click Yes To discontinue click No 4 On completion of data transfer the GV series is brought to the previous state l Never turn off the GV series during system updating 5 22 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Online Editing Online editing means editing screen data
73. data display part It exists only in a display area part for data sampling Data displays are located on the top line of the basic part area The position can be changed horizontally It can be moved horizontally BEER 1234 1234 1234 lt 1234 m Q J O v O O D o pmj D O m D O 5 U o ech A maximum of 16 data displays can be placed in a part Whether or not to display data is determined in the Sampling Display Area dialog E ps flare rp Bad E To display data ee Piet check the box APP3 29 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Editing Procedure The procedure to create a new display area part including four items of data for data sampling is explained below Data Sampling Disp Area Part Edit window 1 The edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 2 Click the New Part icon A dotted box and a mover tool appear 3 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new data sampling display area part is placed SE EECH 4 Double click the part The Sampling Display Area dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window 10D 5 Select the display area part Click the Change the Setting o
74. dialogs see Chapter 3 Switch or Chapter 4 Lamp in the Reference Manual Function 2 39 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Data Display Numerical Data and Character Displays When placing numerical data display parts click the Num Data Display icon When placing character display parts click the Char Display icon The Num Display or Char Display dialog is displayed Nam Lae Ge Fen Dad Ets n lre li MIEDOS E IA For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 5 Data Display in the Reference Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button in either dialog brings up the Num Display List or Char Display List window Select a part and click the Select button The previous dialog is displayed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button Message Display Click the Message Display icon The Message Disp dialog is displayed IT For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 5 Data Display in the Reference Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button brings up the Message Disp List window Select a part and click the Select button The previous dialog is displayed Message display parts are used to display variable messages The parts are displayed as MSG on the editor scree
75. displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window IOC 6 Select the statistic graph part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 7 The Modify Part window for the statistic graph bar part is displayed Edit the part or change its size 8 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part 9 Close the Modify Part window Stat Bar Graph Part Edit window 10 The former edit window is displayed The modified statistic graph bar part appears in the window APP3 23 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Statistic Graph Pie Editing Procedure There is only one type of statistic graph pie With Internal Circle Complete Round Unlike pie graphs there are no options such as the sector or other types for statistic graph pie Statistic graph pie part Always equipped with internal circle The procedure for editing statistic graph pie parts is the same as used for statistic graph bar parts See the previous section Statistic Graph Bar Editing Procedure page APP3 23 E L The statistic graph pie has a size limit The inner radius must be 10 dots or more The difference betwee
76. e a 5 3 Data KREIEN 5 5 Bel Dial si don 5 10 screen Data Transter Via AlGVG1 08 iii da 5 12 Screen Pata Tiransier Orr Elements 5 14 Screen Data Transfer via CF Card OF te GYVy42 526 2 ONN EE 5 15 Pranster OF Other Data EEN 5 17 SU EE e EE 5 21 A O 5 23 Screen Data Transier Ma EE a 5 25 After Screen Data Trasteros ii 5 34 Ss A A A ne geet aa 5 34 SA A A 5 34 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter pG Print Breil 6 1 Available Ee 6 1 A A 6 1 Option Setting Dial ada iaa 6 2 A A r 6 4 Print Setting Dialogni 6 4 Printing the Currently Opened Wmdow 6 7 PIRINEO 6 8 Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Kale 7 1 Wiele RO UE EE 7 1 Function 1 Error A a a a 7 2 F nction 2 Memory aa 7 4 Function 3 Memory Address Uee 7 5 Function 4 Change MOMOLSY cceeccceccecsesseecccecceeseceeeeceeueueceeeesseaaseeeeeessaaasass 7 7 Function 5 Copy Image to Pattern cccooocconccnncnnnnnnccnnnnnononnnnncnnnnononononnnnnnns 7 10 Function 6 Copy Image to Clip Board 7 12 Funcion Pasto BUNAD EG 7 14 Function 8 DXF Ele Conve GE 7 17 Function 9 Convert to Rich Text Format 7 19 Function La Add Video Mens dd da 7 21 Function 1d CUSTOM RA os asis 7 21 ic eens e E 7 23 Funcion 13 ad RE ai EE 7 26 File Management EE 7 27 File Management Outline ccccccccccccccccccononnnnncnnnnnncnononononnnencnnnnnonononnnannnnnns 7 27 File Ma
77. edit window is displayed The modified numerical data display part appears in the window Editing a Keypad The keypad for inputting numerals or characters consists of numerous individual switch parts but is registered in the part file as a single part Therefore to create and register a keypad part each individual part should be created following the procedure explained in Editing Switch Lamp Parts and should be grouped into one part m A TU ke O O D OQ pmj D LI h O m GN O gt U Q BECKER D A keypad part consists TRE e ofa group of switch parts Function of a ae SE pee is Lekelsclolo lor 3 selected from Entry IO Teles When creating a switch for a keypad there is no option for choosing the number of notches The parts for the keypad must be 2 notch However a function must be chosen from the switch function pull down menu APP3 15 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Editing Procedure Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 2 Click the New Part icon The function pull down menu is displayed i be pS ai SE CR EA fe TR bp Ligne Es Taga Dir Cie ut Le Lees Aia Lager 3 Choose Text Num for examp
78. elliptical arc or sector 5 Move the cursor clockwise portion to be erased or counter clockwise portion to be drawn along the elliptical arc or sector and click on the end point 6 Clicking the mouse draws the elliptical arc or sector Clockwise Rene Counter clockwise CQ 3 17 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net w a Q O Z a SCH O o T Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Text Clicking the Text icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Be Grp G ReGen Some Tend Glas Soa s 1 Ss e Tee pas Text Field Text can be entered when the cursor is flashing in the text field If the cursor is not flashing in the text field click the mouse on the text field Number of Characters Available The maximum permissible number of characters per line depends on the number of displayed dots Max number of characters 1 byte mmm Text Entry Check that the cursor is flashing in the text field and enter characters using the keyboard Dn faert z Peras imitar Med Teel Le Jl Ba arde Te re fo L If you would like to enter two byte characters switch IME of your computer and AS operate as appropriate 3 18 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Selecting Colors Foreground
79. file name within eight one byte alphanumerics to be used as wallpaper O CH OH en D eg O gt lt O mD 3 OH gt t LO OH gt Q g JPEG files are made available by storing them in the GVW JPEG folder and written to a CF card IT For how to write JPEG files to a CF card or other information on JPEG files see Chapter 19 JPEG Display in the Reference Manual Function Specify Position O Enlarge This option is active for patterns A selected file can be enlarged under equal magnification and placed with respect to the upper left corner of the screen Display Center Select this option when placing the selected file at the center of the screen Tile Select this option when tiling multiple pieces of the selected file with respect to the upper left corner of the screen Display Corner Select this option when placing the selected file at a corner of the screen Top Left Top Right Bottom Left Bottom Right 2 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Display Environment Setting Grids or area lines can be displayed as a screen editing guide Display Environment Dialog Select Display Environment or Change All Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed Cil tds fg Ga iaa handel ie Leen
80. in the Reference Manual Function A E LALA MAA AE Mide AT 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 1 Overlap 13 Bar Graph 25 Alarm Display 2 Switch 14 Pie Graph 26 Time Display 3 Lamp 15 Panel Meter 27 Calendar Display 4 Num Data Display 16 Stat Graph 28 Memo Pad 5 Char Display 17 Trend Graph 29 Macro Mode 6 Message Display 18 Closed Area Graph 30 Interval Timer 7 Table Data Display 19 Graphic Mode 31 Memory Card Mode 8 Relay Mode 20 Graphic Relay Mode 32 Animation GV52 62 only 9 Relay Sub Mode 21 Trend Sampling 33 Video GV52 62 only 10 Message Mode 22 Data Sampling 34 JPEG Display GV52 62 only 11 Entry Mode 23 Bit Sampling 35 Sound GV52 62 only 12 Data Block Area 24 Relay Sampling Edit Tool Bar A Each icon has the function shown below For more information see Edit Menu page 1 12 b Pa SZ Le M a he Se Cut Point Search Copy Redo Paste Undo Multi Copy Change the Setting of a Part Placed Move to Front Flip Move to Back Rotate Graphic Group Ungroup 1 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Draw Tool Bar IT Each icon has the function shown below For more information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools OO Pree 77s n OF Ze Line Screen Library Box Multi Text Circle Trend Graph Scale Text Pie Graph Scale Pattern Bar Graph Scale
81. in the Reference Manual Function settings become invalid Set the overlap as a multi overlap on the screen when enabling the macro settings Q If a registered multi overlap is set as a call overlap on the screen these macro O If you delete a multi overlap that is with an OPEN or CLOSE macro setting be sure to delete the macro as well Failure to delete the macro will cause an error during screen data transfer to the GV oa Macro Setting Commands Select OPEN Macro Edit or CLOSE Macro Edit from the Edit menu The corresponding macro editing window is displayed Macro Editing and Deleting The description is provided on page 4 55 4 24 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Block Data blocks parts are provided as areas where data displays such as numerical data or character display parts or graphics are registered Data Block Structure A maximum of 1 024 data blocks can be registered Data block Line A setting Data 1 1234 Data 2 1234 Data3 1234 P e C setting Data 4 1234 d O D W O O O Data5 1234 ad 1234 22 1234 23 1234 h4 1234 a5 1234 A maximum of 1 024 data blocks can be registered Calling a Data Block Select Data Block from the Item menu The Data Block dialog is displayed Specify the data block number to be opened and click OK
82. in the Switch When a switch lamp or calendar part is enlarged reduced while this option is checked the text on the switch or the lamp or YY MM DD hh mm ss SUN of the calendar part is also enlarged reduced When this option is unchecked the text or the YY MM DD hh mm ss SUN is not changed in size O Limit of Edit Model Area When this option is checked items can be moved within the available screen area of GV When it is unchecked items can be moved beyond the area O Enlarge Items including Circles in the Opposite Angle When this option is checked the selected item can be enlarged reduced only in the diagonal directions Dragging handle A or B results in dragging handle 1 Likewise dragging handle C or D results in dragging handle 2 When enlarging reducing a graphic consisting of circles and lines boxes the graphic shape is not changed with this option O Not Display Overlaps when Base is Selected The function of this option is the same as Hide Overlaps with Base Checked included in the right click menu For more information see Chapter 1 Basic Operation Windows 2000 NT4 0 Paint Processing When Windows 2000 or Windows NT4 0 is used painting may not be performed normally Check this option in such a case 2 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Part Types and Placement This section explai
83. included O Dither The option is valid when an option other than 32K is selected for Color Type for Convert When O Dither is checked middle tones are corrected Dithering is performed to make the colors of the bitmap closer to the original O Pseudo Gradation When this option is checked pseudo gradation is used When the Detail gt gt button is clicked the detail setting is possible The following items are included res OG Tt in Color luga For Corra JS rou Tf a Fr 7 15 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 O LI Chapter 7 Useful Techniques When O Use 3D Parts is checked in the Environment Setting tab window of the Unit Setting dialog with the GV40 50 60 this option and TC Dither cannot be selected The M Pseudo Gradation display is automatically selected Adaptive Error Diffusion Error diffusion adapted to each individual part of the image can be performed This function places emphasis on smoothness of image more than the following Error Diffusion does Error Diffusion If a color of the source image is not included in the color pallet two bits in similar colors are placed alternately so as to reproduce the color Nothing A pallet similar to the source image color is selected Ordered Dithering Error diffusion pattern is made closer to regular pattern Diffusion 0 3 standard
84. is displayed Specify the file name and click Save 7 To delete the registered custom parts click the box for deletion and push the Delete key or click Delete on the Edit menu Pasting a Custom Part to the Screen 1 Select Custom Part from the Tool menu The sub menu is displayed Click Open 2 The Select Custom Parts File dialog is displayed Choose a file and click Open 3 The Custom Part window is displayed Select Tile from the Window menu The Custom Part window and the screen edit window are tiled 4 Drag the desired custom part from the Custom Part window to the screen edit window Drag and place 7 22 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 12 Tray Parts or graphics can be stored in 15 trays These parts or graphics can be used in different screen data files Since the trays are registered in the environment file Gve try they can be used any time until the file is deleted Operation Procedure Registration Deletion in from Trays 1 In ascreen edit window choose a part or graphic to be registered in a tray and copy it 2 Select Tray from the Tool menu The Tray Icon Display window is displayed 3 Paste the copied part or graphic to the tray window The copied item is reduced to an icon and displayed in the window 4 O LI y
85. is possible even if the foreground color is different from the boundary color Ex If you draw an elliptical sector on the line and paint the enclosed area it is painted as shown below Paint the graphic drawn as below 1 Line red In the Paint tab window In the Paint tab window mme M Boundary Color for Foreground L Boundary Color for Foreground lt i gt Foreground Green Foreground Green Painted area 2 Elliptical z WH sector green D D Paint color green runs through red Paint color green stops area and stops at the green area at the red or green area 3 26 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools L To cancel the paint or to check the painted area select Display Environment x from the Display menu and remove the check mark from M Paint Dsp Graphic Call This command is used when placing a graphic registered in the graphic library on the screen IT For graphic registration and graphic library see Chapter 4 Registration Items Clicking the Graphic Call icon brings up the Graphic Library List window Placing Graphics 1 In the Graphic Library List window click the desired graphic IER Limay Gono cl EN To call the graphic click the JUMP button 3 27 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web ww
86. is transferred During screen data transfer to a new GV series unit the I F driver file is also transferred automatically Therefore this option is not necessary When the GV series already contains the I F driver file and it should be updated select this option Program Select this option when updating the GV series system program SYSTEM PROG Font Data Select this option when updating the font data 12 point size only in the case of Gothic English Western Europe HK GE and English Western Europe HK Times and the Main Menu local main screen in the GV series Temp PLC2 This option is valid only when the temperature control network or PLC2 Way function is used Select the option when updating the protocol file for either of them For more information on the temperature control network see the Temperature Control Network Manual This option is valid for the Gothic English Western Europe HK Gothic and English Western Europe HK Times font types Font data specified by manual font setting except for 12 point size is transferred Font data specified by automatic font setting is transferred with screen data 5 10 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Transfer Data SRAM Data This option is valid when an SRAM cassette or a built in SRAM is in use With the option setting the data is backed up at the time of SRAM battery ch
87. minutes Fora new file aname should be given when the file is auto saved for the first time Auto save operation is not performed when the macro edit window example switch ON macro editing screen OPEN macro editing etc is open Please take note of this IOC 1 43 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation MEMO Please use this page freely 1 44 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net AFI Screens Screen Compositon 2 1 A 2 1 Screen Giruchure 2 5 Operation Environment Setting sssseneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeee 2 7 Background Color Gettmg rnnr rnnr nennen 2 7 Display Environment Gettng ennenen 2 10 Part Types and Hlacement 2 17 EE e O E EE Om 2 17 Notes on Parts Placement 2 18 a e o e eer nena ener rence 2 21 Parts Placement from Tool Bars 2 28 Parts Placement and Setting sssssseseeeeeeeeereeseeeene 2 34 A ten ctectee ace enaeeee ees eeceseceasne ee ccct 2 34 ei 2 39 Dala DISDIAY sesiones Deg de 2 40 Relay Relay Sub and Message Modes 0 2 46 Entry Mode and Data Block rea oooooonccccncncnncicnnon 2 47 Bar Graph Pie Graph Panel Meter and Closed Area Graphie 2 48 Aa nian bateevdaueiis 2 49 Tend g2 10 EE 2 50 Graphic Mode and Graphic Relay Mode s ssssssesseseenn 2 50 il a el E 2 51
88. moved to the position APP3 1 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing L Part Frame Setting h In a switch part the graphic size may differ from the switch area If an irregular graphic is drawn for a switch part the switch area may not fit the graphic The part frame can be adjusted to fit the whole part in this situation The part frame can be set either automatically or manually When fitting a frame to a part automatically select Frame Auto Fitting from the Edit menu Or click the Frame Auto Fit icon or choose Frame Auto Fitting from the right clicking menu MA Pave Chee The frame automatically fits the part A frame can be set manually as desired Select Frame Manual Fitting from the Edit menu The mover tool appears as shown below Drag the mover tool to the desired position The frame is placed in the position Mover tool J Frame or Area Property for the Graphic When creating ON and OFF displays for a switch lamp part their colors can be changed directly from the Switch Lamp dialog by designating the ON OFF graphics as frame property Frame or area property Areal Refer to the following table Frame ON display Be ga ae Le ha tm i mmal eng The above function is also used for lamp parts APP3 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www c
89. net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Parts Change Ex Lamp Follow the procedure below to replace a placed part with another 1 Double click a part to be replaced Or click the part and the Detail Prop Change icon T gt ACOLLE Click a part and the Detail Prop Change icon Double click a part p p ge 2 Click the Parts Select button The Lamp List window is displayed e im Dimis Lk IFT iff 1 3 When opening a different parts file click the Parts File button and select the desired parts file 4 Select the desired part and click the Select button When U Save Setting is checked part change is possible while the current lamp data memory address draw mode etc is saved When this box is unchecked the data reverts to the default Ioc 5 The Lamp dialog is displayed Click OK The lamp has been replaced with the selected one 2 26 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Parts Enlargement Reduction When a part is clicked handles are shown all around denoting that the part is selected By dragging handles the part can be enlarged or reduced Clicking shows handles PMH nn nnn nnn seen A EEEE Enlarged diagonally Enlarged vertically Parts Selection e When selecting multiple parts drag the mouse enclosing all the desired parts from the top l
90. part or a graphic or parts or graphics and click this menu The Multiple Copy dialog is displayed 0 LA O O O D o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O wa m BE IT R aL T Pa l mer A The following setting items are included Dot Line Column Choose either option for placing copied parts on the screen by dots or by lines columns For more information on the line and column see Chapter 2 Screens page 2 6 Direction When the check box of Memory INC or Order INC is turned on M it determines the direction of placing copied parts When changing the direction click Change Direction The Select Direction dialog is displayed Choose the desired direction and click OK The selected direction becomes valid Interval Pitch Choose either option for placing copied parts on the screen by pitch or at intervals For more information see the next page X Distance Y Distance Specify distances along the X and Y directions for placing copied parts The unit for these values is Dots or Line Column that is selected 1 35 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Quantity X Quantity Y Specify the number of required copies The copy source must be included in this number Ex When a solid box is multiple copied Interval X Distance 20 Y Distance 10 Quantity X 2 Quant
91. patterns other parts 3Dfront G2p Switches lamps 2 and 3 patterns GV40 50 60 compatible 3Dside G2p Switches lamps 2 and 3 patterns GV40 50 60 compatible e Installed as options O 3D Parts is checked 3Dnow_p2 G2p Switches lamps 2 patterns other parts 3Dnow_p3 G2p Switches lamps 3 patterns 3Dnow_p4 G2p Switches lamps 4 patterns 3Dnow_p5 G2p Switches lamps 5 patterns 3Dnow_p6 G2p Switches lamps 6 patterns 3Dnow_p7 G2p Switches lamps 7 patterns 3Dnow_p8 G2p Switches lamps 8 patterns During software installation the selected files are stored in the AGVWParts folder Do not move the Parts folder Parts3D folder and bitmap files in folders to different storage places Do not change their names I0 Memory Capacity 3D parts need more memory than memory for ordinary parts Check the current status of memory use by selecting Memory Use from the Tool menu If a message The size is too large to communicate is given during data transfer memory expansion by installing an optional memory cassette AIGV824 is recommended 1 APP2 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts Limitation on Parts Placement A maximum of 1 023 patterns of 3D parts can be used in one screen data file e Pattern count When one part or multiple parts of the same type in the same size are
92. pe pe E ale Select the draw type 3 15 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net w Q O Z a SCH O o T Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Drawing from the Diagonal Line 1 Select the left icon for the draw type He Get Sie Pets Leg bs 2 Select the desired options for Foreground and Line Type 3 Drag from the start point until the desired circle or ellipse is drawn O LJ Start point End point 4 When you stop dragging a line is displayed Click the mouse at the start point of the elliptical arc or sector 5 Move the cursor clockwise portion to be erased or counter clockwise portion to be drawn along the elliptical arc or sector and click on the end point 6 Clicking the mouse draws the elliptical arc or sector o GQ p Counter clockwise 3 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Drawing from the Center 1 Select the right icon for the draw type He Get Sie Petes ese Tred Gise Soa Mull Tes m Jh pe Ende Ire IL pe Ip 2 Select the desired options for Foreground and Line Type 3 Drag from the center to the desired radius L Start point End point 4 When you stop dragging a line is displayed Click the mouse at the start point of the
93. placed Switch lamp WE Count the notch number of one part Parts other than switch and lamp Count one pattern When parts of the same type in different sizes are placed Switch lamp cooooocccnncccnnnnoccnnnnnnnnnnos Count the notch number of each part Parts other than switch lamp Count one pattern for each part Ex The switch and lamp parts on the following screen use 58 patterns 2 notch x 26 pieces 3 notch x 2 pieces 58 Each bottom right value indicates the notch number of the part 0709 ame Only one part is the target to count because they are of the same type in the same size 3 notch parts They are the same type parts in different sizes They are counted individually APP2 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts Setting Procedure Switch and Lamp This section explains the 3D switch parts setting procedure Also follow the same procedure when placing lamps The procedure varies for GV40 50 60 compatible 3D parts 3Dfront G2p 3Dside G2p Refer to page APP2 10 in this chapter OO U U a 1 Click the Switch icon 2 The Switch dialog is displayed Click the Parts Select button He Pisano Dead Ei La Im Io APP2 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
94. point Click Double click Second point End point Box Clicking the Box icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below w a Q O Z a SCH O o T Bn mep Shae Pepas freed Bis Sak Hu Tee Lon Be Ge Te Rectangle 1 Click the Rectangle icon in the Screen Drawing dialog Select the desired options for O Paint Foreground Background Tile and Line Type ie Soe Hi Ti pes L When M Paint is checked O Frame becomes active It is possible to select whether or not to draw the frame of the painted box When this option is checked Frame Color can be selected O Paint M Paint M Paint O Frame M Frame E CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 7 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools 2 Arectangle is drawn when dragging from the start point to the end point Start point amp End point Drag Drag End point i Start point KI A rectangle can be drawn from any corner Chamfered Box Only for rectangles chamfered box can be selected Round Chamfering or Chamfering can be selected and Radius in dots should be specified No Round Chamfering _ t Chamfering Chamfering r LJ 1 1 D H DH D H D Y y 8 Radius e Radius Select either Round Chamfering or Chamfering before drawing the rectangle When a chamfered box is sele
95. s r l North amp South America http www aromat com Benelux ae O BI Spain Matsushita Electric Works Espa a S A MUSA Aromat Corporation e Portugal Matsushita Electric Works Espafia S A Portuguese Branch Office 629 Central Ave New Providence N J 07974 U S A Czech Matsushita Electric Works CZ s r o Tel 1 908 464 3550 Headquarters Scandinavia Matsushita Electric Works Scandinavia AB e New Jersey SS e a e Georgia 4 PS ye e Massachusetts e Illinois ai e Texas e California Los Angeles San Jose e Michigan Canada Aromat Canada Inc Asia d ys E Singapore Matsushita Electric Works Asia Pacific Pte Ltd 101 Thomson Road 25 03 05 United Square Singapore 307591 Representative Office Tel 65 255 5473 Malaysia Matsushita Electric Works Malaysia Sdn Bhd China Thailand Matsushita Electric Works Sales Thailand Co Ltd Shenzhen U A E Matsushita Electric Works Middle East FZE e Indonesia E China Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd e Vietnam 2013 Beijing Fortune Building No 5 Dong San Huan Bei Lu e Philippines Chaoyang District Beijing 100004 China e Myanmer Tel 86 10 6590 8646 e India Beijing Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Beijing Branch Office e Turkey Shanghai Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Shanghai Branch Office e Brazil Guangzhou Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Guangzhou Branch Office Dalian Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Dalian Branch Offic
96. screen data file is stored as Dsp0000 bin BIN file in the access folder Dsp in the CF card At the same time files with certain extensions are written to CF card folders in accordance with the screen data file settings A For how to store screen data for automatic uploading or other functions of CF card see Chapter 23 CF Card in the Reference Manual Function Screen Data Transfer from CF Card 1 Inserta CF card into the CF card reader writer 2 Start up the GVWIN software Select CF Card Manager from the File menu 3 Specify the drive in which the CF card is now inserted Click OK The CF card manager starts 4 Check that the access folder Dsp in the CF card stores the screen data file Dsp0000 bin BIN file Select the file 5 Select Put BIN File Back from the File or right click menu 6 The Select a screen data to save dialog is displayed Select the desired file name and click Save 7 The converted file is stored in the specified place Screen Data Transfer between CF Card and GV series Ly For the description of screen data transfer between a CF card and a GV42 52 62 see Chapter 2 GV Operations in the GV42 52 62 Hardware Manual 5 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Transfer of Other Data This section explains options for Transfer Data other than Screen Data
97. show the offset mark on the screen M MLIB Mark Dsp This option is active when setting a call overlap or multi overlap Choose whether or not to show the MLIB mark on the screen to position the overlap Handle Color Choose the color of handles shown around clicked items 2 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Grid Tab Window sad Hiei a He cisma T Self Mal oad EZE FREE Ss APO E m e Fie eb a er a pm Bulnes JUsWUOJIAUA uoeiado O Grid Dep When this option is checked grids are displayed TC ON Grid When this option is checked on grid editing is enabled This on grid editing is not valid for items on overlaps Grid Color Select the desired grid color as well as the color of the dotted lines that denote the available screen area of GV Grid Type A grid type can be selected from the following four 1 Byte The grids are based on the unit 8 x 20 the unit of one byte character 8 x 16 dots plus four Y axis dots The reference point is placed at coordinates 0 3 The maximum number of one byte characters which can be displayed on the one byte character grids depends on the GV model Refer to the following table when placing messages or texts on the screen Switch When matrix switch GV40 50 60 is used the switch operatin
98. size setting is 800 dots horizontal and 600 dots vertical However if Rotate Mirror operation is performed on a pattern placed on the screen or in the graphic library the size is limited to 4 088 dots or less pattern size X size x Y size e When animation is performed with patterns in the graphic mode or the graphic relay mode patterns that are 4 088 dots or less in size tend to be depicted more smoothly Once a pattern is placed it cannot be reduced but can be enlarged Ifa pattern is 4 088 dots or less in size its size can be multiplied by integers Note that if a pattern that does not exceed 4 088 dots is enlarged on the screen or in the graphic library it may exceed 4 088 dots and thus be subject to the limitations described above in the case of Rotate Mirror operation or animation 4 54 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Macro Block Macro programs are registered in macro blocks Macro blocks are executed by CALL commands in the macro mode or in other macro programs Macro Block Structure A maximum of 1 024 macro blocks can be registered A maximum of 1 024 lines can be set for one macro block Calling a Macro Block Select Macro Block from the Item menu The Macro Block dialog is displayed Specify the macro block number to be opened and click OK Z D O O Y O O 22 ben Eyt
99. switch lamp and click this command The characters are center aligned 1 39 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Also characters on the switch or lamp can be center aligned by clicking the Centering button on the Character tab window of the Switch dialog This command is valid only when characters are entered in the Switch Lamp dialog If characters are placed as graphics use Align Setting for centering 00 0 DY Flush Right Left Top Bottom Select the desired items at the same time and click the command The items are aligned as commanded Vertical Align Select the desired items at the same time and click this command The selected items are vertically aligned Horizontal Align Select the desired items at the same time and click this command The selected items are horizontally aligned Align Setting Clicking this menu brings up the Align Setting dialog Pitch Equal Free This selection determines the pitch for alignment When Free is selected specify the distance Selected Area When this option is checked M the items in the area enclosed by the mouse are all aligned For example when characters are placed on a switch as graphics Check Selected Area and enclose the character graphics in an area smaller than the switch area A dotted box is displayed Enclose
100. the box when printing graphics in the graphic library Ol Page Block TO Direct Block TC Screen Block O Macro Block Ol Data Block O Multi Overlap O Data Sheet IC Screen Library Select these options when printing respective items Settings in the range of O to 1023 are valid O Temp PLC2 Net Table 0 to 31 This option is valid when the temperature control network or PLC2Way function is used Select this option when printing the temperature control network or PLC2Way table O MR400 Format Call 1 to 128 This option is valid when the GV series is connected to the barcode printer MR400 Select this option when printing the MR400 format table call O MR400 Format Register 1 to 128 This option is valid when the GV series is connected to the barcode printer MR400 Select this option when printing the MR400 format table register O Modbus Slave Table 0 to 255 This option is valid when Modbus slave communication is in use Select the option when printing the Modbus slave memory table O Animation 0 to 1023 For the GV52 62 except for GV42C 6 5 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Print Select this option when printing the frame that is defined with an animation number The frame used for the specified animation number can be printed Start Page Specify the first page number to be printed Op
101. the memory addresses for Start and End amie Adios os Kri en se SCC RR 3 Click Word or Bit for Display 4 When O Cross reference is checked cross references are shown If no cross reference Is necessary do not check the box 4 O LI When Cross reference is checked 7 5 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques 5 If you would like to see the memory use of the current screen check O Display only Screen n To check the memory use of the entire file do not check this box 6 Click OK The List of Memory Address Use is displayed L About AS When O Cross reference is not checked is shown for the used memory addresses Double clicking an asterisk mark brings up the screen or dialog to which the memory address is allocated By locating the cursor on an asterisk mark the mouse turns into MEM mark and the corresponding address is indicated on the status bar vea epa CH eg 4 i E FE Gee eee re ee ee A e ks be a las E tad bb H N e al lo E Ear lo Eo b d E i El Gr U FAri eee BLA m e S Address where the MEM cursor is placed 7 To close this window click the x Close button at the upper right or the click the upper left icon and select Close 7 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 2
102. this icon 2 37 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Video Display Clicking the Video button brings up the Overlap Video dialog GV42 52 62 GV40 50 60 eee a ee Lae e E Dam Note The GV42 52 62 is provided with the Video function to show video images For more information see Chapter 18 Video Display in the Reference Manual Function Ly For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 2 Overlap in the Reference Manual Function By clicking OK the Overlap icon is registered in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen To recheck the dialog data click this icon 2 38 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Switch and Lamp Switches and lamps can be placed in the same manner When placing switch parts click the Switch icon When placing lamp parts click the Lamp icon For more information on placing these parts see page 2 25 of Ns D ajenan em E a Hen Danana Kia Lois Hake Di ZA s HI tea m Fj fa Lo e Oss gt Lem z AAA aD D irmi ka 3 E Lamm Ps zeng Li ps cl E ep Ce Pacii o is Frie hyne LD a Den Cen IT For the description of setting the
103. to Flash Function page APP2 8 in this chapter APP2 23 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net O T O gt N 5 Appendix2 3D Parts Notes on Usage e If the GVW Parts User folder in the computer you are going to operate for screen editing does not store a bitmap used in the screen data the bitmap file is automatically created at the time of opening the screen data and is registered in the folder If another bitmap file having the same name already exits the above mentioned automatic file creation is not executed Use the Refer button in the Customize tab window and execute reading of the bitmap file again A bitmap file registered by automatic creation is not completely identical to the original file Switches and lamps are drawn in the REP mode Transparent color The GV series recognizes areas on a screen colored black code 0000 as transparent When there is an area that should not be depicted on the screen color it black To depict black areas instead of transparent areas draw them using a color code similar to black APP2 24 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts M EMO Please use this page freely O T t O gt N 5 APP2 25 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www c
104. to be tested etc can be set freely The contents of the SIM file created here can be saved Open screen data on GVWIN Transfer screen data from the GVWIN editor to the GV series Transferring screen data and the I F driver page 8 4 Connecting a personal computer with the GV seriespage 8 5 Start up the Simulator Starting up the Simulator from the windows menu page 8 6 Start Simulator communication Starting communication with the GV series Create a new SIM file Creating a new SIM file page 8 14 Use the SIM file to perform a test Testing bit memory page 8 17 Testing word memory page 8 18 Stop Simulator communication Stopping communication with the GV series 8 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Hi 3 Q Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Preliminaries Transferring Screen Data and the I F Driver Transfer the screen data and the I F driver from the GVWIN editor to the GV series for debugging on the Simulator 1 Click the Transfer icon in the tool bar The Transfer dialog is displayed 2 Check the O Use Simulator box and choose Screen Data for Transfer Data Transfer the screen data Frenos Cos A Mili Dist toa Heron T Gorden Dala l U tte Ponen Cm e T Panormi dea ra 7 tore Te al ma wi e l l a Reg Shami Diet Ten ae rage vi E od c Gg 3 After t
105. to the part s size e Switch part e Num data display part Graphic data Basic part area 7 Area for numericals only Basic part area E switch area Graphic data Part area Part geg e Bar graph part e Closed area graph part Graphic data Graphic i data Basic part area Part area Basic part area e Display area part _ Basic part area Graphic data Part area mA APP AAA APP3 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing fa Modifying Parts In Screen Data Files This section describes the procedure for modifying parts It is possible to slightly modify parts in screen editing keeping the original parts stored in the part file unchanged Parts Modifying Procedure Click a part placed on the screen Handles are shown around it Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon in the tool bar Liam Roe Peng q Lee Se me ee D ST ST Z O o TU eb LI 3 o O D D gt O ab e GN T D d The Modify Part window is displayed Modify the part Adjust the frame to fit the modified part if necessary The part modifying procedure is almost the same as the part editing procedure For more information see Modify Part window page APP3 8 in Editing Procedures for Each Part des
106. upper case and lower case letters during searching messages 6 Clicking Find Next starts searching the window in the selected direction Replacement 1 In the Message Edit window check the position of the mouse cursor 2 Select Replace from the Edit menu The Replace dialog is displayed Fede FE Sei paar M aio que E 3 Enter the desired strings respectively into the Find what and Replace with fields Check O Match case to make a distinction between upper case and lower case letters during searching messages 4 34 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 4 Clicking Find Next starts searching the window downward from the cursor position When Replace is clicked the string for Find what if found during searching downward from the cursor position is replaced with the string for Replace with and search continues When Replace All is clicked all the strings for Find what if found during searching downward from the cursor position are replaced with the string for Replace with When searching the Message Edit window entirely move the cursor to the top o In advance Message Display Environment Setting The Display menu contains commands for messages Font Bold When this command is selected message characters are displayed in the bold style similar to the Bold optio
107. way to reverse multiple bits simultaneously see page 8 19 Hi 3 Q 8 17 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Testing Word Memory The procedure for changing the numerical value of the data display is described here As an example the value DT100 will be changed 1 Double click on the setting value on the data display Double click here 2 The Write Memory dialog is displayed 3 Enter the desired number into the box 4 If necessary change the format of the value that you enter As an example 123 is entered in decimal notation 5 Click on OK to close the dialog 6 123 is displayed on the GV series 8 18 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN L Setting Resetting Multiple Bits Simultaneously x 1 Select the bit memory that will be set reset multiple selections possible Select sequentially by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking the mouse Select randomly by holding down the CTRL key and clicking the mouse 2 Pressing the space bar sets the bits 3 Pressing the space bar again resets the bits Entering Numerical Values for Multiple Pieces of Memory Simultaneously 1 Select the memory that you will set numerical values for multiple selections possible
108. www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Parts File Parts such as switches lamps or data displays SP parts mentioned on page 2 17 are registered in parts files Desired parts will be selected from these parts files and placed on the screen A placed part can be replaced as desired Kinds of Parts Files Three different extensions are provided to parts files e G2P GV42 52 62 parts file e GVP GV40 50 60 parts file The following parts files are provided from Matsushita Electric Works Std G2p 32 000 color Parts _j G2p 32 000 color be lt D N S 5 o U D O ap D 5 F 3D parts for GV42 52 62 GV4 2 52 62 3D parts forGV42 52 62 For GV42C GV4 Parts j GVp 0 50 3Dfront GVp 60 3Dside GVp Parts_mono GVp 2 21 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens 3D Parts The GV42 52 62 and the GV40 50 60 are provided with parts using 3D graphics Extra care should be taken in handling these 3D parts For the description of setting and placing the parts see Appendix2 3D Parts This section explains how to set parts other than 3D parts Parts File Ex Switch Clicking the Switch icon brings up the Switch dialog gt sad Di ae d ae TA 4 Mes fran Letal Lin Dake imm P 2 22 CTi Auto
109. 08 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 O LI Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Operation Procedure 1 Click Convert to Rich Text Format in the Tool menu The following dialog is displayed ll rado a mer TS r A IT r sage Bet METE mo B M wee F et lr M ga hs St WT ef M Sege fg f MATA dei Tats bled T pas iii F F r _ F E z TT mess DP o Fe Se Ces B la Fo initan D Miere i ite kent E Tain Ee 2 Check each item to convert to a Rich Text file and input the range of each editing item Data Sheet cannot be converted to Rich Text file loc The setting items O Screen Output O List Output O Table Print O Reverse are same as printing A For more information see Chapter 6 Print 3 Specify the name and the location of a Rich Text file at the File Name setting When changing the name or the location press the Refer button 4 When the dialog setting is concluded click OK The size of the Rich Text file made by the GVWIN editor is much larger because it is not compressed The size will become smaller if the Rich Text file is saved as the normal document file e g doc in Microsoft Word by the Save As command oa 7 20 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 10 Add Video Menu When a vide
110. 08 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 4 Change Memory Change All Memory Memory addresses allocated to the current editing file can be changed simultaneously Up to 10 different memory ranges can be set Operation Procedure 1 Select Change Memory from the Tool menu The sub menu is displayed Click Change All Memory 2 The Change All Memory dialog is displayed Less Trevi p E resche Line Ken Tee e Ls ei de a ee P fas Y DF DF BF Birr ao i d e PA A AO tral 8 tf E PS E Cano Par i ri E AAA a E ES i El r F sm k H r B ic E m FR El i mos y pa E mE oe Y mt ra a 4 O LI 3 Check the numbered box Memory address selection becomes available 4 Choose Bit or Word Memory change is performed in units of bits or words as selected 5 Enter the first address of the memory addresses to be changed for Before Change Start Mem No Likewise enter the last address of the memory addresses to be changed for Before Change End Mem No 6 Enter the desired first address after change for After Change Start Mem No in the same manner 7 Click Option and set the items of which memory addresses should be changed For more information refer to the next section 8 Click Change The specified memory addresses are changed at one time 7 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894
111. 1 Opening a FNS srera mair EEE a EE 1 2 A 1 5 Basic Operation of the Editor esee 1 6 Names of Components rtr tn tr tn nr nn rnnr rnrn reen 1 6 Menu Bai ni 1 11 BI ee 1 17 Gelee Tele 1 22 Lu E 1 27 Useful Operations nnnnnnnrnrararntnrnrnrrrtntttntnnrtrenenenene 1 30 Useful Editing Commands ccccccnnnnnnnnnnconononenononinineness 1 35 Screen Data File Property CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation i Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Starting and Quitting This section describes how to start and quit the GVWIN editor For the GVWIN installation procedure see Installation attached to the GVWIN editor Starting Start your computer and check that Windows runs correctly 1 Click the Start button of Windows and click Programs VWIN then GVWIN J Y D gt O o el O O It is possible to start from the GVWIN shortcut icon aT 2 The GVWIN initial screen is displayed 1 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Opening a File Opening a New File 1 Click the New icon in the tool bar or select New from the File menu ee A R A8 ST hh A UA aj
112. 3 Function 13 Tag Tabli inneni ian 7 26 File Management 7 27 File Management Outlme nanne narren nanne 7 27 File Management Screen Data File o o cocccco 7 29 File Management Part File cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 35 File Management File Copy 7 39 File Management File DeletiON o oooccccnnnnnnnnnnnnn 7 40 File Management File Division and Combination 7 41 File Management File Compartson nnee 7 43 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email infoOctiautomation i Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Tools The Tool menu provides useful tools for screen creation If you are familiar with these tools you can edit screen data quite easily Tool Menu List The Tool menu provides the following functions Tool Uses SCC Error Check Files are checked for errors Page 7 2 Memory Use Memory used by the current editing file is Page 7 4 displayed Memory Address Use Memory addresses used in the current editing file Page 7 5 are displayed Change Memory Memory addresses used in the current editing file Page 7 7 are changed Screen Image The current screen image is registered as Page 7 10 Make Pattern patterns Screen Image The current screen image is copied to the Page 7 12 Copy to Clip
113. 4 Registration Items Notes on Parts Placement When placing parts on the screen check available memory per screen GV42 52 62 256 kB GV40 50 60 128 kB and the limited number of parts that can be registered on one division one layer base overlap 0 2 and one screen four layers The limitation and the maximum number of the parts are listed below A For more information on divisions see page 2 2 Parts Limit per Limit per Limit per screen division layer GV 42 52 62 GV40 50 60 2 18 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Parts Limitper Limitper Limit per screen division layer GV42 52 62 GV40 50 60 Setting memory Setting memory Animation 3 Video display 3 JPEG display 3 256 Sound 3 256 Screen library 1 A maximum of four memory card modes can be set on one screen four layers though there is a limitation For instance two layers of one screen cannot contain one list display each But it is possible that one layer contains one list display anda different layer of the same screen contains one format screen 2 When placing a screen library on the screen the parts registered in the screen library are subject to the same limit items in the chart above When placing a screen library that has a mode registered in it it is necessary to select division numbers that have no mode registered 3 T
114. 4 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools 2 Click OK A dotted line box as large as the pattern is displayed with the cursor BS DA A A A E a EE e A DR e A EE A A A A a te eet 3 Click the mouse in the desired position Multiple patterns are placed in alignment Pattern No 5 Pattern No 6 Pattern No 7 Pattern No 8 Clicking the mouse again places the same pattern on the screen To cancel pattern placement click the Select icon IOC 3 25 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net w Q O Z a SCH O o T Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Paint An enclosed area can be painted Clicking the Paint icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Be Graph Shea Pela Trend Nad Teel Les f pa loop 1 Tee Pe po toed DT DREI RG Weg ew CR Tie Fe Goals Coba ia Pompa O Boundary Color for Foreground Select the boundary color to be used when painting When M Boundary Color for Foreground is checked the enclosed area is painted in the same color as the one selected for Foreground Painting is possible in the same color as the boundary color Y S When O Boundary Color for Foreground is not checked the enclosed area can be painted in a color different from the one selected for Foreground Painting
115. 4 37 4 88 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net yet Transfer Before Using the GV Geries ENEE 5 1 ll UE e E 5 1 Screen Data Check 5 2 Screen Data Mans E 5 3 Prol cnica 5 3 Data Transfer Methode onnnn000nannnnnnnnennennennnnnnneenennenne 5 5 Transfer Dialog pusiste 5 10 Screen Data Transfer via VC 5 12 Screen Data Transfer on Eiere 5 14 Screen Data Transfer via CF Card For the V7 Series Onhy 5 15 Screen Data Transfer via Memory Card CREC 5 17 Transfer of Other Data 5 21 EMO 916521 a EE 5 28 Onine o E nn 5 30 Screen Data Transfer via Modem 5 32 After Screen Data Transier 5 40 GONE de E 5 40 Screen Check 5 40 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation i Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Before Using the GV Series Before attempting to use the GV series preliminaries including creation of screen data and its transfer to the GV series cable arrangement for connection with the PLC and connection data setting are required Refer to the following for details Preliminary Steps The steps below are required before the use of the GV series Screen data file editing Page 5 2 Operations For screen data files
116. 412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens The relay mode tool bar consists of the following icons Display area Switch Lamp Up down switch Detail Icon In the case of a tool bar containing a Detail icon its setting must be made to make the part operable Start setting from the Detail icon 1 Click the Detail icon on the relay mode tool bar U Q 4 lt CH a dp Q o H Q O D 3 Part OD 2 The Relay dialog is displayed When the dialog setting is concluded click OK AAA oe Man Luca Vina Dana The Relay Mode icon is registered in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen IT For more information on the tool box refer to the following 2 29 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens e About the Part auxiliary tool box Modification When the Relay dialog from the Detail icon setting is concluded and you click OK the Relay Mode icon is registered in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen The icon in the box indicates the division number specified in the dialog When checking or modifying the data of the dialog click the icon in the Part auxiliary tool box lts tool bar or dialog is displayed e Deletion 1 Click the icon t
117. 5 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing QUIN Sit dto APP3 1 Components of Paris aia o APP3 2 Modifying Parts In Screen Data Files ccccccccccccnccnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnos APP3 3 Parts Modifying Procedure aii ei APP3 3 Creation and Storage of Part Files nono nonnnnnnranannnnnnnno APP3 4 reali ae e oo neo APP3 4 Saving and Closing Part Files ccccccssssceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessssssesessssessessess APP3 6 Editing Procedures for Each Pai A APP3 7 Editing Overlay Paris iba das APP3 7 Eding SWIGh EAM EE APP3 9 Editing Data Display PONS aan atl xeccaieuuscesaeuaetpadeatvetostuntasttettecs APP3 14 Editing a Keypad errea A APP3 15 Editing Graph e APP3 17 Editing Display Area Parts for Data Gamplmg APP3 29 Editing Calendar Pati APP3 31 Selten APP3 33 PINUS age e A nd ieee statered sn ige haus r S APP3 34 PII Procede dodo sida riada APP3 34 Part File Manade ment ia ias APP3 36 Part File Managing Procedure ooococcnccccccccccccnonononccnnnoncnnonocoonnanconnnnonnonnononos APP3 36 leg eltern EE APP3 38 iia Par Gite tele e EE APP3 38 Na Modiy Pan WINGO Wes aso APP3 42 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net eE Basic Operation Starting and Quitting BEE 1 1 I E 1
118. 8 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Outline of Registration Items GV series screen data files consist of areas called screens Parts and graphics can be placed on screens Meanwhile data items or graphics the contents of which will vary according to circumstances cannot be placed on screens Thus these items are registered in different areas Parts such as switches or lamps that permanently exist on a screen Il gl L_ are placed directly on the screen Screen O Z D O Kn al JJ D e 0 e Ta o Sg O 5 D 3 0 Memory error Power supply error Cylinder error Cycle time over Pattern Timeout Tank error Data mismatch Communication failure Graphic library Message Items that will vary according to the circumstances are registered in different areas These areas are called registration items When editing these items start from selection from the Item menu 4 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Contents of Registration Items The following table indicates the contents of the registration items and their uses Registration Item Screen Graphic library Multi overlap Data block Message Pattern Macro block Page block Direct block Screen block Tile Data sheet Screen library Multi language Ani
119. 8 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Rotate Graphic The following graphic items can be rotated Applicable graphic items Line continuous line box parallelogram polygon circle arc sector ellipse elliptical arc paint including frame scale Operation Procedure Select the desired graphic item When handles are shown click Rotate Graphic or icon The following Rotate dialog is displayed At the top left corner of the graphic item a CENT mark is indicated CENT mark DEEN i a E Bake E SC we TRJ em Angle 90 180 270 Select the desired angle for rotation The center of rotation is the position marked with CENT Rotate Clicking this button rotates the selected graphic item Quit Clicking this button brings up the Rotate dialog When rotating a graphic item the message Item is out of working area is displayed if it cannot be held in the screen space after rotation In such a case move the rotation center or change the rotation angle TD Center When the Rotate icon is clicked the rotation center is automatically located at the top left corner When changing the rotation center click the Center button The following mouse is displayed on the screen Click the mouse on the desired position The CENT mark moves to the clicked position Click this position The CENT mark gt ES CENT Mul
120. 8 1 preliminar 8 4 O A eee IA 8 13 SIM EH 8 3 AE chee aeee Eia RE 8 6 A 8 17 CSV A ree 8 25 EIB ee ee BEE 8 21 SOUNO ee 2 56 Special CONT eseu eege 3 11 SBAM dali EE 5 27 statisti e ET 1 WEE 2 49 Slat SiO EE 1 10 SUDCHIMDOSS oda 2 8 A A 2 39 part A A diet APP3 9 System Setting men 1 16 system updating a es 5 28 T TEMPLPLOZ GE ee 5 27 Ma e eege eg 4 72 IMSS 2 52 A A 7 1 Add Video Menu ais gege gees h 7 21 change Memory coooocccnnncnnnnnccnnnnnonanccnncnnonancnnnnnos 7 7 convert to rich text format cccecccsseseeeeees 7 19 copy image to clip board cooooocccccccccccccncncncccnns 7 12 copy image to pattern ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 10 CUSTOM PANE stars papas 7 21 DXF file convert ccccceceeseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 7 17 SOT CHECK ni ee ie ieee ees 7 2 Memory address USO cocccccccnnnnncoccncnnncncnnnnnnnnanoos 7 5 mem USO otr 7 4 EIERE ue 7 1 paste DIM E 7 14 TAQ Bei EE 7 26 ES eet ege 7 23 tee E 1 8 2 28 A AEN 2 29 TOO Metas ps sas 1 16 7 1 IV UTC EE 5 1 EE 5 12 after screen data transfer ceeeeeeeees 5 40 GF Cal EE 5 15 I F driver UI 5 21 Memory ee EE 5 17 online editing 5 30 preliminary StepS AAA 5 1 system updating oconcnccccccncccncnoninenininnnnnnnnnnos 5 28 transfer data A ee 5 27 t nt dala sisi tion iento tds 5 26 VE OVET A A tals 5 21 ladder COMM prg cusco Ae See 5 28 modbus COMM prg coccccccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 5 28 PDIOQL
121. 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts When any function mode or part that needs manual font setting is used on the screen proceed to set the Font Setting dialog 1 Open the Font Setting dialog from the System Setting menu Open the Manual Font Setting tab window Lar ed oe ro eg ras Emi FP Bees F pan Coe tom i l ikg T M n 1 am TI if r ii E ji T Test week M E jm Ss lege io Fri Lape ii jmp rem gri HRN EF kee T es 2 mp nU pra WM KE hon As seen from the window every option is provided with a check box Check the boxes of the options used in the screen data All checked options are transferred as font data y LJ Transfer Fonts x This option is displayed for the GV40 50 60 If your GV40 50 60 system program version is earlier than 1 520 and the GV40 50 60 data is transferred to a memory card with this box checked the manual font setting data is also transferred as screen data When uploading the data from the memory card to the GV40 50 60 not all HK font data HK Gothic and HK Times is specified as the data to be uploaded even with Font Data selected on the GV40 50 60 screen To allow the manual font setting data to be uploaded select Screen Data 2 Click the Capacity Calculation button The amounts of memory used by the checked options and available memory are indicated Memory for manual font setting data is limit
122. 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Menu Bar File Menu D New sl Opens a new file and brings up the screen for editing E O Open D Opens an existing file for screen editing gt Save a Saves the current file If it is a new file you must give a name to the file D Save As m Saves the current file under a new or different name Property Allows you to check the information on the current file For more information on the menu items see page 1 42 Transfer Transfers data between the computer lt gt GV or a memory card For more information see Chapter 5 Transfer Send AT Command Used for transferring a screen data file using a modem For more information see Chapter 5 Transfer On line Editing Used for on line editing On line Run This command becomes active in on line editing When it is clicked only the screen data that has not been transferred yet is transferred to GV Printer Setting Used for printing a screen Editing of margins headers or footers etc is available For more information see Chapter 6 Print Print Prints out the created screen data file from the computer For more information see Chapter 6 Print Present Window Printing Prints out the window currently opened Set necessary data by clicking Printer Setting in advance CF Card Manager
123. 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items One Time Setting of Multiple Blocks If consecutive lines are registered in several page blocks by the same number of lines use Multiple Setting 1 Select Multiple Setting from the Edit menu or the right click menu k tus bes Gees Zeng Jet o en Lee CM 2 The Multiple Setting dialog is displayed Huir pia IER Start block No Specify a top number of the multiple page blocks for one time setting Setting Blocks Specify the total number of page blocks for one time setting Start Message Specify the first message group number and the first line number in the top page block Lines of Message Specify the number of lines in one block 3 When the dialog setting is concluded click OK Multiple page blocks are set as per the above dialog setting 4 64 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Direct Block Lines selected as desired from the previously registered messages in different groups can be re registered in direct blocks Direct blocks are different from page blocks in the point that direct blocks ignore the order of messages Direct blocks are used in the relay sub mode parts or the message mode parts Direct Block Structure A maximum of 1 024 d
124. 94 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Combine When the divided sections of a file are stored on different floppy disks copy them to one directory in advance Iloc 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select File Combine The Combine File dialog is displayed 3 Specify the desired file name for Combine Source AA iS Sol pr pape od he coed ey be aire dar laa go A ei Stan leai JO dali Dri DEMI QUEDE Ma ea The divided sections of the file are stored in the format of file name n div Specify one of the divided sections loa 4 Click Open At the same time the file name before division is entered for Store Target 5 Click OK The sections are combined automatically 7 42 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Management File Comparison Two screen data files are compared and the result is reported It is not possible to compare files of the GV42 52 62 and the GV40 50 60 Joa File Comparing 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select File Comparing 3 The File Comparing dialog shown below is displayed Specify the files to be compared 4 Click OK File comparison is started and the result is reported in the window shown below When the files ar
125. AIGV820 be installed for memory expansion With either memory cassette AIGV820 installed open the Memory Expansion tab window in the Unit Setting dialog from the System Setting menu and select 4M Memory Extension 1 Memory Capacity 3D parts need more memory than memory for ordinary parts Check the current status of memory use by selecting Memory Use from the Tool menu Ifa message The size is too large to communicate is given during data transfer even though there is available memory check the hardware version of the GV series IOC Parts File Matsushita Electric Works provides the following two 3D parts files for the GV40 50 60 During installation of the GVWIN software the files are stored in the Parts folder included in the GVW folder e 3Dfront gvp Switches lamps 2 and 3 patterns e 3Dside gvp Switches lamps 2 and 3 patterns Do not move the Parts folder and bitmap files in the folder to different storage places Do not change their names Joa APP2 21 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts Customizing When a part being edited for creating a GV42 52 62 screen has the Customize tab in the part setting dialog a user created bitmap is available for the part Types of Parts The parts below are provided with the Customize tabs in their respective dialogs e Switch e Lamp e Nume
126. AOA eege E oral 5 25 SRAM data EE 5 27 station no table o cooocococococcconcnnncnnnnnnnnns 5 27 Ree BEE 5 27 Transfer dialog oooccccccccoonccnnnnnonocononnnnnnas 5 10 transfer method OFCI BEE 5 7 EEMELI ari nit 5 6 MEMO cald iria 5 8 MOI EE 5 9 sii att 5 3 PIGN GO LA EE 5 5 transfer via Modem ccccccecececssessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeas 5 32 TAY eeh 7 23 e Kei 2 50 V VIGGO E 2 56 W EE remitidas lc 2 9 Salling a a 2 9 Window MENU 1 16 E EE 9 1 deleting placed parts ccccececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 16 A A 9 1 usage le 9 2 SOM A Sege 9 6 Adio OU MON RE 9 2 trend graph display ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net GLOBAL NETWORK Europe http www mac europe com E Germany Matsushita Electric Works Europe AG Rudolf Diesel Ring 2 D 83607 Holzkirchen Germany Tel 49 8024 648 0 Germany Matsushita Electric Works Deutschland G m b H United Kingdom Matsushita Electric Works UK Ltd e Ireland Matsushita Electric Works UK Ltd Irish Branch Office Austria Matsushita Electric Works Austria G m b H Switzerland Matsushita Electric Works Schweiz AG France Matsushita Electric Works France S A R L Italy Matsushita Electric Works Italia
127. Becomes active for the GV42 52 62 that is compatible with CF cards For more information see Chapter 23 CF Card in the Reference Manual Function Start Simulator Starts the GVWIN simulation software Simulator For more information see Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN File Managing 1 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Used for copying screens graphics etc between different screen data files For more information see Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Parts Edit Used for setting modifying or registering parts For more information see Appendix 3 Part Editing Edit Menu Undo Cancels actions that you performed Up to 7 times Redo Becomes active when Undo is performed Reverts the state before undoing Up to 7 times Undo Wizard Cancels wizard operation that you performed Cut Cuts the selected item and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected item to the clipboard Paste Pastes the item in the clipboard to the screen Copy to Selected Screen Pastes the copied item to multiple screens For more information see page 1 37 Undo Paste to Selected Screen Cancels the Copy to Selected Screen operation that you performed Delete Deletes the selected item Select a part or a graphic or parts or graphics to be deleted and click th
128. CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard 5 Enter texts to be placed on the switches 1 to 4 tabs Open tab windows one by one and enter texts of the switches in the OFF status A B C and D are entered respectively for the four switches in this example Char Color Select a text color from the pull down menu Click the Finish button 6 Across cursor is displayed Click it in the desired position NETE ve L cheers TETEE EEEN IF de memi TUE aim ete ac Be e et It aoe Lali ached inl Eh EK KU _ Disitig gp ug Ise eh AE E B ss mt DOI ER LEE Q el E o Q O be m x Y 3 fol D n 9 5 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard Error Display This section explains the settings to place an error display in which errors currently occurring will be shown from ten registered messages and placed from the top position in order of importance R Ser Al Setting Procedure 1 In the Wizard dialog select Error Display from the parts list and click the OK button Ad OA A rana pt fe eebe ae A 9 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard 2 Select whether or
129. Chapter 4 Registration Items Changing an Offset Position Every graphic library screen in the graphic library has an offset position at coordinates X Y 0 0 as default To change the position follow the procedure below 1 Click the Offset icon on the drawing tool bar SAO BOOT 1 ALAS B 2 Across cursor marked with OFF appears gt OFF 3 Click the mouse in the desired position The offset mark is displayed at that location Click The OFF mark is displayed H 7 Changing the offset position prior to registering a graphic is not valid Set an offset position after registering a graphic I0 Parameter Setting Outline of Parameter Graphics registered in the graphic library may be moved or transformed on the screen If data displays to be explained later are registered they also may be moved transformed or changed in displayed value These graphics or data displays require memory and consequently require parameter setting for memory allocation Setting parameters only in the graphic library is not sufficient for moving transforming or changing graphics Make sure to set parameters for each part on the screen Ioc 4 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Parameter Setting Procedure 1 Click on a graphic in the graphic library to select it 2 Click the Parame
130. D u der kepsan 1 i Ehi Ls ee 7 oo lri tierra El e dierri RAE ie aoe TD chloe A ere e Enter key on the keyboard 7 44 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net efi Applications for GVWIN A 8 1 A e AT 8 1 COMPOS AA rn A 8 1 Operation Procedure AAA 8 1 Fe II AMO EE 8 4 Starting up ANd Closing ooooooocccccocononononono nono 8 6 Starting and Stopping Communication 8 7 Setting Items Necessary for Communication 8 9 PD OUT SIM EN 8 12 WS SG DE 8 17 Useful Operations nnnnnnnnnrnrnrn rnrn rnttrtntrtrtrnrtrnnenenene 8 21 Menu and COMS vcncccs ie cneicianscecnnaneacecsndedenduacndsundsssededaosends 8 28 Error List CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation i Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Simulator Outline e Normally when a GV screen has been created perform an operation check connecting the GV to the PLC However when the Simulator is used it is possible to perform an operation check on a newly created screen without the PLC The Simulator runs on Windows and it is possible to set reset bit device as well as input data to word device It is not possible to use the Simulator for the GV of universal serial com
131. E 2 16 Display Men 1 14 1 27 E EE 2 2 Draw Menu ri 1 15 3 1 A du Ta A E in sale Sil wei eens 3 1 DaSiG ele EE 3 2 COM aan 3 1 drawing method bar graph scale ici ia 3 29 Sie EE 3 7 A E 3 12 A ee ee 3 29 let 3 5 DECHE ee ae eer he Reena Ca 3 35 Dal TEE 3 26 DATION EE 3 23 pie graph scale EEN 3 31 SCROC 0 EIB EE 3 37 TOK coarse hates tak sae E e 3 18 trend graph scale A 3 33 drawing tools graphic Cal oa 3 27 Screen Drawing dialog ooooccccccccccccco 3 2 seleciing COlOrS EE 3 3 selecting line styles oocccononnccnnccnococonnnonnnnno 3 4 selecing Ules ies sacle uectee das aneun aoaes 3 3 DXF file convert ooooccccccconooccnnncnonnoconnnononanconnnnnnnns 7 17 E PEGIE MGM EN 1 12 1 22 1 35 SMW Mode ee deeg EE ee 2 47 SHON CNC dee Ee 7 2 OX Le EE 5 27 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net INDEX F file division and combination Me eer e UE 7 42 THE e e 7 41 file management ccccececseesseeeeeeeessseeeeeesneneees 7 27 MOCO eaa a A 7 39 file deletion EE 7 40 manageable files o cooonnccccccoonncinnnnnnnos 7 28 ele le LE 7 27 Patilla ee et eee 7 35 APP3 36 screen data Mii ee 7 28 at IG RE 1 11 1 42 A a E 5 10 Hash TUNGOD aranana de e APP2 8 le EE 1 39 ele EE APP1 1 co A sa concecccsnatteatacees APP1 3 Chinese simplified 20 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeees APP1 3 English Western Europe
132. ERED DIT Wee pn Te haj q 97 binni j Ud eh Chai i Ott hj Fal ELL i Fei aile rei LACA Ha AER Eira P rd Sp iii mi Lan Emte j A In Mi wm Ellen JA TR Tis Soe TRUE CT T Den Pe ig r TI Site Eerad len ji A Uu Ere E A 11H 118 i ak 1 E F ni alter 5 Pasting can be executed on either Item List or screen Select Paste from the Edit menu or click the Paste icon The copy icon appears in the Part auxiliary tool box Deletion of icons from the tool box is also executable on the Item List window 2 31 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens e Arrow buttons in the Part auxiliary tool box When more than 16 icons are stored in a Part auxiliary tool box extra icons are hidden from view Bring up the hidden icons using the arrow buttons Tool Bar for Each Part The relay mode tool bar contains icons in addition to Detail Clicking an icon brings up the dialog for the relay mode part Click the Display Area icon for example When the part already selected is OK click the Place button When selecting a different part bring up the parts list using the Parts Select button and select the desired part Depiw Ges Ya It is recommended that M Save Setting be checked when selecting a part When a part x is selected with this box unchecked the relay mode settings revert to the default
133. Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Screen LIB This command is used when placing a screen registered in the screen library IT For more information on screen library see Chapter 4 Registration Items Clicking the Screen LIB icon brings up the dialog shown below Placing Screen Library Element 1 In the Screen Library List window click the desired screen Leen einer br To call the screen click the JUMP button 3 37 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net U Q O Z a SCH O o T Chapter 3 Drawing Tools 2 Click Place A dotted line box is displayed with the cursor 3 Click the mouse in the desired position The screen is placed with the SLIB mark at the clicked position Immediately after placement the LIB mark is attached to the cursor Clicking the mouse again places the same screen as long as the LIB mark is displayed To cancel screen placement click the Select icon The LIB mark disappears Io Y The reference position of placing a screen is the offset position on the screen AS library For more information on the offset see Chapter 4 Registration Items SLIB position on the screen OFF position in screen library 3 38 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation
134. I An d e Tt P Ki Checking O Same Screen shows Same Screen in the cell under Screen No 4 Perform the same procedure for block No 1 and after 4 70 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Screen Block Edit Window Setting Set each option in the window referring to the description below Screen No Specify the screen number to be used as a screen block Block Select the part type included in the screen that is specified for Screen No e Page Block Direct Block These blocks are available when the message mode is selected Select either one in accordance with the block used in the message mode on the specified screen Graphic LIB When the graphic mode is used on the specified screen choose this option Data Block When Block is chosen for Type in the Entry dialog for the entry mode or a data block area is set on the specified screen choose this option LI O a D 5 Y O O 2 No Designation When no part mode as the above is used on the specified screen choose this option Division No This option is necessary when something other than No Designation is selected for Block Specify the same division number as the one where the mode selected by Block is registered Block No Library No This option is necessary when something other than No Designati
135. Line 3 34 When this box is checked M long gradation marks are attached to the scale at the specified pitch When this box is not checked 11 long gradation marks are not attached Pitch 1 16 This option becomes active when M Long Line is checked Set the pitch for long gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button Separate settings for the X and Y axes are required __ Y axis vertical axis Pitch Line X axis horizontal L dati KT ong gradation mar Short gradation mark Drawing Method Select the desired style from the Shape icons Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Coor NETL TX Make the required setting on the dialog beforehand Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point in the same way as drawing a rectangle The trend graph scale is drawn Start point G End point Drag Drag End point Start point CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Multi text This command is used when placing multiple lines of text at one time Clicking the Multi Text icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below ise Be Gre rw Pom De ee eee Td uh ea Hu Tea nd LE Thin TZ w Q O Z a SCH O o T Text Field Text can be entered when the cursor is flashin
136. MATSUSHITA MEWNET Error Stop Information Comment Time Out 0 50 sec Size 5832704 Retry 3 2003 4 1 09 23 30 Connection 1 1 Baud Rate 19200 Signal Level RS232C Data Length 8 PLC Stat No 0 Stop Bit 1 Parity Odd Send Delay Omsec When screen data Is transferred the 12 point font data is always transferred to o the GV series first APP1 13 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts Data transfer order Transferred 12 point font data Ee Transferred Expansion font automatic manual font setting Transferred Notes on Font Data to be Transferred If changes are made to the Manual Font Setting tab window during online editing the correct font data according to the changes will not be transferred Stop online editing and perform data transfer Error for the GV series e Item No 22 Expansion font e Error No as per the following The font data specified by manual font setting in the screen data does not exist in the GV series Texts specified by automatic font setting are Transfer the screen displayed normally However in the case of font data again data that does not exist on the GV series texts are displayed in the 12 point size temporarily APP1 14 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation ne
137. P2 1 Tash function cid APP2 8 A a APP2 1 SA detainees APP2 15 Danis TIG ao APP2 15 setting procedure cocococcociconinnncncncannos APP2 18 A Add Video Menu aa 7 21 e EE 1 39 SS DEE 2 55 4 85 B background Re 2 7 Dar graph srren sts aciua eens ake aeareieetatis 2 48 NAKA star dd 2 63 DINA IME iii da 2 63 setting procedure E 2 63 C calendar part eding EE APP3 31 calendar display A eebe edd gea 2 52 capacity SE ME 2 6 CF card screen data transfer ccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 15 Champlered DOX EE 3 8 Change All Change All Division No cceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 33 Change All Process Cycle ee 1 33 Change Memory coccccnnnnconcnnnnnnnconcnnnonaconnnnnnnnnnrenennnnnns 7 7 closed area graph aiae 2 48 color setting 128 color type dadas 2 61 32 000 color type oooocccccconnoccnnccnoonononnnns 2 58 monochrome type E 2 62 YDE aia E a r Eear 2 57 A o 2 6 convert to rich text format eessen 7 19 Copy QIGDAL CODY EE 1 37 WITS atan 1 35 CLUSION eege 7 21 eet EE APP2 23 D data DIOCK ee ees 4 25 data block area eii ica 2 47 data e 2 40 A sentence ccracetonetae APP3 14 data sampling part GOING Ze haces APP3 29 dara Sheel raciales 4 75 Ml EEN 1 17 operating technique in dialogs 1 17 o A E ctacenaet 4 65 display area E A APP3 29 display environment ccccccocococononononononnnnonnnnnnnnnnno 2 10 el RE 2 10 a do EE EE 2 13 MOENUECISDIAY car ieee aes 2 12 ite E
138. Paint Dot Graphic Call OU LA O O O D o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O wa Moving and Transforming the Tool Bar The tool bar can be moved to a desired position or be altered to a different shape To move the tool bar click any position except icons on a bar and drag Release the mouse button in the desired position The tool bar is moved to the position nn oa DO Lo Can e 1 ES ia ag HAE E ia FRAGA HE Uu Bear is taiant athann Anafe DeLee Cot het sl ALEE To alter the shape move the tool bar out on the screen and drag the tool bar edge 1 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Hiding the Tool Bar Tool bars are shown as default To hide the tool bar uncheck the tool bar name in the Tool Bar sub menu of the Display menu To show again check the tool bar name Dr ier Im Es ps Apr Le T Dean MM k n Die Perro Tage E iper Porra Mr Status Bar The status bar contains the following information Mouse coordinates Zoom Editing layer Memory use per screen Hiding the Status Bar The status bar is shown as default To hide the status bar uncheck Status Bar in the Tool Bar sub menu of the Display menu To show again check the tool bar name Dee Die bt Fe mein rei ah b Amt be Po ic ES con jie Bes Lid 1 10 CTi Automation Phone
139. SE ey Ma E pen See FS e d Pl Gel IT For more information see the next section 7 17 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques 5 Click OK The cross cursor with the dot lined square is displayed Clicking any location on a screen shows the converted DXF file as the grouped drawings fe Le Dees be Fe re nee asp foot ieee EK TR H e Ff Dep a bi J e DRE uweco EE EE eo GT See 4 POOR Le ALE These figures are converted to the drawings in the GVWIN editor The drawings are grouped The displayed color depends on the original DXF file Detail Setting Options The following items are included Standard for Fitting Diagram into Screen Area of Diagram Only areas containing graphics are read during file import Size of Plan Drawing sizes are read during file import Area of Diagram making If the graphics could not be read in the above manner the GVWIN sets an area and the data within the area is read Display in making DXF file 8 color Display 16 color Display 256 or more color Display Choose the option specified for DXF file creation Way of Display O Not Convert Texts Choose whether or not text in DXF file is converted 1 character is converted into 16 x 16 dots O Ignore Dots Choose whether or not dots as graphics are ignored 7 18 CTi Automatio
140. Shape No 0 Pitch Short gradation mark e Long gradation mark rine Irun O Long Line ee A A O A E Drawing Method 1 Select the desired style from the Shape icons Line Dou Circle Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Gr 2 Make the required setting on the dialog beforehand 3 Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point The bar graph scale is drawn 3 30 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Pie Graph Scale Clicking the Pie Graph Scale icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Line Be oe Tee Bea Gap Zea Ee zb Soar EE i mee EES Cubo anos SER H Lal P A Be Lre Gr ko E F Logli Flick U Q O Z a SCH O o T Length 1 16 Set the length of short gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button O Complete Round Circle This option is not active as default This option becomes active once a pie graph scale has been drawn Double click the pie graph scale or click the pie graph scale and click the Prop Change icon When O Complete Round Circle becomes active check the box Ol Line When this box is checked M the scale is drawn with lines When this box is not checked LJ the scale is drawn without lines Split No 1 255 Set the number of divisions of the
141. Sheet Environment Setting Display Environment On data sheets graphics texts and data display parts can be placed based on the fixed grids Texts and data displays are placed along grid dots Lines and boxes are placed on spaces between grid dots A grid color and whether or not to show grids can be selected in the Display Environment dialog Tela Trrswroumsl Kl J Q O Grid Dep Check this option to display grids A Grid Color Select a color of the displayed grids Language Display This option is active only when the language selection function is in use DE For more information see Chapter 29 Language Selection in the Reference Manual Function Memory Display Use this command when checking the memory addresses allocated to the placed numerical data or character displays Select Memory Display from the Display menu The memory addresses are displayed Coplas Dra jen rier istry Jg Be R e Dee Ee Age EH e ien Hi Ste TH Soren et egent a 4 79 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Screen Library Parts of switches lamps entry mode etc that are used in common to multiple screens can be registered in screen libraries Once screen libraries have been registered screens will be created with ease just by placing the libraries Screen Library Structure A maximum o
142. Through this process speed down can be decreased Using these options specify the copy source and the copy target for each screen Superimpose Setting Tab Window For the GV42 52 62 only This tab window is provided for the use of the superimpose function on overlaps For more information see Chapter 2 Overlap in the Reference Manual Function Animation Tab Window For the GV42 52 62 only This tab window is provided for the use of the animation function For more information see Chapter 17 Animation in the Reference Manual Function 2 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Wallpaper Setting Tab Window For the GV42 52 62 only It is possible to use a bitmap file or a JPEG file as screen wallpaper 0O Use Wallpaper Check this option when setting wallpaper The following options become active File Type Select either Pattern or JPEG e When Pattern is selected Pattern No 0 1023 When using a bitmap file as wallpaper import a bitmap file as a pattern patterns This option is provided for specifying a pattern patterns By specifying the same number for both start and end numbers one pattern is used as wallpaper When importing a bitmap file that has been registered as multiple patterns two or more patterns can be specified e When JPEG is selected File name Select a JPEG
143. Ti Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts 2 Select the tab of a pattern for flashing The pattern is previewed Ex ON pattern selected for flashing display OO w U o e 00 00 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net APP2 9 Appendix2 3D Parts y A flashing time interval corresponds to the Blink Flash tab window settings in the Unit Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu Switch Lamp GV40 50 60 Compatible This section explains the procedure for setting GV40 50 60 compatible 3D switch parts Also follow the same procedure when placing lamps 1 Click the Switch icon 2 The Switch dialog is displayed Click the Parts Select button Hore masia bal baia Les EE DI i TA Pod e S e e APP2 10 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts 3 The Switch List window is displayed When the desired 3D parts file is already displayed go to step 5 Click the Parts File button OO U U a 4 The Select Parts File dialog is displayed Select a parts file 3Dfront G2p or 8Dside G2p r nata ida APP2 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiauto
144. Ti Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Print Table Print ent Ver Oo Bate 200417 time 10170 L Selerted MLO REATALEA TA MEAT File Simt File Manr Dia La EA frre ler L An ei i HINI L in System Setting CURA Werth DATE 0054 17 time 10 20 30 me Jerta PLC ATSUSHI MEMES Pile Cogeent File Aimee th dataying Pee prtann setting TTT Selected PLO MATEUGIHITA MENHOET Chile Mare 0 data eng oe File Comme U 5 e U O O D o Cc OD Comm Parareter Connection gt i l cur Ceror Handling Stop Lagal Hr g Baud Fata gt SRUORPS Data Length bit Parity Deh Tiap Hirt 1 l hit Signal Laval RAFA Aaad Ar DTM ario Aros l Toe i srl sch Ethernet Hot Use Peet Pr cess LS SeSE Code DEC Time Cut Time SOU meee Retria ls J Send He bas Time 0 Start Time LN Sec Type 04355 HOO ROD Lie celery Merry Estam isn Jan Back light 091477 Bergen Lazer Aranda rd Lesch San tch Dinak le Modo Seti Ech Disable Lry ee ise D ter elias Flash Zm Time deta lit Der 6 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Print Memory Use List CURA varz DATE 005417 Time 10 20 30 Selected PLC PRA TSUSHITA MERREI File Comment File mir D eat Eng 0E Pee Mero line TFF Era
145. U o ech Trend Graph Part Edit window 9 The former edit window is displayed The modified trend bar graph part appears in the window APP3 25 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Closed Area Graph Editing Procedure Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Closed Area Graph Part Edit window 1 The edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened New Part icon 2 Click the New Part icon A dotted box and a mover tool appear 3 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new graph part is placed 4 Double click the part The Closed Area Graph dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened o Get the dialog before opening or after closing the window Select the closed area graph part by clicking Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon APP3 26 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Modify Part window 5 The Modify Part window for the closed area graph part is displayed Edit the part or change its size e Editing Procedure 1 Draw aclosed area graphic using Line Box or Circle in the Draw menu The max size of a closed area graphi
146. When necessary a comment name can be attached by entering data for Comment Lei prati EE 4 O LI 7 25 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques e Click Display on the Tray Icon Display window The display format can be selected from four options Large Icon Large tray icons are displayed ES Potts um Piste Cem Small Icon Small tray icons are displayed E raplicown Papia l E il List All tray icons are listed Detail The number of registered parts and bytes and the top part of each tray are displayed a Pome tits Dd Function 13 Tag Table This option is valid only when Allen Bradley s Control Logix is selected for the PLC model 7 26 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Management This feature makes it possible to copy or delete any screen data file It is also possible to copy only a selected item included in a file such as a screen message or graphic It is also possible to copy parts between part files A screen data file can be partitioned for storage on floppy disks and can be recombined File Management Outline File Management Functions The following options are included in File Managing 1 Selected
147. a dot of the selected size in the selected color Clicking the mouse again draws the same dot on the screen To cancel dot drawing close the Screen Drawing dialog or click the Select icon Io Bar Graph Scale Clicking the Bar Graph Scale icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below as 1 ew me d A 1 pe Ba Giph Gre Feta ze Tel De ze Vu Tee E aalt coo T T NW ae E Zeien wa a E Lolina ich E Length 1 16 Set the length of short gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button 3 29 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools O Line When this box is checked M the scale is drawn with lines When this box is not checked LJ the scale is drawn without lines Split No 1 255 Set the number of divisions of the scale Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button O Long Line When this box is checked M long gradation marks are attached to the scale at the specified pitch When this box is not checked 11 long gradation marks are not attached Pitch 1 16 This option is active when M Long Line is checked Set the pitch for long gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button
148. a ee Fa regel regel 3 If transferring the screen data to the GV series is allowed click Yes Online editing is started after the data is transferred 4 After online editing is started the ON line RUN icon on the icon bar and On line Run in the File menu and the right click menu become active blo A Leg Dj Em a hana SW ke Le ta oa Des Ee be ig tah ep nr ina t y Sa NM a 5 When the current screen or window is switched to another during online editing the changed data is automatically transferred from the computer to the GV series 6 Aside from the automatic transfer mentioned above you can transfer changed data by clicking the ON line RUN icon or selecting On line Run from the File menu or the right click menu 5 24 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Escaping from Online Editing When escaping from online editing and going back to normal editing the procedure is the same as used for starting online editing Select On line Editing from the File menu or the right click menu The ON line RUN icon on the icon bar becomes inactive Screen Data Transfer via Modem With modems it is possible to transfer screen data to the GV series in a remote place Ine Preliminaries and Procedure Arrangements Receive side GV series e Modem Accessories RS 232C cable modular cable AC adapto
149. achine Error Machine Error gt syatem Error u Communication Error System Error Emergency Stop RUN Mode Stop Setting Value Over Emergency Stop Communication Error Manual Font Setting In the case of the HK fonts character codes used on screens will be recognized automatically or manually depending on the used functions part or mode see the table on the previous page Automatic Font Setting By means of automatic font setting character codes used on the screen are recognized and only partial sections of the font data including the codes are transferred to the GV series There is no special operation to be performed by the user Manual Font Setting When text data for instance to be displayed on a character display or message display will vary such text data is not determined on the software In sucha case select probable items of font data to be used and transfer them to the GV series This operation is a manual font setting It is necessary to check the number of points specified for the placed text as well as the function mode or part in which the text is placed Whether or not to make manual font settings is determined as a result See the table on page APP 1 10 in this chapter Since the 12 point size data is transferred to the GV series first manual font setting is not v aS necessary IT For more information on the 12 point size data see page APP 1 14 in this chapter APP1 11 CTi Automation Phone
150. adi Ted Be scde Midi Tes Leg ia n T pen E fe a a J Tur e rg Mid Pace tread CS lamar A KA Lage eer sl Mona Y E Told MT ais When either HK font is used specify a character size in points in the dialog Both X and Y sizes are enlarged reduced equally according to the specified number of points 1 4 and Italic options are inactive in the property setting po For each function part of mode the number of character points and whether automatic or manual font setting is to be made for placed texts differ as the table on the following page indicates Note For automatic font setting and manual font setting mentioned in the table refer to Manual Font Setting APP1 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts Automatic font setting Manual font setting No of points Switch lamp Texts on switch and lamp Numerical data Numerical data display Variable display Relay mode Message in display area Variable in display messages on switch and lamp area Limited to 12 points on switch and Relay sub Message in display area Message mode Message in display area Message in display area Variable in display messages on switch and lamp messages on switch and lamp area Limited to 12 Requirements Block is Requirements Block or points on switch and selec
151. ael BEET OWT IDE DS bi 3 Select a serial port at Serial Port 4 Select AT from the pull down menu and click the Send button INTE El eer ot Ge Pet lw sl T E 5 When OK is displayed the modem and the computer are connected normally 6 Send the commands below The setting items and the contents will vary with the model of the modem Check the settings for your modem 5 26 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer AT commands for the receive GV series side Result code presence absence QO presence Result code display format V1 word format Echo back 1 yes Communication standard selection BO ITU T standard ER signal control amp DO ER signal normally ON Flow control amp KO No flow control Number of calls until arrival SO 1 except for O Writing to non volatile memory amp WO The current operation status to be written to STORE PROFILE 0 1 Do not use the XON XOFF flow control 2 This command is required when you turn off the modem power after AT command setting AT commands for the send computer side a0 presence V1 ord ema ery ER signal control amp D2 Line to be disconnected at ER ON gt OFF o O pmj D D O UI e GN em UI L I gt D s Writing to non volatile memory amp WO The current operation status to be wr
152. aes di Te Gw P a e pen pn Qu Chia AN JI Lem Gan ES ei Po v Straight lines can be equipped with arrowheads Available arrow types are K shown below 7 lala No arrow Arrow at Arrow at Arrow at both ends start point end point 3 5 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools 2 Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point A line is drawn Drag Start point yg 4 End point L When you drag the mouse while holding down the SHIFT key it is possible to draw a horizontal or vertical line Continuous Line 1 Click the Continuous Line icon in the Screen Drawing dialog Select the desired options for Color and Line Style Petras Ted Bug Gro De Get Shae Op Te Pas Lan Ba 2 Click at the start point Then click at the first point The first line is drawn Click l l Start point q _5 First point 3 Inthe same manner move the mouse to the desired point and click Start point First point Click Second point KN To erase the line you have drawn click the right mouse button 3 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools 4 Atthe end point double click the mouse button The continuous line is terminated First point Third point Start
153. age le bb le Pr ipm Berg e re hae ope E Ff E Ne 2 ine ei A E m jj E ya HE E a aT Ae s 4 Perform the same procedure for the remaining tile numbers 4 74 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Sheet When data sheet screens have been registered data in the format of data sheet can be printed out from the GV by means of the data sheet function Data Sheet Structure A maximum of 1 024 data sheets can be registered Make settings for a data sheet including the size and orientation in the Data Sheet Page Setting dialog For information on the dialog see the next page Data sheet Line A setting Datat 1234 1234 1234 Data2 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 Ger 1234 Data 10 1234 1234 1234 Data 10_ 1234 1234 1284 k N N w amp A AR A maximum of 1 024 data sheets can be registered 4 75 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net O sab 0 gt D d Chapter 4 Registration Items Calling a Data Sheet Select Data Sheet from the Item menu The Data Sheet dialog is displayed Specify the data sheet number to be opened and click OK Data Sheet Editing lt is necessary to set the size of a data
154. age Exvamples nrn nerreeee 9 2 Radio Button Creation oooccccccnnnncccccnonononncncnnnnnncnnnnonanos 9 2 EMOS amas 9 6 Trend Graph EE 9 11 Deleting Placed Parts ccccccccsssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation i Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard Outline The wizard function is provided to aid you in setting for instance the entry mode or sampling mode which will be complicated in combination with other parts like switches or display areas Screens in these modes can be created with ease by following the instructions to be given Opening the Wizard Dialog Open the Wizard dialog when using the wizard function Select Wizard from the Part menu The Wizard dialog is displayed Gal fae Sien Got Metteg al ad Le me a Parts available with the wizard function Finished image pci Ge piri be paje r Cd erii yr Hero Sai ie Aare pia e gl zb badd Select the desired part from the list while referring to Image and Explanation in the dialog and click the OK button Follow the instructions to be given on the screen 9 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net O Z OD
155. ail info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Arc and Sector Click the Arc or Sector icon in the Screen Drawing dialog The following dialog is displayed Dn Gren Sid Petes Same Trend bupzrah A Teel Line Se True tem res po d sleisio TE jml reen ed RE RER Nr Select the draw type Drawing from the Center 1 Select the left icon for the draw type He Grech Siia PieGeaph Some Trend Giaaseae Heite Leg 1 Be B i Tom pes po 2 Select the desired options for Foreground and Line Type For sectors select the desired options for TT Paint O Frame Background Frame Color and Tile imal cama Pe Gran we La lada gielen ad Te Pas bo 3 Drag from the center to the desired radius LI Start point End point 4 When you stop dragging a line is displayed Click the mouse at the start point of the arc or sector 3 13 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net w Q O Z a SCH O o T Chapter 3 Drawing Tools 5 Move the cursor along the arc to the end point of the arc The section drawn counter clockwise remains as an arc Counter clockwise LI Start point End point 6 Clicking the mouse draws the arc or sector Drawing from the Line End Position 1 Select the right icon for the draw type De G i E cme Pe dior E cado Terci Ge
156. also choose the SIM file name It is possible to create a new SIM file even when an automatically created SIM file or an SIV based SIM file is already displayed on the personal computer 1 Go to the File menu and click on New Or click on the New Word icon on the tool bar 2 A sheet with the title Untitled x is displayed Add or insert the memory that you wish to test Saving a Newly Created SIM File The procedure for saving a newly created SIM file is described below 1 Click on the File menu There are two options Save and Save As 2 Choosing Save If this is the first time that you have saved the Save As dialog will be displayed Enter a file name and click on Save 3 Choosing Save As The Save As dialog will be displayed Enter a file name and click on Save 8 14 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Adding or Inserting Memory in the Sheet The procedure for adding memory that you wish to test to the end of the test sheet or for inserting this memory between lines is described below Memo It is only possible to add or insert into a newly created sheet white sheet 1 Adding Go to the Edit menu and click on Add Or click on the Add icon Inserting Click on the line where you wish to insert memory to highlight it Go to the Edit menu and cli
157. ame time read the manual for the counterpart unit and handle the error correctly Switch resolution of the GV series is determined by the analog type resistance film Do not press two or more positions on the screen at the same time If two or more positions are pressed at the same time the switch located between the pressed positions activates Please take note of this Pressing two positions at the same time activates the switch in the center Notes on Disposal e At the time of disposal GV must be treated as industrial waste CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Contents Chapter 1Basic Operation Staring and QUINA ME 1 1 o DEE 1 1 Opening a UE 1 2 QUIN saan reee ee nese ema nee erent eee 1 5 Basic Operation o the e te EE 1 6 Kuele ele a da nesta 1 6 MentiBatani dd ii aa 1 11 DIU ao 1 17 A een A RE 1 22 temr EE 1 27 Sci OOS FANON Si iio 1 30 Useful Editing Commands E 1 35 Screen Data File Property sirit ae erraia a E e e e 1 42 Chapter 2 Screens Screen COMPOSI od iio 2 1 A aoe acuenees ue haskcenseeone nice bil eseeencacy 2 1 SORCCM Beet te 2 5 Operation Environment Setting ooocccccccnnnccocconnnonnnennnnnnnnnnnnonnonnnnnnnnonnnnnonononos 2 7 Background Color Setting ccccccceccsssssseseecee
158. an Setra raphi L nsen bd tees Lag Esta Block 4 55 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Macro Block Editing Opening a macro block brings up the following window OV Wee Waker Keis ele 101825 SEPT LA Leketn Iece Pech E E ch p ue E i e Si aa gr pma e m i 7 d EI Pi wc Follow the procedure below 1 Click a white line in the window The Line No dialog is displayed 4 56 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items v Command Dialog AS Commands Classification on the left in the dialog lists the macro command groups and Command on the right lists the commands Clicking All under Commands Classification brings up all commands under Command Clicking a group name under Commands Classification brings up the associated commands under Command Lined MI Z D O a O Y O O 22 Command lists commande in alphabetical order IT For more information on the command groups and the commands see Chapter 13 Macro in the Reference Manual Function Ex Selecting the MOV command 1 Click Transfer under Commands Classification The associated commands are listed under Command Ln Aircel op abort Loe 0 pe n Fad heal Miao Scien FANH m
159. and black dots are regarded as areas in the background color White dots specified in tile editing are colored in the foreground color and black Foreground color dots are colored in the background color Background color Calling a Tile Select Tile from the Item menu The Tile Edit window is displayed Per 2 te L Lepe pe pede jei yia Dalin Don ona gt vo ig E AA W 3 e E e lee E Ai A RE Zeg Pe zb ia Hao Block A AN ch n EEEO Drazi Dech mo WP cren Bleck H VW e A Ea hw l La A ig i d En Che E Cita hee Drr gelL san Org e 4 72 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Tile Editing Follow the procedure below Select a tile number to be registered by clicking 1 fe L Leg Fee eee oe Danone Ea ira A BS ER i z ep wi E ss a ke i a F A a i m EEE Vu ji W ss OD 2 Create a tile in the tile editing area Draw white dots by clicking or dragging Draw black dots by right clicking or right dragging uN one A DCS E a i la 7 a si E ai Sr Be si a 4 73 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 3 When the tile is complete click the next tile number The previous tile number shows the registered im
160. and background colors can be set For the color setting procedure see Chapter 2 Screens Text Properties Enlarge X Enlarge Y This option is valid when the screen data contains fonts except the Gothic English Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times font data The setting range for Enlarge is 1 to 8 The character size at each value for Enlarge is shown below Value for pos 6 fo 7 J 8 We Ee 16x32 24x48 32x64 40x80 48x96 56x112 64x128 U Q 3 O lt D tr 3 O o mn 16 x 16 32 x 32 48 x 48 64 x 64 80 x 80 96 x 96 112 x 112 128 x 128 IT For the Gothic English Western Europe HK Gothic and English Western Europe HK Times font types this option changes to Point For more information see Appendix 1 Fonts Rotate Depending on the selected option the text can be rotated as shown below Rotate Normal ABCD mo amos Direction Depending on the selected option the text can be directed as shown below o o 3 19 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools O Transparent Depending on whether O Transparent or M Transparent is selected the foreground and background colors are displayed differently LU Transparent M Transparent Foreground color Foreground color only ABCD ABCD Background color Oltalic
161. and closes the part edit window Quit Application Choosing this command quits the editor Edit Menu The Edit menu commands are almost the same as those for screen data files except for the Place New Part command e Place New Part A new part is placed in the opened part edit window The New Part icon functions in the same manner b E SS Lehr vi ca 8 APP3 38 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Display Menu The Display menu commands are the same as those for screen data files except for the Display Environment command e Display Environment Open the Menu Dsp tab window in the Display Environment dialog The Background option can be used to change the base color of a part edit window Displap T ovnpeeeppnt Data Mei Da e met S Fe Direi Mak Gei m o E HLIE Mat Li 5 O OD m E Hirte Coke 5 CR We Bac poc Edit Part Menu e Overlap Choosing this command allows you to edit overlap parts e Switch Choosing this command allows you to edit switch parts e Lamp Choosing this command allows you to edit lamp parts e Num Display Choosing this command allows you to edit numerical data display parts e Char Display Choosing this command allows you to edit character display parts e Message Disp Choosing this command allows you to ed
162. ange and then is returned to SRAM For more information on SRAM see Chapter 24 SRAM in the Reference Manual Function Station No Table This option is valid when a temperature controller model F MPC04P FUJI is used on the temperature control network and also the station table is used For more information see the Temperature Control Network Manual Ladder Comm Prg It is possible to write ladder sequence for PLC Mitsubishi Q02 Q02H QO06H via a GV series unit Select this option for the purpose For more information see the GV42 52 62 Hardware Manual Modbus Comm Prg This option is valid when Modbus slave communication is in use Select the option when updating the Modbus slave program file L Use Simulator Check this option when performing debugging using the GVWIN simulator The I F driver file UNIPLC20 tpb for simulator is transferred accordingly L Read Comments in Data Transfer This option is provided for screen data transfer from a GV series unit to a computer after the data is transferred from the computer to the GV series without the included comments When the previous screen data with comments stored in the computer is overwritten by the data from the GV series while the option is checked the comments are not deleted If the option is not checked the comments are deleted from the previous data To transfer screen data with comments open the Environment Setting tab window in the Unit Se
163. are Animation and Frame sections in the animation function Graphics are registered in Frame sections and graphics to be used are selected in Animation sections dE geg 0 1 023 Frame No 0 Frame No 1 Frame No 2 Frame No 3 Frame 0 1 022 A maximum of 1 024 animation settings from No 0 to No 1 023 can be registered A maximum of 1 023 frames from No 0 to No 1022 which are defined in Animation can be registered Calling the Animation Function Select Animation from the Item menu The Animation window is displayed By making necessary settings in the window Animation folders and their respective Frame folders are displayed gt Di O 5 T O om tr est OD Q lt dl N O N D lt O D O F j O Q lt N N te ben Fee Setting Graphit Lage Hiuk asl Gta Dirt el E Pater Haro Block Pop Block Direct kzt Deen Bl lock Tie DTH ot O Weta 20 A Dee De ee at Satchel Iie E Dee lien Seier Seprg fool a Den Re gt DESS 7 Cigta heat A Screen Libre a nog Jae KIK i E E Ex 7 Aranin gt EN 3 x i Nal E 4 85 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Animation Editing In the Animation dialog the number of frames and an animation speed are set and the actual animated image can be checked Follow the procedure b
164. ation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Divisions will contain parts page 2 17 for details These parts are given numbers identical to their respective division numbers Graphics will be directly placed on the base and overlaps These graphics are not given division numbers Base Temperature Trend Graph No 0 123 C No 1 123 C No 2 123 C Directly placed on the base Temperature 423 Trend Graph 1 No 0 o 123 No 1 o 123 No 2 C as IS i ee SE e SN a i a cee RS i a e i eee mmm ae e RN A RS a NR A NR NN SAS NS e NS S e LS e a Switches numerical data displays display areas etc Graphics texts boxes scales etc What Is a Division e A division is an invisible area It is assigned to every part that functions on the screen Whether one division can contain multiple parts or only one part depends on the types of parts For more information on the limit on the number of parts see page 2 18 e When placing parts on a division the division number is shown on the icon bar O MA IS B me w 2 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens e The GVWIN automatically performs division number allocation while judging the maximum permissible number of parts per division for each part to be placed You
165. ation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Deleting Messages Specify messages to be deleted by dragging the mouse The messages are highlighted Te L Dain ben ei Je Weg Gen CH Bee pal a a la THOM E te t ege KEE Jeet AL EE aga 0 Exit 1 lt OD n ge a O D 2 Select Delete from the Edit menu or the right click menu The specified messages are deleted Er Io AE dia Let ira AI A O jme AS A CH fy e TEE ZE rd y When deleting all messages from the group select Delete All from the Edit h menu The confirmation message as shown on the right appears To delete all messages click Yes 4 33 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Message Search and Replacement Searching for or replacing messages is possible Search 1 Inthe Message Edit window check the position of the mouse cursor 2 Select Find from the Edit menu The Find dialog is displayed 3 Enter the string to be searched for into the Find what field 4 Select an option from Direction Select Up when searching the window upward from the cursor position Select Down when searching the window downward from the cursor position 5 Check O Match case to make a distinction between
166. ation on overlaps see Chapter 2 Overlap in the Reference Manual Function Detail By checking the desired option its detailed information is displayed DIV No Displays the division numbers of parts Memory Displays the memory addresses assigned to parts Area Displays the area of each part by dotted lines DIV No Memory l M Paint Dsp When there is a graphic drawn with the Paint icon on the draw tool bar it is displayed as painted When this option is unchecked only x appears to indicate the paint start point For more information on paint see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools O Graphic Relay Dsp This option is active only when the graphic relay mode is set The ON OFF status in the graphic relay mode can be checked For more information on the graphic relay mode see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the Reference Manual Function 0 Message Dsp This option is active when the relay mode or message mode is set Messages specified in these modes can be displayed in the display area or on switches lamps on the screen For more information on the relay and message modes see Chapter 6 Message Display in the Reference Manual Function O Graphic Library This option is active when the entry mode or graphic mode is set For the entry mode graphics registered in graphic library can be displayed on the character entry keys provided that Use Graphic is checked For the graphic
167. automation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Outline All items making up screens such as switches lamps numerical data and overlaps are called parts and are saved in part files The part file is an independent file and is separate from screen data files Any part can be copied from part files to screen data files at any time The same part can be placed in different screen data files Part file AAA Screen data File containing parts only files 0 O Z 5 OD mn part can be called up form part files Screen data files 1 Any part can be called up form part files Users can create and save their own parts together with the standard parts Originally saved in part files With this feature the user can easily create a screen by using parts of their own design such as switches and graphs Part file AAA Users can save their own unique parts APP3 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Components of Parts Parts saved in a part file may be different in shape but have common components A part is basically composed of three different elements a basic part area part area and graphic data The basic part area is the area which possesses the part s function The part area is the area covering the whole part which is equivalent
168. ay be improved Page Setting Set the margins and header and footer lines Printer Setting Set the printer mode paper size and portrait or landscape mode After setting click OK APP3 34 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Printing 1 After specifying the above settings execute printing Select Print from the File menu Ep E pe Fra NM 2 The Part Print dialog is displayed Check the necessary options for printing Specify the starting part number and ending part number for Start and End respectively 3 Click Print at the bottom left of the dialog Printing starts APP3 35 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net y 5 O e gt D y o ba 5 y T 2 Appendix 3 Part Editing Part File Management Parts from different part files can be copied into other files Close the current file Copying is performed by bringing up the copy source file and copy target file windows Part File Managing Procedure L Clicking File Managing brings up the menu The File Copy File Delete File Divide x and File Combine commands are not active for part file management 1 Select File Managing from the File menu and click Parts File Pa Em Dobla RPM fin Toi Ardo Hie er a L d
169. b www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net relies Print A nn eeernnnnrnenennnnnnenn nenne 6 1 Available le 6 1 Preliminar ET 6 1 Option Setting Dialog 6 2 ai APM otescuuigadatanentacelied 6 4 Print Setting Dialog 6 4 Printing the Currently Opened Window ee 6 7 Glen 6 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation i Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Print Preliminaries This chapter explains the procedure for printing the GV series screen data file from the computer IT The procedures of connecting a printer to the GV series and printing the screen data file from the GV series are not explained here For more information on printing from the GV series see Chapter 15 Print in the Reference Manual Function Available Printers Any printer that is available in the Windows environment can print from the GVWIN editor These printers available in the Windows environment may not be used for printing from the GV series Please take note of this LOe Preliminary Steps Follow the steps shown below L Refer to the Prepare the printer above Connect a printer to the computer Page 6 2 Environment setting Select Printer Setting from the File menu The Option Setting dialog is displayed Set printing environm
170. bility that the item listed with CAUTION may have serious ramifications Never use the input function of GV for operations that may threaten human life or to damage the system such as switches to be used in case of emergency Please design the system so that it can cope with malfunction of a touch switch Turn off the power supply when you set up the unit connect cables or perform maintenance and inspection Failure to do so could cause an electric shock or damage to the unit Never touch any terminals while the power is on An electric shock may occur You must put a cover on the terminals on the unit when you turn the power on and operate the unit Without the terminal cover in place an electric shock may occur The liquid crystal in the LCD panel is a hazardous substance If the LCD panel is damaged never swallow the leaked liquid crystal If the liquid crystal spills on your skin or clothing use soap and wash off thoroughly CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Notes on System Design e Never bundle control cables and input output cables with high voltage and large current carrying cables such as power supply cables Keep these cables at least 200 mm away from the power supply or high voltage cables Otherwise malfunction may occur due to noise e For use in a nuclear energy facility or other facility of such official importance please consult
171. board clipboard Paste Bitmap Bitmap files are imported into screen data files as Page 7 14 patterns DXF File Convert DXF files are imported into screens Page 7 17 Convert to Rich Text The printing image of a screen data is saved asa Page 7 19 Format Rich Text file format Add Video Menu The GV42 52 62 video display function can be Page 7 21 Video created and placed with ease Custom Part Custom parts are registered Page 7 21 Parts or items to be used often are stored in trays Page 7 23 Tag Table Set the tag table when using Allen Bradley s Page 7 26 Control Logix O 24 LI 7 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 1 Error Check The files can be checked for errors If any error is found its cause and remedies are displayed Operation Procedure 1 Select Error Check from the Tool menu 2 The check result is indicated in the Error Check window Es Iw pe Seay Je See 0 FE P De D est Ff Ki When no error is found No Error is displayed 3 To close this window click the x Close button at the upper right or the click the upper left icon and select Close Reading the Error Check List When an error occurs the following Error Check window is displayed Each line is composed of the following information E error W warning Layer Functio
172. c is W x H 65 536 bytes Y Useful tools h Point Search Enlarge items including circles in the opposite angle Item List 2 Set the graph area basic part area with a dotted box The graph area is recognized as a graph Move the graph area dotted box to the closed area graphic Adjust to the desired size by dragging a handle If you want to use the graphic as a graph area right click the mouse and choose Fit Area with Graphic from the pop up menu m Q J O O O D o pmj D O m D O 5 U o ech Graph area basic part area y Fit Area with Graphic The graph area snaps into the drawn graphic Graph area 3 Right click the mouse and select Paint Position Setting APP3 27 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing y Paint Position Setting Determine the start position for painting a closed area graph Graph upper limit Direction Graph area Graph lower limit Point start position Select Paint Position Setting from the right clicking menu Move the cursor to the graph area and click it Drag the cursor and release the mouse in the target position The paint start position x is moved along the horizontal line 1 dot above the graph lower limit If painting is not performed correctly after the paint start position has been determined raise the lower
173. cessary For more information on transparent color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the Reference Manual Function 4 42 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Circle Command Usage 1 Select a foreground color background color and check or uncheck O Paint and O Frame 2 In the Pattern Edit window drag the mouse A circle is drawn with respect to the drag start point as the center Text Icon A font available for use under Windows can be imported as a bitmap Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Foreground Select a character color Background Select a character background color Font Clicking this brings up the Font dialog Select the desired options for Font Font Style and Size To go back to the previous dialog click OK 4 43 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net U D 5 Chapter 4 Registration Items Text Command Usage 1 Select a foreground color and a background color and make Font settings 2 Inthe Pattern Drawing window click the text field Check that the cursor is blinking inside 3 Key in a text as desired 4 Inthe Pattern Edit window drag the mouse A box as large as the text is displayed Release the mouse be
174. ck on Add Or click on the Insert icon In either case the Add or Insert dialog shown to the right will be displayed 1024 pieces of memory can be registered on 1 sheet G TT A rid Hi 3 Q T Biema ten TE FF lade fittest Mee DE Dese lz a Dedo Lempira wien Zem Des e Bol paradas T iaj t F Depi P Wa gie SC ER 8 15 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN 2 Check the O Bit Device box only when adding memory in bit units When a bit device is specified as Top Memory described later a hyphen and bit number are displayed at the end of the memory and a test can be performed in bit units Note that if this box is not checked and a bit device is specified as Top Memory described later bits are treated as word units and memory will be added in 16 bit increments joa 3 Specify the top address for the memory that will be added to Top Memory 4 If you click on the 11 Block box it is possible to continuously add multiple pieces of memory Enter the amount of memory that you wish to add in Number of Memories The maximum setting is 1024 5 When adding word device make settings for display format data length with without sign and ASCII code display non display For the display contents see page 8 12 6 Click OK For adding memory will be adde
175. con 2 41 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Property Change for One Data Cell 1 Click the table data display part Handles are shown all around 2 Right click the mouse on a cell for property change The cell is highlighted and the right click menu is displayed at the same time Copy WP Detad Setting 3 Click Detail Setting The Table Data Display Num Display dialog is displayed laa a raras E al Tei ee ra be Les emg ie anne ac o Vasen Da Er Kal K bilane erte zl 3 de bid pee i m RER PO D iiam CH FM rei IT Hii PO Lem l hika precio Pa F Mr EB emm Rm 4 Set the options in the dialog Select a necessary data display type from numerical display character display message display or text in drawing 2 42 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Property Change for Multiple Data Cells 1 Click the table data display part Handles are shown all around Memo It is also possible to bring up the Table Data Display xxxx dialog by double clicking while the specified cells are highlighted 2 Select two or more desired cells by right dragging The cells are highlighted The right click menu is displayed at the same time 12345
176. con brings up the Macro dialog Clicking the Interval Timer icon brings up the Interval Timer dialog E en E Er Disca jia H irma Ai a B d vn a P E Ces TM r H 1 ier Man JI IT geg i ei Ex Fa Ts al Ke Vo ven eu AER E A en wee HI 3 bill cli We Goen Lap JE Leen Si Ee MS MA For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 13 Macro in the Reference Manual Function When the dialog setting is concluded the dialog icon is shown in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen To bring up the dialog again click the icon 2 54 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Memory Card Clicking the Memory Card Mode icon brings up the following tool bar Quit cacao aaa g Delete Detail Memory card record name Memory card record number Memory card switch Display area Memory card number Memory card name Format switch Memory card file number Memory card file name e o a H D O D 3 D D o LU r Gi lig For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode in the Reference Manual Function Animation Clicking the Animation icon brings up the Animation dialog H
177. cribed in this chapter A ll j a ai PSD An Le si After the part has been modified close the Modify Part window The former screen edit window is displayed The modified part is shown on the screen e Copy the desired part e Open a part file and bring up the edit window of the copied part e Paste the copied part to the target window for registration e Click Save or Save As to save the part Registration has been completed Ki How to save a part in a part file after modifying it in screen editing APP3 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Creation and Storage of Part Files Creating Part Files Creating a New File Opening an Existing File 1 Select Parts Edit from the File menu and 1 Select Parts Edit from the File menu and click New click Open 2 The Edit Model dialog is displayed Choose 2 The Select parts file dialog is displayed the correct model and click OK Unos diri Get CP LACH RE Ern cia fhe Pee T7 Tl arisi CATE ERTGARIE tebe Ge AP dd rege ret marar el er de Full BPE Ge PCIA 3 The Select PLC Type dialog is displayed When opening a GV42 52 62 part file Choose the PLC model to be used for the specify G2P for Files of type when screen data file for the part file you are going opening a GV40 50 60 part file spec
178. cted line type selection is not possible All the lines are drawn in solid lines When Chamfering is selected O Frame becomes active However when Round Chamfering is selected it is automatically framed and the frame setting is not possible Io When M Paint is checked for a round chamfered box XOR cannot be used For example if a round chamfered box with M Paint is brought up in graphic relay mode the paint is not displayed on the screen For more information on XOR effects see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the Reference Manual Function oa 3 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Parallelogram 1 Click the Parallelogram icon in the Screen Drawing dialog Select the desired options for ICT Paint Foreground Background Tile and Line Type Leg Ba Te pes 1 pm w a Q O Z a SCH O o T L When M Paint is checked O Frame becomes active It is possible to select h whether or not to draw the frame of the painted box When this option is checked Frame Color can be selected DP aint M Paint M Paint O Frame M Frame L a i 2 Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point of the upper side Drag Start point End point 3 Drag from the end point of the upper side to the corresponding point of the lower s
179. cted on the other end Command error A command that is not applicable to the target modem is transferred The target line is busy The target line is busy The telephone number is not specified Set the telephone number Cannot detect dial tone The response is NO DIALTONE LU CH D OD D gt OU Di Di Di 02 gt D 5 33 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer After Screen Data Transfer When screen data transfer has been completed allow the GV series to communicate with the PLC and check whether the data has been received Connection The D sub 25 pin connector is required for connection with the PLC NA For the cable to connect the PLC and the GV series see the Hardware Manual Ly For using the universal serial communication Ethernet communication or other optional communication interface units refer to their respective manuals Screen Check When the GV series is in communication RUN mode with the PLC the GV series brings up the created screen data When the Main Menu Local Main Screen is Displayed The GV series stops communication with the PLC in the STOP mode and is not in the RUN mode Press the SYSTEM key on the right or at the bottom of the GV series Menu options are displayed in a line vertically or horizontally Press the F1 MODE key next The statu
180. ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Bitmap Import and Storage It is possible to import a bitmap file into pattern editing and to store a pattern as a bitmap file Importing a Bitmap File 1 Select Read from Bitmap File from the Tool menu The Open a Bitmap File dialog is displayed Tool lindos Leo Chach RU DIER Ir Hero lee Neresg Ae Lag Changs Heros i Gorea bo Pichi Tea Fong 0 Q dele yrim OH d 5 ap eee 1 a o li 2 Select the desired file and click Open The following dialog is displayed Dr free OL T Click OK 4 49 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 3 The following confirmation message is displayed Clicking Yes imports the bitmap file 7 dl gue e H 1 CS Mo Treil 4 Clicking No brings up the Specify Bitmap Read No dialog Enter the top pattern number to be imported and click OK The bitmap data is imported Apreode imap Ha Dialog for Bitmap Import O Dither When this option is checked dithering can be performed to make the colors of the bitmap closer to the original The option is invalid when 32K is selected for Color Type for Convert Dee OTI Ss wl mir Eb u E Calor Ce to Cerami RE r ik RS fa RH 0 Pseudo Gradation Depiction in ps
181. ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net EE E E E A EE 3 1 Basic ODrations cccccccsssscsssscesscsescsssseessseseseeeees 3 2 Screen Drawing Dialog 3 2 Selecting EIERE dias 3 3 DEIOCUNG UE 3 3 Selecting Line Styles AA 3 4 Drawing MethodS ccocoooooooncccccnonnncnnncnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 3 5 A E E E 3 5 A A 3 7 e PP oe asa teen enn E eceaten 3 12 KC EE 3 18 A e e E 3 23 PP 3 26 Graphic Gallina 3 27 A A 3 29 Bar Graph Scale nicotina 3 29 Pie Graph SCAG asma 3 31 Trend Graph Scale EEN 3 33 le Gr Ao PP E E E 3 35 Screen E AENEIS 3 37 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation i Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Tools The tools with the following functions are provided JOO Oe TAL BS DEER ae ees Tei Si e e Be me e e Wa ee e Screen LIB Places a screen LIB mark Page 3 37 4 O o LI 3 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Basic Operations Clicking an drawing tool icon brings up the dialog for drawing In this section basic operations on the Screen Drawing dialog are explained Screen Drawing Dialog For example when you click the Line icon the following Scr
182. ction field This field becomes active when PLC Memory Internal Mem I O Memory Temp Mem PLC2 Memory or Common Memory Clicking this box brings up the drop down list Select the desired device by clicking B Entry field Specify a memory address Use the keypad in the dialog or the keyboard of the computer C Keypad The keypad allows direct entry to the above field in the allowable range for each memory type 1 18 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Station No This option becomes active when 1 n is chosen for Connection in the Detail tab window of the Comm Parameter dialog For Ethernet communications set the network table number here eil SE a E E deleri al 2131045 RK E El Uatdelr EA i i ole OU LA O O O D o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O wa CPU No This field becomes active when YOKOGAWA FA M3 etc is selected d dell i Ale ul 1 19 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation 2 When Internal Mem is selected Select this option when using the internal memory of GV For more information see Appendix 1 Internal Memory in the Reference Manual Function Serres iere epee Fiore O Indirect Th
183. d This manual should be used together with Reference Manual Function Be sure to save these manuals in the same place CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net About this Manual This manual consists of the following chapters for your thorough understanding of the GVWIN editor Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Basic Operation Screen Composition Drawing Tools Registration Item Transfer Print Useful Techniques Applications for GVWIN Editor Wizard Fonts 3D Parts Part Editing This chapter explains the basic operation procedure structure and menu items of the editor This chapter explains the structure of screen its holding capacity limitations and methods of placing parts on the screen This chapter explains the drawing commands and how to use these commands This chapter explains the editing procedure of registration items This chapter explains the data transfer procedure from the editor This chapter explains the printing procedure from the editor This chapter explains useful techniques in editor operation such as Tool menu or file management function
184. d from the System Setting menu in the screen data file data transfer between the computer and the GV series is executable while the PLC and the GV series are in either RUN or STOP mode When any setting other than Modular Jack 1 Editor Port is made press the SYSTEM key and then the F1 key on the GV series to bring it to the STOP mode Main Menu local main screen and start data transfer Screen Data Transfer to GV Series 1 Click the Transfer icon or select Sep Emm Transfer from the File menu i mr li E re M Mamm Tic lid 2 The Transfer dialog is displayed J T fof fen Select Display for Transfer F ila atc a Device and Screen Data for d SN E ra Transfer Data AEPD d mad 3 Click the Detail Setting button Brita The Communication Detail dialog o is displayed C ups Select a computer serial port to be used and a baud rate between the EJ T ma computer and the GV series Click p OK 4 Click the PC gt button Screen data transfer starts Screen Data Transfer from GV Series 1 Click the Transfer icon or select pan Transfer from the File menu mg ene Tarp Tas z ida M iima Ts lid 2 The Transfer dialog is displayed ff le Select Display for Transfer F ihar kegez ee Device and Screen Data for Oe PEA ee Transfer Data d eege e 3 Click the Detail Setting button Eee Select a computer serial port to be WE used and a baud rate betwe
185. d to the end of the sheet For inserting memory will be inserted immediately above the line that was selected Testing Testing will be explained using the screen shown below as an example O M101 M102 M103 M104 EH EA KEN EE e a e 8 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Testing Bit Memory e From the GV series to the Simulator Use the Simulator to check the output signal As an example R101 is set as output memory on the Auto switch on the far left side 1 Press the Auto switch on the far left side of the GV series 2 RO101 will turn on at the Simulator The left icon will change from OFF to ON corte PTODIDO OT DAD 67100101 MOOO i ATOMIA t Frogs DOE SCHO aTom boot Drnp1ne t bro 106 gt DT 00106 0700107 oro O10 pTogi1o4 ITO00108 k pTou109 OTOD1Ow I 2THDIOk SUE AMG ant ADOOS 200101 00101 200102 e From the Simulator to the GV series Use the Simulator to turn the lamp on As an example R104 is set for lamp 4 on the far right side 1 On the Simulator click the OFF icon for R104 lamp memory 2 The icon will change from OFF to ON Lamp 4 will light up on the GV series L When pressing the space key with the memory selected by cursor the bit device can be x reversed Regarding the
186. dialog the screen list windows are displayed and then the No Designation dialog is displayed on them Message Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Screen Block System setting options e Specify the desired numbers for Copy Source No and Copy Target No and click OK Copying is executed i Dra Rss teta Change to a Different Item 1 Select Copy by Specifying No from the Edit menu 2 The File Managing dialog is displayed Click the desired option and then 7 OK 2 D a L A lt Pepa ho DI gea s 5 H A Y Mar lb OH eg kt 3 OH F Ek 3 The No Designation dialog for the option is displayed Hd Tetum Hait Meal a ne pO Y Other Setting Items The following items can be copied to the clipboard when they are selected Animation Table System Setting Color Pallet 7 33 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Menu for File Management Before closing the copy target file window choose whether or not to save the copied data 0 D Clicking File brings up the following menu items Ele Ed ipa ee Copy Taga Rea Cora age Dean Copy Tagai E eva Cope ag 5 it Ei Copy Touca Open halt File Missgira Lg Seeche e Copy Target New Creates a new copy target file e Copy Target Open Opens a copy target file e Copy Targe
187. do not need to worry about allocation of division numbers generally A part that executes its function singly such as a switch lamp numerical data display or bar graph has no limit on the number of parts per division page 2 18 It is not necessary to worry about division numbers for placing these types of parts LU O a D D 5 O O 3 O O o y O Multiple switch parts can be placed on one division Only one piece can be placed on one division depending on the type of part as described below Combination of Parts Different parts may be combined to execute one function Such parts must share the same division number e Error message display relay mode e Numerical data input on the GV entry mode If the parts are given different division numbers they may not work correctly Correct their division numbers Allocate the same division number to the display area and the scroll switches Temperature Trend Graph 1 No 0 123 BC No 1 123 BC No 2 123 BC Ea E D Leg Same division number 2 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens When Using Screen Library With the use of an editing area called screen library the same part can be placed repeatedly on multiple screens Before using the function check that the division number registered in a screen library is different from the division
188. e By creating simulation data with a CSV file and then reading that data with the Simulator it is possible to display a sampling screen on the GV series that is very close to the actual image Conditions for a Test The following conditions must occur if you wish to perform a test on a GV series screen data file by using a CSV file e In the Buffering Area Setting dialog the O Memory Designation box should be checked e Sampling Method should be Constant Sample or Bit Synchronize ugi ken Aira Eb E Los Cards Mora ine I lin vr imya no RE TS dl a gegen 2 T Gegen r Ep tiie Diario M iieii bel Notes on Creating a CSV File e Each sampling data should be entered on one line e Memory set for Sampling Buffer Word No in each sampling mode should be entered beginning with the most recent from the left of each line e Only create necessary data on the display If a title line or row exists it will not be displayed correctly e Do not leave lines or rows blank Data in blank lines or rows will be displayed as 0 8 24 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN CSV File Setting Example The following example shows settings for a CSV file created with Microsoft EXCEL Using buffering area No 0 Memory Designation DT200 Sampling Method Constant sample No of Words 4 No of
189. e Parts File Matsushita Electric Works provides two 3D parts files for the GV42C During installation of the GVWIN software the files are stored in the Parts folder included in the GVw folder e 3Dfront_128 G2p Switches lamps e 3Dside_128 G2p Switches lamps Do not move the Parts folder and bitmap files in the folder to different storage places Do not change their names Joa APP2 15 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts Memory Capacity 3D parts need more memory than memory for ordinary parts Check the current status of memory use by selecting Memory Use from the Tool menu If a message The size is too large to communicate is given during data transfer memory expansion by installing an optional memory cassette AIGV824 is recommended Ioc Color Pallet Use the color pallet for 3D parts instead of the ordinary color pallet when setting the colors of 3D parts Open the Environment Setting tab window in the Unit Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu Check Use 3D Parts The message below appears A nac bow paa a 7 pm Ire cee ba ee eg tren Loba ee eee Ui Click Yes to start reading of the 3D parts pallet file Then the colors used in the already created screen data are changed to 3D parts colors while the basic 15 colors remain the same Both ordinary color pall
190. e ss T Sie Hamm Pa E lt Pta e LAMA IR For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 17 Animation in the Reference Manual Function When the dialog setting is concluded the dialog icon is shown in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen To bring up the dialog again click the icon 2 55 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Video Clicking the Video icon brings up the following tool bar IT For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 18 Video Display in the Reference Manual Function JPEG Display Clicking the JPEG Display icon brings up the following tool bar A For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 19 JPEG Display in the Reference Manual Function Sound Clicking the Sound icon brings up the Sound dialog kee pas Saqueo Dag Praia lja fF ie pin G Pg Fija eta gti bede Prip Ly For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 20 Sound Replay in the Reference Manual Function When the dialog setting is concluded the dialog icon is shown in
191. e Chengdu Matsushita Electric Works China Co Ltd Chengdu Branch Office E Hong Kong Matsushita Electric Works Hong Kong Ltd Rm1601 16 F Tower 2 The Gateway 25 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2529 3956 E Japan Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Automation Controls Company 1048 Kadoma Kadoma shi Osaka 571 8686 Japan Tel 81 06 6908 1050 Please contact Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Automation Controls Company E Head Office 1048 Kadoma Kadoma shi Osaka 571 8686 Japan E Telephone Japan 81 Osaka 06 6908 1050 E Facsimile Japan 81 Osaka 06 6908 5781 http Awww nais e com COPYRIGHT 2003 All Rights Reserved CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
192. e Copy Source Open Opens a copy source file e Quit File Managing Quits File Managing e Quit Application Quits the GVWIN editor 7 38 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Management File Copy 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select File Copy 3 The File Copy dialog is displayed Specify the desired files for Copy Source and Copy Target 4 When MCopy the Environment File is checked the environment file for the copy source file with extensions ENV is also copied The environment file is not copied when unchecked 7 5 Click OK Copying is executed uowapeuen l 7 39 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Management File Deletion 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select File Delete 3 The File to Delete dialog is displayed Specify the file to be deleted Fike lo delete lx 4 Click Delete The confirmation message is displayed Au emma D Va LTA o TA AA E Se S 5 Click Yes The file and its environment file of the same name are deleted 7 40 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful
193. e closed area graph part For more information see page APP3 28 APP3 42 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Display Menu The Display menu commands are the same as those for part edit windows e Item List When modifying a part including complicated graphics the contents of the part are known from the Item List window The part and graphic data are indicated separately in the list This list is useful for changing only graphic properties etc Cosplay L Pei fen Ir TodBa b y y T 2 GC Z D 3 Open the Item List window to edit this switch parts Click the item whose property is to be changed and click the Detail Prop Change icon The property can be changed with ease Draw Menu The Draw menu commands are the same as those for screen data files Window Menu The Window menu commands are the same as those for screen data files APP3 43 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing M EMO Please use this page freely APP3 44 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net INDEX INDEX Numerics SDD AUS sats O ees APP2 1 Ee EE APP2 23 CUADO EE APP2 21 parte oros APP2 22 E A sbeccbiomnseaiel AP
194. e consistent Data corresponds is displayed mmm Syf iin a E AAA Lien Siberg ee iea o dba sar LA Sera e eer I chp Levee e een Zem Coden Zenit rees PPL ge irg a Stress Ermua keet Nier Tee opis Seira a reed Ae dered 055311 pr ser Mis 7 o chter Mrs El p hl beer Maras n leer AA u Mise 2015530 11 ti Mier As 1 a ie Faen Arr dr ger ji lu Hee Patan d lu ee Sak CTV os dm ja Z re ee ees AA AAN FAN AAA 7 43 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 uowapeuen l Chapter 7 Useful Techniques About Menu Items Save to TEXT File File Menu The contents after comparison can be saved in a text file extension txt Display Condition Setting Display menu Selecting this command brings up the Display Condition Setting dialog Number of Display 10 to 100 default 20 The number of errors specified is displayed in the report window For errors having detailed information the details discrepant items can be checked in the following procedure e Display gt Detail e Double click the error e Right click the error and select Detail p mme UL en VATO eo ee TE ee As ad rra Phu gc Li erg a ai leg Lal h ite loni CiP or d PLCS ee Seg Zero gd aig co ri Tres opis Setra rieri b i Se I
195. e information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Notes on Placing a Screen Library e Depending on the part type only one piece can be registered on one division When placing a screen library containing such a part on screens make sure that the same division number is not used for multiple parts Take care of division numbers of parts at the time of registering parts in screen library To avoid a problem like the one described above division Nos 100 and higher should be allocated to screen libraries because such numbers may not be used generally Also take care not to use one division number repeatedly in different screen libraries There are cases in which only one part entry mode memory card can be used on one layer or only one part memo pad can be used on one screen Take the above note into consideration when placing a screen library containing such a part on the base screen or overlaps Multi languages This area is provided for the use of the language selection function IA For more information see Chapter 29 Language Selection in the Reference Manual Function 4 84 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Animation For the GV52 62 except for GV42C This area is provided for the use of the animation function Graphics for animation are registered Animation Function Structure There
196. e minimum enlargement factors are X 1 and Y 1 When smaller characters should be displayed the 1 4 size must be selected With the English Western Europe HK Gothic or HK Times font the number of points is used to specify a character size in place of enlargement factors The minimum permissible number of points is eight A smoother typeface can be realized as a result English Western Europe font lt CH OD n O j TI O 0 e n Minimum size 1 4 AB DEEG 1 x1 ABCDEFG English Western Europe HK Gothic font Minimum size 8 points ABC DEER 9 points AbTOEF 11 points ABCOEFG 12 points ABCOEFG It is not possible to use the English Western Europe HK Gothic or HK Times font o In combination with the English Western Europe font APP1 5 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts Points of English Western Europe HK Gothic HK Times The following sizes are supported Selection from Used or Not used Available lt When English Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times is selected for Font the 12 point size is automatically Available recognized as the font to be used and ee the data is transferred to the GV series Display Function Specifications Characters Latin1 Icelandic Irish Italian English Dutch Swedish available for Spanish Danish German Norwegian display Portuguese
197. e painted box is enclosed in a frame The frame is in the color for Foreground O Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is necessary For more information on transparent color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the Reference Manual Function Box Command Usage 1 Select a foreground color background color and check or uncheck O Paint and O Frame 4 41 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 2 Inthe Pattern Edit window drag the mouse A box is drawn according to the settings Circle Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog E tor Te Lenz o De ng E ees i og Foreground Select a color to be displayed by dragging Background Select a color to be displayed by right dragging or by dragging with the M Paint option checked see the next O Paint Check this when painting circles With a check mark drawn circles are painted in the color for Background O Frame This is active with M Paint checked With a check mark the painted circle is enclosed in a frame The frame is in the color for Foreground 0 Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is ne
198. ect Undo Wizard as explained above when deleting a part 10 9 17 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard M EMO Please use this page freely 9 18 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net ANo A Fonts Types of Fonts EE APP1 1 A Eee O A APP1 2 Available FONTS occoonnccnccccocooncnnnnnononccnnncnnnnononnncnonons APP1 3 HK Gothic and HK Times APP1 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomatio i Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts Types of Fonts The following fonts are available on the GV series Screen memory capacity when the font is in use unit kB Font ovsa wooo een A mes as 29 LI FEngishiWestem Europe 5 648 209 egene Chinese ss ss OO Peara lt O D LI O h TI O r LI Chinese simplified 5 376 3 264 a Page APP1 3 Gothic EM Europe HK Gothic As per setting Page APP1 4 dl Europe HK dl The GVWIN version 2 00 or greater is available with all the above fonts though there are some limitations on editing in each font type This chapter provides notes on font usage and description of editing in different fon
199. ed on the GVWIN editor such as a switch or numerical display to the Simulator you can automatically display the applicable memory and commenis for that item The procedure is described below 1 Go to the File menu on the Simulator and click on New to create a new file Or click the New Word icon to create a new file m e 2 Open screen data with the GVWIN editor and display the screen that will be tested As an example a screen with lamps arranged is shown here ATH lis thee Yi h 00 E dl i A LEE aiti dima P ON Ee Ge en Pm Jr Deep omg Tei winde Der E S OS am SW ELIAS ARMA EE JA Pr mE aa TE Ty E gu a all odds rs e TAL Division as f 8 20 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN 3 Click on a lamp to select it and then hold down the CTRL key while dragging it to the Simulator EF nal 4 Memory addresses will be displayed as follows in the new file li A h as Joye NWIS it A E 8 21 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Incrementing or Decrementing Memory Values It is possible to increment or decrement numerical values of word memory by setting the memory counter Setting Method 1 To set the memory counter double click on the curr
200. ed to 4 MB for the GV42 52 62 or 6 MB if only manual font setting data is stored in a CF card and to 2 MB for the GV40 50 60 even if available memory still remains Check the value specified for Remaining Font oa APP1 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts If data transfer to the GV series is executed while a minus value is specified for Remaining Font or Remaining Screen the editor software gives the following alarm message Joa OK gl A The ogee bos larga lo orearen lt O OD LU O j 7 O F LU If the alarm occurs a size that cannot be displayed normally on the GV series may be specified in the font data Check Remaining Font or Remaining Screen and correct the data as necessary 3 When the tab window setting is concluded click OK Data Transfer to the GV Series When a GV40 50 60 is used transfer the GV40 50 60 system program to the GV40 50 60 to update the program before transferring screen data 1 Transfer screen data including the HK font data to the GV series In the Transfer dialog select Screen Data and click the PC gt button The screen data and the font data are transferred to the GV series This section changes System Information FONT I F DRV VER 1 210 SYSTEM PROG VER 1 040 VER 1 300 1 010 1 000 MEWNET HK Gothic Screen Data PLC Type
201. ee eae eee 3 29 FIG El SCANS EE 3 31 ele Beeler 3 33 MUNTE EE 3 35 Sie CN BEE 3 37 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter A Registration Items Outline of Registration Jeng eege Seege 4 1 Contents of Registration Iems 4 2 CCCI eege eege Ee 4 3 Galing aA SCleCI 2th a 4 3 Screen EMI ataca aja r 4 3 Ec A ie a 4 4 Graphic Library e 4 4 Calling the Graphic LIN ac 4 4 Graphic Cibran Edling gege 4 5 Graphic Library Environment Setting cccccccooooconnnnncnnononononononenananononononononos 4 17 MUS E 4 20 Multi overlap Structure cccccccccccscessssseeceeeceeeeeseeeaeeesseeeeeeeeeesssaeaeaeseeeeeeeeeees 4 20 Calling a MUN OVEr AD E 4 20 Multi overlap Edtimg ENEE EEN 4 21 Other le e EE 4 23 Bala A A E 4 25 Regele eet 4 25 Calling acData BOCK susi a oler oe 4 25 Data Block EQUINOS o ea 4 26 Data Block Environment Setting ooooccconnccccnnncnncnononononanannnnnnnnnononononennnanens 4 27 MESSI a 4 28 Message SU UI a Oa a CO NU o LE cael 4 28 SE Mate ici dd 4 30 Message EA a 4 31 Message Display Environment Setting cccccccccccsssssseeceeeeeeeeeesesaeeeeeeeeeeees 4 35 EC EE 4 37 Pate SS CUCL eege ees 4 37 E HERE EE 4 37 E A TS 4 38 Re ed leie En EE 4 47 SHimap IMport and Stolrdg E soscar citas 4 49 Pattern Environment Seting circa a itita 4 53 Pacho a Fater aserne ii rl alice 4 54 Macro ee 4 55 Macro Bl
202. ee ee ee e e e rm e e e rm e e e ee e re e rm e re e e e rm re e e e rm e e e ee ee e e re re e re e re e e e re re e e e rm e e e ee re e e em re rm e e e re e e e rm re e e e ee e e ee re e e rm re re e e e zs a Receive side RS 232C cable straight AIGV8103 cross cable RS 232C cable accompanying the modem Modem A REN PW ER OH CD DA O O0O00 GV series 2 Modular cable Telephone line accompanying the modem modular socket TTT ee TLL LT Send side Telephone line modular socket RS 232C cable straight accompanying the modem 2 Modular cable Computer accompanying the modem Modem PW ER OH CD DA LINE OOOOO REN Connection between GV Series and Modem e Connect the AIGV8103 to the modular jack MJ1 on the back of the GV series e Connect the RS 232C cable accompanying the modem to the RS 232C connector on the back of the modem e The cable to connect the AIGV8103 and the RS 232C cable accompanying the modem should be arranged for by the customer Cross Cable Connection The AlIGV8103 is a cross cable To bring the signal connection to a straight state manufacture another cross cable to be connected 5 30 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer 9 pin connector Modem 9 pin AIGV8103 9 pin 2 of the modem enue amass eee For a modem that is no
203. ee fe 5 TT Ge Lina SE bs zer E Kb KH gd GC KE Pe ee ee Aap aa i Ho Fatt eee Ha Gatti Sp Ho Burt Lt L Ho Gott ig Ki These commands can also be selected from the right click menu y To select multiple block numbers at one time hold down the Shift key and click AS top and bottom block numbers 4 68 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Screen Block When Screen Call in the Relay dialog is chosen in the relay mode parts screen blocks must be specified IT For more information on the screen call function see Chapter 6 Message Display in the Reference Manual Function Screen Block Structure A maximum of 1 024 screen blocks can be registered Calling a Screen Block Select Screen Block from the Item menu The Screen Block Edit window is LU Q D D Y displayed O A 4 69 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Screen Block Editing Follow the procedure below 1 Click the block No 0 cell under Block The line is highlighted as shown below 3 The other columns become active Set them using the arrow buttons or entering alphanumerics through the keyboard E L e kW ap
204. eeeeeeeeeeeaeessseseeeeeeeeessseeaeaseeeseeeeeeeees 2 7 Display Environment Setting ccena e aai a 2 10 Part Types and Placement 2 17 KSE WV DCS nra a tee ee See E 2 17 Notes on Parts Placement E 2 18 Pane E 2 21 Parts Placement from Wee 2 28 Parts Placementand td 2 34 A e fen cdsteehaetesemersiecs cesits 2 34 Switemand SAIN EE 2 39 RRE E 2 40 Relay Relay Sub and Message Mode 2 46 Entry Mode and Data Block Area 2 47 Bar Graph Pie Graph Panel Meter CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net and Closed Area Graphi ie 2 48 Si 2 49 o rane tert atte Umnantne mtr m ints a oan Unni een nes eee meen 2 50 Graphic Mode and Graphic Relay Mode ooocccnncnnnnccnnccccncncncnnnnnnoncnnnonononnnnonnnnos 2 50 A 2 51 Bian BO Fe WY A A o A 2 52 Calendar Display din 2 52 A A O ereet at 2 54 Macro and Interval TING iO 2 54 Memo Card in 2 55 ANIMAN a e oc late atl OS 2 55 O En 2 56 JPEG EE 2 56 A bere 2 56 Color Keele 2 57 A A 2 57 A A essen tea teaadsennens 2 58 TZO COIOR LEE 2 61 Monochrome Mel 2 62 A A a 2 63 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Reie E 3 1 BASIC ODE e E 3 2 Sereen Drawina Dialog EE 3 2 5 PP A 3 3 SEM TES dt a Sees 3 3 Selecting Line Styles edena a r r 3 4 Drawing One e 3 5 Bi EE 3 5 Siet EE 3 7 ee EE 3 12 fl gt EE 3 18 Ke EE 3 23 QUI EE 3 26 E E E E A EASE ES E EE N 3 27 A nn II e e e ee ec e eee 3 29 Elle E oenccteoeuased aceon e
205. een Uncheck the menu when the status bar is not necessary Jump Used for screen calling Preview Brings up the previous screen Next Moves to the next screen Skip Skips screens that are not registered when scrolling screens Screen List Brings up currently editing screens or graphics in the graphic library in a list form For more information see page 1 23 Item List Brings up the switches lamps and graphic items placed on the screen ina list form For more information see page 1 27 Switch Lamp Display Allows you to choose the status of a switch or lamp on the screen The OFF ON P3 to P8 options can be selected when this menu is clicked Clicking each option changes the switch lamp display Grid Display Shows grids when this menu is checked Unchecking this menu clears grids from the screen ON Grid Selects the on grid screen environment when this menu is checked Unchecking this menu cancels the on grid screen environment Grid Offset Position Becomes valid when Free is chosen for Grid Type in the Grid tab window Click this menu and then click the desired position on the screen The grid offset position is determined Zoom Brings up the sub menu containing 400 200 100 and 75 Choose the desired option to change the zoom Display Environment For more information see Chapter 2 Screens Change All Display Environment Changes the display en
206. een Drawing dialog is displayed Be Gett Shae Pemoh Tred Gtaar Soak il Te b ee o ji Te pes 1 pm Erasing the Dialog The draw mode is in effect while the dialog is on the screen The mouse turns a cross shaped cursor To cancel the draw mode erase the Screen Drawing dialog To erase the Screen Drawing dialog click the Select icon in the icon bar or click the Close button on the Screen Drawing dialog REI LIO A SE ao Trend Graph Scale Multi Text EEGEN ZS Text Faint Dot L If you drag the cursor over the dialog during drawing the dialog is temporarily AS erased and is displayed on completion of mouse dragging 3 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Moving the Dialog Dragging the title of the Screen Drawing dialog moves the dialog to the desired position Drag around here Hate Shae epah Trei Gis Sous E oe ee ee JI Tee UU 9 O O Lo OD ml D Selecting Colors The procedure of color selection is the same as that used for parts For more information see Chapter 2 Screens Selecting Tiles Tile Tiles can be selected when painting boxes or circles A maximum of 16 tiles can be used Eight tiles are registered as default You can register additional eight tiles as required For the procedure of registering user defined t
207. een library No 0 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE Replace the calendar part in the screen library d Screen library is available for management of parts on screens 4 82 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Offset Position Setting Every screen library has a reference position called an offset When a registered screen library is called to the screen it is placed based on the offset position Offset position in screen library SLIB position on the screen Screen library shows the offset position with an OFF mark Every screen library has an offset position at coordinates X Y 0 0 as default To change the position follow the procedure below Aeq u 19S 1 Click the Offset icon on the drawing tool bar ESA 2 Across cursor marked with OFF appears 3 Click the mouse in the desired position The offset mark is displayed at that location Changing the offset position prior to registering a screen library is not valid Set an offset position after registering a screen library pr 4 83 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Placing a Screen Library Registered screen libraries can be placed on screens using the Screen LIB icon on the drawing tool bar 1 o A B A For mor
208. eens containing complicated graphics EX Connecting a continuous line to a straight line on a screen 1 Click the Point Search icon depressed 2 Click a part of the continuous line closest to the straight line and drag The handle closest to the straight line turns green Drag around this point The closest handle turns green Line Continuous line Ly 3 While dragging the continuous line to the straight line the green handle is snapped to the straight line automatically 1 ef d 2 E e 1 O 1 1 1 A Snapped automatically 1 41 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 0 LA O O O D o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O wa Chapter 1 Basic Operation Screen Data File Property Clicking Property in the File menu brings up the following dialog File Information Tab Window PLC Type The PLC model set for the screen data file is displayed File Name The screen data file name is displayed File Comment The comment for the current screen data file can be entered A maximum of 16 1 byte characters eight 2 byte characters can be entered The comment entered here is transferred to GV as well when screen data is transferred Change Password Use this button when setting a password for the screen data file or when changing the existing password A maximum of six alphanumeric characters can be set The pas
209. eft to the bottom right e Sp 3 lt D n o V D O D D e When selecting multiple parts individually hold down the Shift key and click we ge emm e 2 27 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Parts Movement e While handles are shown around a selected part drag the part avoid dragging the handles A cross cursor appears and functions as a tool to move the part NN Drag with a cross cursor y While a cross cursor is displayed pressing an arrow key gt lt UI N on the xX keyboard moves a part or graphic dot by dot Parts Placement from Tool Bars When an icon for the entry relay or sampling mode is clicked its own tool bar is displayed It is possible to make settings including the Detail dialog for the corresponding part from the displayed tool bar This section explains the procedure for placing and setting parts from tool bars Setting Procedure Ex Relay Click the Relay Mode icon on the tool bar The relay mode tool bar is displayed at the upper right in Hp a 4 7 E A E E SoM Hes EZ KI AC KI If the tool bar is hidden from view drag it so that it comes into view entirely 3 Ge ll SL TE WU tee 7 Gin Fin n mes Ro RA RIESS HHRER IDEA eee ee A A be is YAO Bet A A D la P 2 28 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0
210. eg Sonar pw x See ep fia Bites ho Prado a ae Cira PF H Cual Heep Us Ear Esta j n 2 The File Manage Part dialog is displayed Specify the desired files for Copy Source and Copy Target and click OK 3 The item selection pull down menu is displayed Choose Switch for example Click OK 4 The copy source and target file windows are displayed The source file window is placed above the target file window 5 Drag the desired part from the copy source file window to the target file window Copying is executed Multiple parts are selected simultaneously by clicking the first part and then while holding down the SHIFT key clicking the last part APP3 36 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing 6 If you want to copy different parts select Change Display from the Display menu The item selection dialog is displayed Choose the desired part and click OK Display window w Shas Ba Change Display 7 In addition to copying by dragging as explained above copying by designating part numbers is also possible Select Copy by Specifying No from the Edit window The item selection dialog is displayed Choose the desired part and click OK The No Designation dialog is displayed Specify the desired numbers for Copy Source No and Copy Target No Edi imiy wrke
211. eld When setting or modifying numerical data click the upward downward arrow buttons Some data fields allow direct numeral entry through the keyboard 3 Option button Select one option by clicking When the button changes to e the option is selected 4 Arrow to show the drop down list Clicking this arrow shows the drop down list Select the desired option 5 Check box Click on the check box for the desired option The check box changes from O to M checked When a box is checked it means that it is selected or 6 Command button Command buttons include OK Yes No Cancel etc Clicking a button triggers the specified action 7 Text field When the cursor is shown in a text field characters can be entered The dialog can be moved by pointing to the title section and dragging 1 17 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net OU LA O O O D o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O wa Chapter 1 Basic Operation Setting up Memory Addresses When specifying a memory address in a dialog click the calculator button on the right of the entry field The Memory Input dialog is displayed The contents in the dialog vary depending on the PLC model and the selected type Common setting items are explained in RER eg 1 When PLC Memory is selected Select this option when using the PLC memory A Device sele
212. elow 1 Right click Animation and click Ada 2 The Animation VIEW dialog is displayed Start setting from animation No O Fie Edi ua Ten pides Anmain WU ww E GA ngs a pair Hu f RM Lg Ml an i Fi i 5d Tr siarp Mo Enimia fi a gt Saeco da Feis fi a VU TES 1 PLA 8 apis ef sin Animation No 0 1 023 An animation number currently being edited is displayed To go toa different animation number for editing click the arrow buttons or key in the desired number directly M Use A check mark for this option denotes that the animation number has been set To cancel the setting uncheck the box Start Frame No and End Frame No 0 1 022 Specify the number range of frames to be used for this animation Seconds to Replay x100 msec Specify a speed to change the frames specified for Start Frame No and End Frame No during animation TEST After frames are selected their animation can be checked A For more information see Chapter 17 Animation in the Reference Manual Function 3 When the dialog setting is concluded click the Close button The Animation window is displayed again 4 86 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 4 Double click on the Animation folder The Animation sub folders as set in step 2 are displa
213. em setting data The tile list is also printed out O List of Memory Use See page 6 10 Memory use by screens and screen edit items is printed O Use Cross reference See page 6 10 6 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Print Memory addresses are printed to the following edit items e Message When messages are printed memory addresses used in relay mode are also printed e Graphic Library valid when M Screen Output is checked When graphic library is printed memory addresses used in graphic relay mode are also printed e Page direct and screen blocks When page direct or screen blocks are printed or when relay sub mode is used the corresponding memory addresses are also printed O Net Table Ethernet This option is valid when Ethernet is set Check the box when printing the network table for Ethernet OMulti Languages The option is valid when 2 or more is selected for Changing Characters Select this option when printing the multi language edit window O Screen 0 to 1023 Check the box when printing screen images or items set for the screens O Message 0 to 23 group Messages grouped by edit numbers are printed O Pattern 0 to 1023 Check the box when printing patterns U e D U O O D Q Cc OD O Graphic Library Group No O to 9 Graphic No 0 to 255 Check
214. en Edit window of the specified screen number is displayed OU LA O O Oo D o O 5 O a e gt D m Q O wa windows currently opened on the editor click the Window menu Clicking the Q Note that the previous Screen Edit window remains open To check the edit O See edit window name moves the window to the front The multiple Screen Edit windows or Multi overlap Edit windows can be displayed on gt h the editor Operations on the Screen List Window Screens can be moved copied or deleted easily on the Screen List window Clicking the desired screen on the Screen List window highlights the screen number 1 25 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Right clicking brings up the drop down menu including Copy Paste Delete etc Selecting a command performs the selection action To select multiple screens click the top screen hold down the SHIFT key and click the last screen The selected screen numbers are highlighted Click Lt f y E SS op r d pm Be La Hold down the Shift key and click 1 26 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation It is possible to copy the desired screen by dragging it to an empty screen
215. en the TC Sp computer and the GV series Click n COCHA 4 Click the PC lt button Screen lioan a nd data transfer starts 5 13 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net o O z D D Si O o Q lt o 5 D L Chapter 5 Transfer Screen Data Comparison between Computer and GV Series 1 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu m eet e Ee tem Mg ai 2 The Transfer dialog is displayed d 7 ie Select Display for Transfer la E aio Device and Screen Data for TE P remm E Transfer Data Tears Era la Fa 3 Click the Detail Setting button t Select a computer serial port to be ao ony used and a baud rate between the M ia computer and the GV series Click Jemen OK LS A 4 Click the PC lt gt button Screen Le and data comparison starts between the e SE GV series and the computer HE If screen data transfer is aborted the message below appears on the screen and the screen data as well the font data is deleted Keep this in mind if aborting data transfer Ioc Font Data not setting Down load by Panel Editor 060000000 Screen Data Transfer on Ethernet IT For the description of screen data transfer on Ethernet see the GV42 52 62 Hardware Manual 1 Ethernet in Chapter 4 Network Communication 5 14 CTi Automation
216. ent color click No L When a normal overlap is placed on the screen the Layer dialog is displayed AS after this message Select display or non display for the base screen and each overlap and click OK 4 The screen is copied to the clipboard automatically 7 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Import of Screen Image into Word Processing Software Ex This section explains how to paste a GV42 52 62 screen to a Microsoft Word screen 1 Copy the desired screen to the clipboard as explained above 2 Start the Word software 3 Move the cursor to the position to place the copy a a PO 4 O LI 4 Select Paste from the Edit menu The copied image is pasted on the document The size of the image can be changed by dragging a handle Cg eT nl ot my E SE Aa oe o ae eel a ce A Ge A A ee se A D 7 13 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 7 Paste Bitmap By specifying a bitmap file with extensions BMP the bitmap can be pasted to the screen The bitmap file is imported as a pattern automatically Operation Procedure 1 Select Paste Bitmap from the Tool menu The Open a Bitmap File dialog is displayed 2 Click the desired bitmap f
217. ent data in the dialog Page 6 4 Select and print the data Select Print from the File menu The Print Setting dialog is displayed Choose the desired data and start printing 6 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net y 4 gt D gt OD n Chapter 6 Print Option Setting Dialog Select Printer Setting from the File menu The Option Setting dialog containing the following options is displayed Lipo So E A Soe Dez T Tibia Pre Lt Cae T p Po Aia Pap 2epee A Pirra U edd Pagari Eo eee Ft Sedition TF 2 A GAH Ven Eye Des Aar Te Yi Sesoted EL PT poe EDO ba Pipes dir H Pags lin U Le Cede Faget Few fu mees BJ ts The following setting items are included M Screen Output Screen images are printed O List Output Items set for the screen are printed O Table Print The table of screen images is printed When this option is checked the Screen Output and List Output options are not active O Reverse The screens are printed in reverse video Only the white and black portions are reversed O Monochrome If the printed screen data is difficult to see check this box Legibility may be improved 6 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Print Options Under Page Setting
218. ent memory value The Write Memory dialog is displayed y If you right click on the memory that will be set as a timer counter a menu is displayed From there it is possible to display a dialog by clicking on Change Setting Value The same dialog can be displayed by going to the tool bar and clicking on the Setting Value icon 2 Check the O Use Memory Counter box The memory counter setting items become active 3 Make the desired entries for Increment Value and Interval Time An increment value from 1000 to 1000 can be entered An interval time from 1 to 300 can be entered 4 When the O Specify the Range box is checked it is possible to set the upper and lower limits The maximum upper limit setting is 2147483647 and the maximum lower limit setting is 2147483648 F Li a i eee ML pr mirin lee 1 S wl Ae Specks de ege Up E La 5 Click OK to close the dialog A white square shaped icon will be displayed to the left of memory on the sheet 8 22 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Use Method 1 Click on the white square shaped icon to the left of memory on the sheet Or select memory that is set for the memory counter and then press the space bar The icon will change to a clock indicating that the memory counter has started F E L Rowa En ROSS propon
219. er Specify the table data display part handles are shown select Table Data Display Editing from the Edit menu and execute Align Character gt 2 12345 hz0 e Cut This command is used for editing lines or columns The function is the same as that of Cut in the Edit menu e Copy The function of this command is the same as that of Copy in the Edit menu Paste becomes active after copy e Paste The function of this command is the same as that of Paste in the Edit menu When multiple columns or lines are pasted the cell designated as the target is placed at the top of the pasted data A data area larger than the table cannot be pasted 2 45 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens e Insert This command is used for editing lines or columns When lines are copied or cut selected lines are highlighted they are inserted above the designated target When columns are copied or cut they are inserted on the left of the designated target e Delete This command is used for editing lines or columns The function is the same as that of Delete in the Edit menu e Detail Setting The dialog for table data display property change is displayed L The Cut Insert and Delete commands are used for editing lines or columns Ex Insert Copy Specify the target Finished No 1 EE No 1 MNR
220. et Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts Display Pattern This setting is active only when a switch or lamp part is selected The displays of the OFF ON and P3 to P8 patterns can be shown Select the desired switch part and click Select 7 The selected part is previewed in the Switch dialog aid IR f Hd F ab Par The above step completes a part selection MA For other settings such as memory see the Reference Manual Function APP2 20 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts With GV40 50 60 The notes on 3D parts usage and the setting procedure for the GV40 50 60 are almost the same as for the GV42C This section therefore provides the notes associated with the GV40 50 60 only Read the section for GV42C as well Notes on Usage Applicable GV40 50 60 Oo J y an Using 3D parts may result in exhaustion of memory If the used GV40 50 60 is not in recommended versions open the Memory Expansion tab window in the Unit Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu and uncheck O Memory Capacity 2M Without this setting the memory use list Memory use from the Tool menu will not indicate correct values 0 If using 3D parts with the GV series in any version other than recommended it is recommended that Matsushita Electric Works optional memory cassette
221. et and 3D parts color pallet cannot be used in one file The pallet to be used is selected by checking unchecking M Use 3D Parts See this option setting to check which pallet is selected Toa The basic 15 colors are The silver color on the 3D color used on both pallets pallet is slightly brighter than Silver color that on the ordinary color pallet Ordinary color pallet 3D parts color pallet APP2 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts Limitation on Parts Placement A maximum of 1 023 patterns of 3D parts can be used in one screen data file e Pattern Count When one part or multiple parts of the same type in the same size are placed Count the notch number of one part When parts of the same type in different sizes are placed Count the notch number of each part OO U U a Ex The switch and lamp parts on the following screen use 58 patterns 2 notch x 26 pieces 3 notch x 2 pieces 58 Each bottom right value indicates the notch number of the part 099 Caro uum amp 3 8 Wang 000 9 9 9 9 uy 9 0 9 9 0 0 9 3 del 10000099 222 04000093 ao ED o 3 notch parts They are the same type parts in different sizes They are counted individually Only one part is the target to count because they are of the same type in the same size APP2 17 CTi Au
222. etting Colors available for blinking are limited For the color display the basic 16 colors can be used for blinking For the monochrome display blinking is available in 8 graduation or 2 gradation colors Blinking Setting Procedure 1 Bring up the color pallet The B button is placed at the far right of the basic 16 color or monochrome pallet 2 Click the B button It is marked with x Blinking display is now enabled A GM Blinking Time Setting It is possible to change the blinking interval Set the items as described below 1 Select Unit Setting from the System Setting menu The Unit Setting dialog is displayed 2 Open the Blink Flash tab window Set OFF Time and ON Time joe re Ceti Me Demian Edad Erian Garra rege spuere Hecht bam Errar Deg ee Hab The specified blinking time is valid as a common setting in the screen data file O It is not allowed to specify different times as individual blinking settings 2 62 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens MEMO Please use this page freely O si O lt CH CH 09 D gt o U OH gt wn 2 63 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens 2 64 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www
223. eudo gradation is performed With the use of 3 D parts on the GV40 50 60 however this option and Dither cannot be selected Pseudo gradation is to be set automatically 4 50 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Detail This option brings up the detailed menu for Pseudo Gradation as the following Dres 0001 Tt in U D Adaptive Error Diffusion Error diffusion adapted to each individual part of the image can be performed This function places emphasis on smoothness of image more than the following Error Diffusion does Error Diffusion If a color of the source image is not included in the color pallet two bits in similar colors are placed alternately so as to reproduce the color Nothing A pallet similar to the source image color is selected Ordered Dithering Error diffusion pattern is made closer to regular pattern Diffusion 0 3 standard 1 Specify a level of diffusion Color 0 15 standard 8 Assign priority to brightness or color for depicting When a specified number gets smaller brightness takes priority over color Green 0 15 standard 8 Assign priority to blue green based color or red yellow based color for depicting When a specified number gets smaller green based color takes priority over other colors Convert Clicking this option depres
224. example on the previous page this setting would be 0 4 Click the Read button e For Sampling Method Constant Sample the data read is immediately shown on the GV series graph e For Sampling Method Bit Synchronize the data read will be shown on the GV series depending on whether the sample control memory trigger sets or resets the bit y For details on the sampling method or sample control memory see Chapter 10 Sampling in the Reference Manual Function 8 26 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Menu and Icons Commands included in each menu correspond to the icons as shown below File Menu Edit Menu Edi Lreesrs sbee Yer hirio baL I D kesi 7 O Urh D in 4 3 Beds D st 5 gt d Dei nn 1 a Core Det 2 D Paste my 3 Date Di 8 EERE 9 eT Caras D ipis dude 10 a berg ak 11 Drpis T poe Seting 12 jen Seating 13 Comment ati 14 Kell LA D 8 27 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Communication Menu Communication View w Stark End Click Te Depressed Start Raised End Leoni tenth wt View Menu w Standald Tocha e Suee Toska eg Sain be aaa Riel 2 15 16 17 18 19 20
225. f 1 024 screen libraries can be registered The maximum permissible memory for one screen library is 128 kB Screen library No 0 02 01 01 PASA E No 1023 A maximum of 1 024 screen libraries can be registered Calling a Screen Library Select Screen Library from the Item menu The Screen Library dialog is displayed Specify the screen library number to be opened and click OK ben Sne Seira Org apie Libras Dabo Hporaga Eikii Haro Block Fee Ex 4 80 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Screen Library Editing Most parts valid on screens are valid in screen libraries as well Parts and graphics can be placed in the same manner as on screens Notes on Editing e The functions below are not valid for screen libraries though they are valid for screens Overlap OPEN macro CLOSE macro CYCLE macro Local function switch setting Screen library e Place parts in screen library while imagining them placed on the screen Both parts in screen library and on the screen are subject to the limitation on screen parts placement When placing a screen library on the screen check that parts to be placed do not exceed the limited number op CH D D D F o Q lt NA For more information on the limitation on screen parts placement see Chapter 2 Screens
226. f a Part Placed icon 2 2 O08 dh Om Modify Part window 6 The Modify Part window for the data sampling display area part is displayed Edit the part or change its size y Changing the Position of Data x Data shown in the part data sampling display area part can only be moved horizontally 1 Click the data sampling display area part Handles are shown around the part 2 Click the desired data to select it Handles are shown around the data 3 Drag the selected data to the desired position m a m o z 1234 1234 1234 1234 1 1234 1234m 234m 234 L 4 i po it eee AAA a APP3 30 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing 7 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part 8 Close the Modify Part window Data Sampling Disp Area Part Edit window 9 The former edit window is displayed The modified display area part appears in the window Editing Calendar Parts A calendar part can consist of all calendar items year month day hour minute second and day of the week It is also possible to create individual parts in order to use them separately This is one calendar part 02 06 15 17 20 15 Sunday Sunday These are separate calendar parts 17 20 m Q J O v O O D
227. ferent from those in screen editing Base Screen Display While editing a graphic in the graphic library a screen or multi overlap can be placed behind the graphic to check the actual image Only a graphic Graphic displayed on a base Monitor Screen An offset position can be changed with ease 4 17 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 1 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed 2 Check O Base Screen Dsp Selection from Screen and Multi Overlap LIB is made possible 3 Select either one and specify the desired number 4 Click OK The selected screen is placed behind the graphic If no screen is displayed select Redraw from the Display menu or press the Home key on the keyboard 4 18 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Background Color Setting It is possible to change the background color in the graphic library L When the graphic library is called tts background setting is ignored and thus AS only the registered graphic is recognized as a target 1 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed 2 Open the Menu Dsp tab window 3 Select the desired backgr
228. fter the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window oa 6 Select the bar graph part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 7 The Modify Part window for the bar graph part is displayed Edit the part or change its size 8 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part 9 Close the Modify Part window Click the Frame Auto Fit icon loo a a lo a y i Eb a lo o a a a E A Bar Graph Part Edit window 10 The Modify Part window for the bar graph part is displayed Edit the part or change its size APP3 18 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Pie Graph Editing Procedure Pie Graph Types The following types of pie graph parts are available Without internal circle Without internal circle Without internal circle Symmetry Complete Round Asymmetry With internal circle With internal circle With internal circle Symmetry Complete Round Asymmetry wD Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Pie Graph Part Edit window 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened m Q J O O O D o a D O s m D O 5 U o ech 2 Click the New Part icon The pie g
229. g area is determined based on the switch grids The grids are based on the unit 16 x 20 dots the unit of switch 14 x 18 dots plus spaces 2 x 2 dots The reference point is placed at the coordinates 1 1 2 13 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Mode The mode grids are equivalent to the one byte character grids but their reference points differ The mode grids are based on the unit 8 x 20 dots The reference point is placed at 0 0 Lines and columns are used to indicate item positions as the figure on the left When specifying overlap positions etc by external signals indicate their column and line numbers 0 4 2 3 Column Line Free Your desired grids can be set by specifying the following options X Offset Y Offset X Pitch Y Pitch Relationship between Offset and Pitch Grids are placed from the offset point at intervals specified by X and Y pitches Ex 1 Ex 2 X Offset 0 X Offset 10 Y Offset 0 Y Offset 10 X Pitch 20 X Pitch 20 Y Pitch 20 Y Pitch 20 Offset point 20 0 40 0 Offset point 30 10 0 0 0 20 0 40 2 14 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens M Place Switches on Switch Grids When this option is checked switches are placed based on the switch
230. g in the text field If the cursor is not flashing in the text field click the mouse on the text field Number of Characters Available The maximum permissible number of characters per line depends on the number of displayed dots Maximum 1 byte No of displayed dots The above figures are based on the line spacing of 4 KN Text Entry Check that the cursor is flashing in the text field and enter characters using the keyboard To enter multiple lines press the return key on the keyboard and insert a hard y A return 3 35 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Selecting Colors Foreground and background colors can be set For the color setting procedure see Chapter 2 Screens Text Properties Click the Char Prop button The Char Prop dialog is displayed Che Pron KR Deg Fa D ise age Co Heel 7 I F Hui Sis E Let ime Sa zent DR eel Ji 2 For other setting items not described below see page 3 19 Left Center Right Select text alignment Pitch 0 32 Specify the desired line spacing The maximum available number varies depending on this setting Placing Multi text Multi text can be placed in the same manner as ordinary text For more information see page 3 22 3 36 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net
231. g the selected part on the screen click the Place button Calendar Display Clicking the Calendar Display icon brings up the Calendar dialog Has ag da rr Ha l rs Ari ee Da Lea Jes Lex ie IM For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 11 Time Display Calendar in the Reference Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button brings up the parts list Select the desired part and click Select The previous dialog is displayed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button 2 52 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Note on selecting parts Calendar parts consist of parts like hour minute and second year month and day and also parts with punctuation marks like and If you check M Save Setting in the calendar parts list window and then proceed to select parts there are instances of the selected parts being placed on the screen ina disrupted condition To avoid disrupting the shape of the parts that are placed on the screen it is recommended that you do not check O Save Setting in the calendar parts list window D tt Joa y How to Alter a Calendar Part x To delete one portion of a calendar part YY MM DD hh mm ss SUN refer to the example below Ex To delete day of the week 1 Go to the Wee
232. grids irrespective of the set grid type L When the Point Search icon is used during switch placing the function of the icon takes x priority over the switch grid setting About the right click menu Y O h The ON Grid Grid Dsp and Grid Type options in the Grid tab window are also pe included in the right click menu Right clicking the mouse on the screen shows the a following menu 5 aT paii chee m 5 lt S Epi chte D Ge Dri LU tee z E 5 ELLE TEH Zeil A eh Abt Piece il emp When ON Grid and Grid Display are checked or unchecked these commands are active or inactive For Grid Type select the desired type from the displayed menu on the right When ON Grid or Grid Display is selected the grid type selected from this menu becomes valid Make other grid settings such as color or offset in the Display Environment dialog 2 15 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Others Tab Window Zoom 75 100 200 400 The screen display can be zoomed out or zoomed in O Monochrome 8 grade Display When this option is checked the colors on the screen change into the monochrome 8 gradation colors This function is available only when 16 24 32 bit full color is selected for Windows screen setting and invalid when 256 color is selected TOD M Interlock Text
233. h dialog Several switch parts for a keypad are registered as a keypad part When placing a keypad part in screen editing the switch parts are grouped To relocate the switch parts ungroup a keypad part into single parts IO Editing Graph Parts There are seven different types of graph parts bar graph pie graph panel meter statistics graph bar statistics graph pie trend graph and closed area graph To create these graph parts follow their individual procedures D tt 33 rt m A TU ke O O D OQ pmj D LI h O m GN O gt U Q Bar Graph Editing Procedure Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Bar Graph Part Edit window 1 The edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 2 Click the New Part icon The bar graph type pull down menu is displayed S E OAD y Hoima Em RET Hoszortel Be LFT Weiss Es Top Mertical Bai Boton 3 Choose Horizontal Bar RGT for example A dotted box and a mover tool appear 4 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new graph part is placed EE ga APP3 17 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing 5 Double click the part The Bar Graph dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set a
234. he dialog WAERT Tu L m Feet CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email 7 29 info ctiautomation net 7 uowapeuen l Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Copying Screens between Windows e The copy source and target file windows are displayed as shown below when any of the following items are selected from the File Managing dialog Screen Graphic Library Multi Overlap Data Block Pattern Data Sheet Screen Library Animation Frame e The copy source and target file windows are displayed The source file window is placed above the other Perform copying as described below 1 Click the screen to be copied in the source file window The screen number is highlighted in red z E ri shen ll E If necessary scroll the target file window until the desired file number comes into view Drag the selected screen to the desired target box number The copied screen is displayed in the target position by releasing the mouse In the case of a screen only the screen is copied The pattern or graphic library thatis used on the screen is not copied 7 30 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques 4 To copy consecutive screens click the first number of the source screens 5 While holding down the SHIFT key click the last number of the source screens The
235. he mouse in the desired position The offset mark is displayed at that location Changing the offset position prior to registering a data block is not valid Set an offset position after registering a data block Io 4 26 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Block Environment Setting Environment setting for data block is also started from Display Environment in the Display menu as performed for screen editing Therefore this section explains the display environment settings that are different from those in screen editing Base Screen Display While editing a data block a screen or multi overlap can be placed behind the data block to check the actual image Only a data block Data block displayed on a base Change set value J o Line A setting D Data1 1234 LU O Data 2 1234 Q Data3 1234 238 9 uel 4 5 sf owl Data 4 1234 2 EJ Pl pais e 2 fol cr An offset position can be changed with ease 1 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed 2 Check O Base Screen Dsp Selection from Screen and Multi Overlap LIB is made possible 3 Select either one and specify the desired number 4 Click OK The selected screen is placed behind the data block Background Color Setting It is possible to change the backg
236. heck mark is added to the command and on line editing becomes possible On line Run becomes active Clicking the command again clears the check mark On line editing is canceled For more information on on line editing see Chapter 5 Transfer 1 32 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation 8 On line Run This command becomes valid in on line editing When it is clicked only the screen data that has not been transferred yet is transferred to GV When an Item is Selected 9 Cut Same as Cut in the Edit menu 10 Copy Same as Copy in the Edit menu When it is clicked Paste becomes active 11 Paste Same as Paste in the Edit menu 12 Delete Same as Delete in the Edit menu 13 Change All This command is used to change division numbers or processing cycles of the parts placed on the screen at one time Select the desired part and click this command The Change All dialog is displayed SF Chega diet E L tip oe Sg IR Les Change All Division No When this item is checked the division number can be specified Specify the division number to be changed for the selected part Change All Process Cycle When this item is checked the processing cycle can be selected Select the desired processing cycle Clicking OK changes the processing cycle of the selected part at one time
237. hese functions may not be available even with the GV42 52 62 depending on the models For more information on available models see the Reference Manual Function be lt D N S 5 o U D O ap D 5 F 2 19 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Setting Memory Setting memory in the previous chart means the number of memory locations which is read on one screen This does not mean the number of words used on a screen Screen resolution varies with models of GV No of memory locations per screen GV42 52 62 1024 GV40 50 60 1024 The read area under System Setting is counted as one memory location The write area is not the target to count Therefore to determine the maximum number of memory locations for a part subtract one from the number indicated in the above table The way of counting for setting memory is unique but these values should be enough to create screens Examples e One memory location is counted even when 10 words are used in the relay mode e Switch output memory is not counted as setting memory For lamp memory however one is counted for each lamp memory location used e Each data display is counted as one memory location If maximum and minimum values are set one memory location each is counted 2 20 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web
238. hiac dep gt 51 4 ma Gusta Block Mecca La i K Pater Mago B kak Fos Ex Direct Bl korte Green Block li En Char lE En Che H Date 5 cen Libra rd 4 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Graphic Library Editing Y Only graphics can be registered in the graphic library parts cannot be o registered Use this drawing tool bar for graphic library O Ge E 7 oA im r N n Dr Except for the points below the editing procedure using the drawing tool bar is the same as the procedure for screens Th For more information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Offset Position Setting Outline of Offset Position G Q O O F o Q lt Every graphic library screen in the graphic library has a reference position called an offset When a registered graphic is called to the screen it is placed based on the offset position The offset position in the graphic library is equivalent to the graphic call GLIB position in drawing as well as the top left corner in a display area Ex Placement by Graphic Call on the drawing tool bar Offset position in the graphic library An offset position in the graphic library is shown with an OFF mark 4 5 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
239. hosen 3 Click 2 notch A dotted box and a mover tool appear 4 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new switch part is placed in the window Click the desired position 5 Double click the placed part The Switch dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window 1O _ 6 Create the OFF display of the switch Check that the OFF icon is depressed If not click the icon APP3 10 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing 7 Select the switch part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 8 The Modify Part window for the switch part is opened Edit the part or change its size m o 5 O y E O O D Q c x CD nm h O m m O gt U m L Switch Area Setting SW A switch part contains a switch area Pressing here activates the switch This area can be moved in switch part editing Select Switch Area Setting from the Edit menu Or right click the mouse and select Switch Area Setting from the pop up menu Mover tool OM Ged E Grid Diao C Cred Tppa F a Fiara Aito Fitting Drag the mover tool while The switch area is fitting it to the switch part
240. ible memory an attempt to transfer the file causes an alarm message The size is too large to communicate and results in transmission failure 10c 2 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Operation Environment Setting This chapter explains the environment setting procedure for screen editing Background Color Setting Follow the procedure below to set a screen background color Select Screen Setting from the Edit menu The Screen Setting dialog is displayed Serres Betteng xj Eo m T us a di Er had Caa D E en i D E sg zzz O CH OH en D eg O gt lt O mD 3 OH gt t LO OH gt Q ao lr Ll eos T As Fale a l Options F foreground color B background color and T tile under Back Color are provided to set the screen background For more information on the color setting procedure see page 2 57 Other Screen Setting Items The Screen Setting dialog has the following items as well P1 Tab Window Switch Output This option is active only when the GV switch type is the matrix type For more information see Chapter 3 Switch in the Reference Manual Function Ol Item Select Memory This option is active when numerical data display or character display parts with Display Function Entry Target setting are placed in the e
241. icon 3 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new overlap part is placed in the window Basic part area 4 Double click the overlap part The Overlap Normal dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window Joa 5 Select the overlap part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon APP3 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Modify Part window 6 The Modify Part window for the overlap part is opened Edit the part or change its size Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon y e Frame adjustment cannot be used for overlap parts because they have no frames e No graphic outside the basic part area is active Draw graphics within the area e A basic part area color can be specified in the Overlap dialog 7 After editing the part close the Modify Part window Overlap Part Edit window 8 The former Overlap Part Edit window is displayed The modified overlap appears in the window APP3 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Editing Switch Lamp Parts Editing procedures for switches and lamps are almost the same Unlike other pa
242. ide Drag 4 Clicking draws the parallelogram 3 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Polygon 1 Click the Polygon icon in the Screen Drawing dialog The following dialog is displayed Ba Geck Saz Pie Geoph Some e Tr ved Gina Sch Mad Tee Leg ba oe Te pes po olofa E Al meh a Goen and E NW Select the draw type Drag from the center to a Drag from the start point to corner the end point of one side LI Start point End point Select the desired options for Polygon O Paint 4 Frame Foreground Background Frame Color Tile and Line Type 2 Drag from the start point to the end point The specified polygon is drawn 3 10 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools L L Special Edit This option cannot be selected as default When a polygon has been placed double click it or click it and then click the Detail Prop Change icon The Prop Change dialog is displayed L Special Edit becomes active then When L Special Edit is unchecked ex regular pentagon The Prop Change dialog is set as the following ab J Lem Pa E de w Q O Z a SCH O o T Only enlarging or reducing is executable for the polygons When M Specia
243. ie Ll 2 Click MOV under Command 4 57 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 3 Select the desired number of words from WORD 1 word or DWORD 2 words Lier 3 Set FO F1 and F2 as necessary for the selected command 4 Clicking Next brings up the Line No dialog for the next line Clicking Preview brings up the Line No dialog for the previous line Clicking Insert inserts the data setting into the position before the selected line The corresponding dialog is also displayed 5 Clicking Delete deletes the selected line To close the Line No dialog click the top right x button of the dialog or the line number To bring up the Line No dialog again click a white line 4 58 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Useful Functions Copying Lines Click a line number as the copy source The Copy icon becomes active Click the icon fe fe La Uran Ier gen Gageg Tord Wirt ketd uar C i DL MO A a 1 Sc 7a ifs a erage ie om 1 ere Li Dim tS SD TOS se00007 WI 0002 00 10 08 AAA AAA mm mg gn pm em em e eg mg pm mm mm mm mm mm rg em ms Click a line number as the copy target Click the Paste icon The source data is co
244. ify to create Click OK GVP Select the desired part file and click Open APP3 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing 4 The Part Edit dialog is displayed Choose the part to be edited and click OK Click this button 5 The Part 0 Edit window for the selected part is displayed Cah cada lo CB Le oe t eS Pua e se a a ad 5 KE i fa Ss P F O a D 9 O 5 Sb o op F O Q O be O U o T D o 6 When an existing file is opened click the Screen List icon Double click the target box for registration The corresponding Part Edit window is displayed 7 To change a part for modification in the Part Edit window click the desired part icon The Part Edit dialog is displayed a mt fe lll aha E e Ee Specify the desired number and click OK The corresponding Part Edit window is displayed APP3 5 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing 8 Create apart See Editing Procedures for Each Part page APP3 7 e Outline Part Edit window New Part icon Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window Modify a part Icons edit menu options or right clicking menu options for the selected pa
245. ile and then Open The bitmap can be previewed in the dialog Ir free OM LT ie A For information on the setting items in the dialog see the next page 3 The bitmap size is indicated in the dialog Choose the desired number of colors from Color Type for Convert GV40 50 60 8 16 or 128 colors GV42 52 62 8 16 or 128 32000 colors 4 Click OK A mover tool and a dotted box of the bitmap size are displayed on the screen 5 Click the mouse in the position for placing the bitmap The bit map is pasted to the screen The same bitmap can be pasted repeatedly by clicking the mouse while the mover tool is displayed on the screen 7 14 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Note that the bitmap is pasted each time you click the mouse To cancel bitmap placement click the Select icon and clear the mover tool Io L When the size of a bitmap file is too large it is partitioned automatically and AS stored in several boxes when it is registered in pattern editing The capacity of patterns that can be registered in one box is 128 kB When changing the setting of O Use 3D Parts in the Environment Setting tab window of the Unit Setting dialog the pallet is changed and colors of the placed bitmap are also changed To reset paste the bitmap again TOD Bitmap Preview Dialog The following setting items are
246. iles see Chapter 4 Registration Items When tile No 0 is selected the area is painted in the color set for Foreground When a tile other than No 0 is selected the area is painted in the colors set for Foreground and Background No 0 No 3 Foreground Foreground color color Background color 3 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Selecting Line Styles Line styles can be selected for lines boxes and circles There are six line styles available Line Style No 8 ehainine EN Limitations on Line Styles e Line No 1 thick line cannot be used for the following items Continuous lines chamfered boxes parallelograms polygons circles of all kinds e Chamfered boxes can only be drawn with solid lines 3 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Drawing Methods Drawing methods of items are explained Line Clicking the Line icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Haire Shae ReGen Ses Tred bs Srok Nad Teel ed ee Pee pn w Q O Z a SCH O o T Single Line 1 Click the Single Line icon in the Screen Drawing dialog Select the desired options for Color and Line Style as well as the arrow type He ot She Pem
247. ing Memory of Selected Items Only Memory addresses of the selected screen items in the current editing file can be changed simultaneously Operation Procedure 1 Select the desired items for memory change 2 Select Change Memory from the Tool menu The sub menu is displayed Click Selected Item 3 The Change All Memory dialog is displayed 4 Check the numbered box Memory address selection becomes available 5 Choose Bit or Word Memory change is performed in units of bits or words as selected 6 Enter the first address of the memory addresses to be changed for Before Change Start Mem No Likewise enter the last address of the memory addresses to be changed for Before Change End Mem No 7 Enter the desired first address after change for After Change Start Mem No in the same manner 8 Click Option and set the items of which memory addresses should be changed For more information refer to the next section 9 Click Change The specified memory addresses are changed at one time O 24 LI Option Setting Click the Option button in the Change All Memory dialog The Change Item Select dialog shown below is displayed The following items are included O Compare Station No This option is valid when 1 n multi drop is selected for Connection Check this box to include port numbers of the PLCs for memory change O Compare CPU No Choose this option for setting the CPU n
248. ing dragged to place the text Dragging the mouse Releasing the mouse displays a box places the text y y y y y y y y y It is not possible to change the placed text When correcting the text delete it or o cancel it by the Undo icon 4 44 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Paint Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Foreground Select a color to be displayed by clicking U D 5 Background Select a color to be displayed by right clicking O Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is necessary For more information on transparent color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the Reference Manual Function Paint Command Usage 1 Select a foreground color and a background color 2 In the Pattern Edit window click the mouse The enclosed area is painted in the color for Foreground 4 45
249. ings to place a trend graph in which sampling data in memory specified as desired DT200 and DT201 will be expressed by two lines at one second intervals DT200 Max100 Min 0 E Max100 Min 0 S DT200 60 DT201 i DI a E Min 0 S K E O D a x lt DI 3 2 OD LI 9 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard Setting Procedure 1 In the Wizard dialog select Trend Display from the parts list and click the OK button 2 Data in the desired memory addresses should be sampled at regular intervals Select Store the values from specified addresses into the buffering area in Monitouch and display the area as line graphs Trend sampling corps coer ee guar d Em m e ame Ge ler keete AS ee ge y Trend sampling Trend sampling function in the sampling mode is established on completion of setting Click the Next button 9 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard 3 Four types of graphs are previewed Pull down menu Select a color as desired Click the desired type from the four The upper right type is selected in this example The selected type is enclosed in a red frame Click the Next button 4 The selected display image is displayed oe i Tess E raren hiar kloe eee
250. ion Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Print Ex Graphic Library OVAN Werldd DATE 2009417 TIME 10 20 30 Cross reference Be Leo PLC MTS RET OP le oT File mir ih data ing CO Palay uird eee y es ce Libary opp pase arah rape When Animation is Checked AVAN verigi DT FOOS fed Tom 10 20 30 Se ecte PLO IRMSESISIITIA bet ls Conant PQ le gme i gata Eng rrr Arnim lamn Eran TFU nim aticn ds i me D U O O OD o Cc OD 6 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Print M EMO Please use this page freely 6 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net AE Useful Techniques EEN 7 1 O Menu E 7 1 Funcion 1 Deene 7 2 Function 2 Memory Use nenene 7 4 Function 3 Memory Address Use cceeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 5 Function 4 Change Memory c eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 7 Function 5 Copy Image to Pattern 0aaanaeaaaananaaea 7 10 Function 6 Copy Image to Clip Board 7 12 Function 7 Paste Btmap AAA 7 14 Function 8 DXF File Convert nee 7 17 Function 9 Convert to Rich Text Fommat 7 19 Function 10 Add Video Men 7 21 Function 11 Custom Hart 7 21 PACO 12 Tay errors ac cidos 7 2
251. ion Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Starting up and Closing Starting Up the Simulator from GVWIN 1 Use GVWIN to open the screen data file that will be tested with the Simulator 2 Click the Start Simulator icon or go to the File menu and click on Start Simulator The simulator will start with the SIM files which are automatically displayed Ela Edi ege e Fe Te tun Ga W ETS eer ii bok cy Dior Parra irg FEI R I Ce or Starting Up the Simulator from Windows Menu 1 Click in the order of Start Programs GVWIN and Simulator 2 The simulator initial screen is displayed 8 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Or double click the simulator program icon to open a simulator file GV Ki 3 Sora lator Closing a Simulator File 1 Click Exit in the File menu of the Simulator or the Close button Ele Wen Dress He e or 2 The file is closed When the file has been modified a message as to whether the file is to be saved appears Starting and Stopping Communication Starting Communication with the GV Series Click the Start Simulator icon or go to the File menu of the GVWIN editor and click on Start Simulator The communication is automatically star
252. ion Items Registered messages can be divided into groups and registered in page blocks Page blocks are used in the relay sub mode parts or the message mode parts Page Block Structure A maximum of 1 024 page blocks can be registered One page block can contain 256 lines Message Message group No 3 No 0 Control box emergency stop No 1 No 2 EMERGENCY STOP button is N j 3 pressed on the control box o Reset the button No 4 No 5 No 6 Operation box emergency stop No 7 Mo g EMERGENCY STOP button is N 9 pressed on the operation box a Reset the button No 10 No 11 Calling a Page Block Select Page Block from the Item m displayed ben Sein Seira Lade Libras H uas uss Dhak Hpg Fatir Mago Block Leesch Bl ica Green Block Ti Ea Chey 16 Ca Char Jl i ai CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email IH ja Page block Block No 0 Control box emergency stop EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed on the control box Reset the button EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed on the operation box Reset the button A maximum of 1 024 blocks can be registered enu The Page Block Edit window is F oje R ua be Ds ee Baies Ff Sg BR A j f E Sa Se E a 4 61 info ctiautomation net Sp O D Y O O 22 Chapter 4 Registration Ite
253. ipren Far ran r A For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 2 Overlap in the Reference Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button brings up the Overlap List window Select the desired part and click Select The previous Overlap Normal dialog is displayed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button Overlap coordinates X Y 0 0 is the reference point X and Y coordinates are at intervals of 4 dots and 1 dot respectively ZE 2 34 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Editing in Overlap When placing items such as switch parts or graphics change over the editing layer from the base to an overlap 1 Right click the mouse The menu is displayed Select Overlap O or 1 or 2 The editing layer is now changed from the base to an overlap Icons for drawing and parts except for overlap become active che Cotes FF pis Zhe i ord fara Fee tad Ty E e o Sai a H D O D 3 D D o LU d Gi 2 Place desired parts or graphics on the overlap When an overlap is selected as the editing layer the overlap cannot be moved or enlarged reduced To allow these operations select Base from the right click menu Ioc v Editing Layer h When creating a screen the target to be edited is one of four layers consisting of the
254. irect blocks can be registered One direct block can contain 256 lines Message _ Direct block Message group No 2 LI D O Y O O No 0 GV No 1 General specifications No 2 Item No 3 Contents No 4 Hardware specifications No 5 nputpower AC 85 235 No 6 Display color 16 colors Block No 0 No 7 Display area 640 X 480 dots No 1 No 8 FUNC switch 8 pcs No 9 Switch Wea Wun No 9 Switch H24 x W40 No 6 Display color 16 colors No 22 Comm port RS232C RS422 No 5 Input power AC 85 235 No 21 Printer port 1 port No 22 Comm port RS232C RS422 A maximum of 1 024 blocks can be registered 4 65 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Calling a Direct Block Select Direct Block from the Item menu The Direct Block Block Specify dialog is displayed Org Grapes Liar H kal Mgrraga lime ra ech Moca ET Geen e De Cum eae Frage Bac oe gren e gt raza o besa Y moja C oen 7 OA Check the desired block number range and click OK The Direct Block Edit window is displayed Direct Block Editing Follow the procedure below 1 Click the block No 0 line indicating No Setting Do Pe Lo aie Ier been ir Ind Wes m O a HM SECH CW 7 Ho atti fa oo oe Ko Setting Ho Settio ua SL k Lig Ha Setti
255. is displayed t amii Ge Bring up the screen to be displayed on the list and double click on the screen The Screen Edit window of the selected screen is displayed Note that the previous Screen Edit window and the Screen List window remain open To check the edit windows currently opened on the editor click the Window menu Clicking the edit window name moves the window to the front 0D A E Sek LETS 1 23 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net UY Di H O O O D Di G O 5 O a Dy OD m o besch O em Chapter 1 Basic Operation Dragging on the Screen List Window Align the previous Screen Edit window and the Screen List window in tiles or cascades ail 1 e dE d Select the screen to be called on the Screen List window and drag the screen to the previous Screen Edit window Releasing the mouse brings up the Screen Edit window of the dragged screen Te ms y m M mm emm o E pee pp IW EILER Drag 1 24 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Calling from the Item Menu Screens can be called from the Item menu Select Screen from the Item menu The Screen dialog is displayed Specify the desired number and click OK The Scre
256. is displayed Communication Parameter Setting Read Area and Write Area These options are necessary for the GV series to display the specified screen or confirm the currently displayed screen Each area is provided with 3 words as default Check that the memory addresses for these areas are not already in use Ly For more information on the three words each given to the read area and the write area see Chapter 1 System Setting in the Reference Manual Function Baud Rate Signal Level Parity Stop Bit etc Set these options in accordance with the corresponding PLC data A For more information on the communication parameters see the GV42 52 62 Hardware Manual Other Settings Before data transfer to the GV series check the following settings as well A For more information see Chapter 1 System Setting in the Reference Manual Function GV Series Setting Make settings for memory expansion backlight touch switch type etc Font Setting Set the font type to be displayed on the GV series Modular Jack Make settings for the use of the modular jack MJ1 MJ2 Printer Setting Make settings for the printer its model etc connected to the GV series 5 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Screen Data Transfer There are some differences in preliminaries before screen data transfer as wel
257. is menu Multi Copy Pastes the selected item multiple times For more information see page 1 35 Move to Front Moves the selected item to the front When two or more parts or graphics are overlapping select the item that you would like to move to the front and click this menu Move to Back Moves a part or graphic to the back when two or more parts or graphics are overlapping Group Groups the selected items Select multiple items at the same time and click this menu Ungroup 1 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Ungroups the selected group Select the grouped item and click this menu Rotate Graphic For more information see Rotate Graphic page 1 38 Flip For more information see Flip page 1 39 Align For more information see Align page 1 39 Table Data Display Editing Brings up the menu for table data display editing while a cell cells in a table data display part is are selected For more information see Chapter 2 Screens Modify Part Brings up the Modify Part window Select a part placed on the screen and click this menu Modify the part as desired For more information see Appendix 3 Part Editing 0 LA O O O D o O 5 O a Eck Dy D m Q O wa Detail Setting Used for property modification Select an i
258. is option is available with memory setting when macro commands are used For more information see Chapter 13 Macro in the Reference Manual Function 3 When Memory Card is selected Select this option when using the memory card as the memory For more information see Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode in the Reference Manual Function Firre lege paa li File No Record No Set these numbers when Memory Card is selected For more information on the memory card see Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode in the Reference Manual Function 1 20 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation 4 When Constant is selected Select this option when specifying a constant instead of a memory address Depending on the item this option may not be selected OU LA O O O D o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O wa DEC DEC OCT HEX FLOAT These options become active when Constant is chosen DEC decimal with sign DEC decimal without sign OCT octal HEX hexadecimal FLOAT floating point when real numbers are used 5 I O Memory Select this option when using I O communications 6 Temp Mem PLC2 Memory Select this option when using the temperature control network or PLC2Way function For more information see the Hardware Manual z Va JE d D Asl Qu Sau KE TOO
259. it message display parts e Key Pad Choosing this command allows you to edit keypad parts e Bar Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit bar graph parts e Pie Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit pie graph parts e Panel Meter Choosing this command allows you to edit panel meter parts e Stat Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit statistic graph bar parts APP3 39 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing e Stat Pie Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit statistic graph pie parts e Trend Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit trend graph parts e Data Sampling Disp Area Choosing this command allows you to edit display area parts for data sampling e Calendar Choosing this command allows you to edit calendar parts e Display Area Choosing this command allows you to edit display area parts e Closed Area Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit closed area graph parts Item Menu e PLC Type Specify the PLC model for the screen data file when using a part file in the screen data file e Edit Model Selection Specify the model of GV for the screen data file when using a part file in the screen data file e Use Gothic Font Select this option when creating a part using the Gothic font APP3 40 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412
260. ition 4 15 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Main Tab Window Parameter Setting for Data Display Two kinds of parameters are provided for data display e For value change Specify a value for Parameter This number designates the order of memory address allocated for value change on the data display e For movement Click a data display placed in the graphic library Click the Parameter icon on the drawing tool bar The Parameter Setting dialog is displayed Make necessary settings in the dialog Panel Sabin ate 4 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Char Prop Tab Window The contents of the window are the same as for the data display on screens ive m Ges res Peri pe beet See Pa Deh Seake Ame uge Tekh Date Dags Pe ba Tike Enee T 3 ira TZ Fuatas As WT Er being HEI TT Kr Rolala TE DO Tia T lie Teertge Ion E Hrs To MU Ben C ria Graphic Library Environment Setting D a Sb O O E e Q ZA lt Environment setting for the graphic library is also started from Display Environment in the Display menu as performed for screen editing Therefore this section explains the settings that are dif
261. itten to STORE PROFILE 0 1 Do not use the XON XOFF flow control 2 This command is required when you turn off the modem power after AT command setting If the settings for your modem are the same as the above select the commands below from the pull down menu and send the AT commands Receive GV series side AT BO E1 QO V1 amp DO amp KO SO 1 Send computer side AT BO E1 Q0 V1 amp D2 amp KO OK appears when the commands have been transferred normally 7 Turning the modem power off deletes the transferred commands Therefore select AT amp WO from the pull down menu and send it OK appears when the commands have been transferred normally 5 27 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer 8 If the settings for your modem differ delete the written AT commands and directly enter the AT commands written in your modem s manual Send the AT commands Zeg Pet Am 9 Enter AT command directly into this field 5 28 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer GV Series Setting Set a baud rate between the GV series and the modem 1 On the Main Menu local main screen press Editor MJ1 The Extended Function Setting screen is displayed 2 Select the desired baud rate for Modem Comm Baud Rate using
262. itting 1 Click Quit Application in the File menu or the Close button JJ Y D z O o el O gt O KSE ay F or ar Dd a ee a Ir 2 The screen is closed If the file has not been saved after changes the following dialog appears and asks whether or not to save the data Click either Yes or No to quit the editor 1 5 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Basic Operation of the Editor This section explains names and operations of bars and menus that are displayed when a screen data file is opened on the GVWIN editor Names of Components The following bars are displayed when the screen edit window is opened Title bar Ze Menu bar Ss Se Ggs Ik Ee Pen anio ri le Icon bar E SCC Ee TACA a he ot 7 EN Pe dl E E E E AAA IN Sg Te Omadi a DE h A Bas pos LAL E Tl O e NIP oe Aes Pr E al LA EA PA LANE Lal Tool bar Status bar i ml Title Bar The title bar contains the following information Product name File name Model name PHI Ka ZEITUNG RA SEO Se Ee E i ZS kb TA d jj ii am om To minimize the indication on the title bar click Property in the File menu and put a check mark M to O Shorten the Title Display on the Environment tab window The title bar shows the minimum info
263. ity Y 2 Copies are placed as shown below X 20 dots Copy source Y 10 dots Pitch X Distance 60 Y Distance 20 Quantity X 2 Quantity Y 2 Copies are placed as shown below X 60 dots Y 20 dots BEE source Order INC This setting is effective when using a data display part as the copy source To increment the selection order number of each copied part check this option M e Step Specify the increment when increasing the selection order number of each copied part Display Order INC This setting is effective when using a switch lamp function mode part as the copy source To increment the display order number of each copied part check this option M e Step Specify the increment when increasing the display order number of each copied part 1 36 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Memory INC This setting is effective when using a switch lamp or data part as the copy source Specify the top memory address for the copy source Memory addresses are allocated for the number of copies Memory and Step become active Memory Specify the top memory address of the copy source e Step Specify the increment in words or bits when increasing the memory address consecutively When 1 is entered the allocated addresses are incremented by one word or bit When 2 i
264. k tab window in the Calendar dialog and uncheck Display M Display gt O Display Note that if you select SUN day of the week display handles are displayed and select Delete from the Edit menu the calendar part is deleted 2 Even if you delete the day of the week display its area and punctuation marks will remain intact Use the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon to standardize the areas or delete punctuation like e o a H D O D 3 D D o LU r Gi y How to Enlarge a Calendar Part h Click a calendar part and drag the handles YY MM DD hh mm ss SUN are enlarged but the punctuation marks and for example are not To enlarge punctuation marks use the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon mmm _ 2 Sah one AA g Gamba je EE EA Ee EEES Y Ana Ss SC TA EPA Lek Not enlarged 2 53 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Memo Pad Clicking the Memo Pad icon brings up the following tool bar Sek Part ana 9 identical to the relay sub mode tool bar For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 12 Memo Pao in the Reference Manual Function Macro and Interval Timer Clicking the Macro Mode i
265. l as in procedure for data transfer from the screen editor software depending on the transfer method Preliminaries GV42 52 62 y For a New GV Series Just after being unpacked When a new GV series unit is first turned on after being unpacked the following screen is displayed GV40 50 60 E e F3 Fa Kd Ki A new GV series unit stores the data below A GV series system program ref page 5 18 B Fontdata Japanese 32 ref page 5 19 C I F driver universal serial ref page 5 17 At the time of screen data transfer from the editor software computer to the GV series If the editor software has a GV series system program containing functions that are not supported by the GV series the computer transfers the system program as well to the GV series Otherwise the program Is not updated If the screen data contains any font data other than Japanese 32 the computer transfers the font data as well to the GV series If any option other than universal serial is set for the I F driver in the screen data the computer transfers the I F driver file as well to the GV series 9 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 0 O E D D OU D SI 3 7 d Chapter 5 Transfer For a GV Series Being put to use When screen data has been transferred to a GV series unit that has already been put to use not jus
266. l info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Message Editing Messages are entered in the same way as characters in graphics Ki To shift to the next group click the Next icon on the icon bar Copying and Pasting Messages Specify messages as the copy source by dragging the mouse The messages are highlighted Gm Ta ete ke Stem tating Je inet Cee oes B keg Y Sep m S atte 23 eg 1 lt 2 La Ma a i e i a E bel CH CZ D E terrane 0 E di To select all messages in the group select Select All from the right click v menu 4 31 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 2 Select Copy from the Edit menu or the right click menu or click the Copy icon on the edit tool bar The messages are copied to the Windows clipboard fr Da Gente Je mmm rgeg Joe wee O Cee ogee BR O A a A zt A i KI KI OB i y ili A r a EN oe oe O a i Y terrane Ede 3 Move the cursor to the copy target position Select Paste from the Edit menu or the right click menu or click the Paste icon on the edit tool bar The specified messages are copied to the position Fa ba mn Wer beer iiey St AC He CO W erran HEj Ean y The Paste command inserts messages into the specified position so that the AS following lines move down accordingly 4 32 CTi Autom
267. l Edit is checked ex regular pentagon The Prop Change dialog is set as the following Siname By clicking the pentagon handles are shown at its corners When the drawing method icon on the right is clicked dragging one handle allows the pentagon to rotate At this time the corner on the right of the dragged handle becomes the base for rotation aC A Polygon E P fe Rotating is possible A B E Drag this 3 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Circle Clicking the Circle icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below He Get Sie Petite Tred Gis Sea Null Teel O f es Dk Ire pes fo E aeaea ejoju Fai F Circle 1 Click the Circle icon in the Screen Drawing dialog Select the draw type er Drag from the center for the radius L Start point End point Drag from one side to the other for the diameter LI Start point End point is drawn Si Drag from the start point to the end point of the box where an inscribed circle E L Start point 4 End point Select the desired options for O Paint O Frame Foreground Background Frame Color Tile and Line Type 2 Drag from the start point to the end point A circle is drawn 3 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Em
268. l memory s cannot be saved loc 8 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Changing the Display on a Sheet In an automatically created SIM file s or SIM file s created from an SIV file memory set for different items is jumbled together on one sheet It is possible to display this jumbled memory on a personal computer according to such classifications as item type function etc 1 Go to the View menu and click on Display Sheet 4 menu items will be displayed yo ative Hp Maniki odia d ien Tei Sale fis Hee veer dsp irie y a Doria 34 i EFt imaymi Vtt S Deeg sp b deren st Es Dais r i pni d lem ZZ E d ile 2 Click on your preference Only the filtered results will be displayed on your personal computer 3 You can perform the same operation by clicking on the tool bar icons Silo All Display Select Item Display Word Bit It is possible to combine Word or Bit and Comment Display KN 8 13 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Hi 3 Q Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Creating a New SIM File The procedure for creating a new SIM file is described below When a new file is created you can set the memory that is displayed on the sheet as you wish You can
269. layed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button 2 49 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Trend Graph Clicking the Trend Graph icon brings up the Trend Graph dialog S Sir a E ee j i Fer Keiers A For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 8 Graph Display in the Reference Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button brings up the parts list Select the desired part and click Select The previous dialog is displayed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button Graphic Mode and Graphic Relay Mode Clicking the Graphic Mode or Graphic Relay Mode icon brings up the corresponding tool bar identical to the relay sub mode tool bar IT For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the Reference Manual Function 2 50 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Sampling Clicking a sampling icon brings up its tool bar as the following E E be E A 1 2 3 4 5 ca PP BOs Bou GHG Ho dos Count display Up down Sampling Delete Time display switch display area Detail
270. ld in the Text tab window Seen Oe red Ha bach ii Pema fee dbe Hu tee Leg Bn o Ta pes Do phan Propi ads OFF Gig E Fuma EH T br SE Gs DEE TT REEL es Bag hara 2 1 Miami all aeni fear KZ end 18 T Dod M Sg Only one line of text can be imported A paragraph delimited with a return a line break in the text file is regarded as one text on the editor 10D Placing Text 1 Enter the desired text in the text field and set text properties enlargement etc 2 Dragging the mouse on the screen draws a dotted frame of the same size as the text to be placed 3 Release the mouse being dragged in the desired position The text is shown in the position Release the mouse l 8 Text is shown in the released position Clicking or dragging the mouse again places the same text on the screen To cancel text placement close the Screen Drawing dialog or click the Select icon oa 3 22 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Pattern This command is used when placing a pattern registered in the pattern edit area on the screen ng For pattern registration and pattern edit area see Chapter 4 Registration Items Clicking the Pattern icon brings up the following pattern list window w Q O Z 2 SCH O o T Placing Patterns 1 In the
271. le A dotted box and a mover tool appear Click the mover tool in the desired position A new switch part is placed in the window 4 Create the ON and OFF displays of the switch as explained in Editing Switch Lamp Parts steps 6 to 14 on page APP3 10 5 After editing the switch close the Modify Part window The former edit window is displayed EE Enter the numeral 0 for the switch in gt the Character tab window of the Switch dialog 6 Create additional switches for a keypad Follow steps 3 to 5 Ei SS uh es APP3 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing L Characters on a Keypad x When Text Num is selected from the switch function pull down menu enter characters numerals for the switches in the Character tab window of the Switch dialog When a switch is pressed the character or numeral of the switch is recognized Characters numerals registered in the graphic library can also be used for switches in screen editing See Chapter 7 Entry Mode in the Reference Manual Function In this case however the character or numeral is not recognized when a switch is pressed L Multiple Copies Xx When creating a keypad consisting of the same shape switches create one switch and copy it using the multi copy function Then set their functions and characters numerals in the Switc
272. limit of the graph area by 1 dot and set the position again When confirming the paint start position open the Detail tab window in the Display Environment dialog from the Display menu and uncheck M Paint Dsp Click OK The paint start position is indicated with x If a closed area graphic does not have a vertex in the vertical direction from the paint start position the graphic cannot be painted correctly See the figures shown below Ex There is not a vertex in this position Direction Direction This area IC cannot be painted Paint start position lt 6 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part See the figures shown below gt 7 Close the Modify Part window Closed Area Graph Part Edit window 8 The former edit window is displayed The modified closed area graph part appears in the window APP3 28 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Editing Display Area Parts for Data Sampling Display area parts for data sampling are required for data sampling in the sampling mode A display area part for data sampling consists of a basic part D tt area graphic data and data display Data display Graphic data ro eee Basic part area Part area This data display differs from
273. lly Created SIM Files An automatically created SIM file is saved temporarily in TEMP The following file names are attached to these SIM files The memory data for items set on each Scrn0010 sim screen is saved here Screen number The memory data for items set on each a Mlib0010 sim multi overlap is saved here Multi overlap number The memory data for normal overlaps ScrnOv00100 sim within each screen is saved here Screen number Overlap number Joye Nwis The memory data for data display set on Dtblk0010 sim each block is saved here Data block number The memory data for data display set on Tyo00 10 sim each data sheet is saved here Data sheet number The memory data for the system memory System GITT of the screen data file is saved here The memory data for the buffering area Buffer si m is saved here y When SIM files are automatically created all the SIM files in the ATEMP folder are deleted If you have created a SIM file do not save it in the ATEMP folder 8 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Memo If you close a sheet mistakenly go to the File menu to Open and choose the SIM file that you wish to re open from the directory displayed Sheet Configuration Test sheet SIM file configuration is as follows This example includes the format dis
274. m copy paste operation 1 Click the original item to be copied 2 Hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and drag the item to the desired position Hold down the Ctrl key and drag The same effect as copy 8 paste operation 3 The copied item is placed 1 30 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Zooming In Out The edit window is displayed at 100 zoom as default The display size can be changed by selecting Zoom from the Display menu Hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and right drag the mouse on the screen A red dotted line box is displayed When the mouse is released the area in the red dotted line box is zoomed in Hold down the Ctrl key and right drag Releasing the mouse zooms A red dotted line box is displayed in the enclosed area The zoom varies depending on the enclosed area size OU LA O O O D o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O wa Pressing the Home key on the keyboard resets the zoom to 100 LA In addition Xx Ctrl key Page Up gt Zoom Out Ctrl key Page Down Zoom In The above shortcut keys can also be used for zooming 1 31 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Right clicking Menu Right clicking a mouse brings up
275. mation 4 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Used for graphic call drawing tool graphic mode graphic relay mode parts etc Used for multi overlaps parts Used for data block areas parts Used for relay mode message mode bit sampling alarm displays parts Used for patterns drawing tool Used by CALL commands in macro programs or macro mode parts Used for relay sub mode or message mode parts Used for relay sub mode or message mode parts Used for relay mode parts Used for drawing Used for data sheets Used for screens and overlaps Used for changing the language used on the screen Used for animation only for the GV series except for GV42C Page 4 3 Page 4 4 Page 4 20 Page 4 25 Page 4 28 Page 4 37 Page 4 55 Page 4 61 Page 4 65 Page 4 69 Page 4 72 Page 4 75 Page 4 80 Page 4 84 Page 4 85 Chapter 4 Registration Items Screen A screen is an editing window to be opened at start up of the editor software Calling a Screen To go to a different screen from the current screen or while a different registration item window is opened select Screen from the Item menu para een Setra ar a Craps Libras H kH Guta Block H peaga Eikii H et Block yee Aleck Gees Block Tie En hale La Char H Deel san Cone LU CH D D o A a The
276. mation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Click the Parts Select button The Switch List window is displayed Sp lt D n o V D O D D i 1 Parts File Use this button to call up a different parts file The Std G2p file is chosen as default Click the Parts File button The Select Parts File dialog is displayed Choose the desired file and click Open SE mmm as The file is opened na For opening a 3D parts list or placing 3D parts see Appendix2 3D Parts 2 Select By clicking a part in the Switch List its number is highlighted in red Click the Select button The part is shown in the Switch dialog 3 Cancel Clicking the Cancel button closes the parts file and brings up the Switch dialog 4 JUMP Clicking this button brings up the dialog to specify a part number Specify the desired part number and click OK The part is selected 2 23 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens 5 lt gt Click either button to scroll up down the Switch List window 6 M Save Setting When this box is checked part change is possible while the dialog data is saved Thus dialog settings such as memory address or display type do not revert to the default Whe
277. mation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts 5 3D parts are displayed in the Switch List window mirk oe gee A a AAN T eee rl JUMP lt gt These buttons scroll up down the parts list Parts File Click this button when selecting another parts file Select Click this button to select a switch part Display Pattern This setting is active only when a switch or lamp part is selected The displays of the OFF ON and P3 to P8 patterns can be shown Select the desired switch part and click Select The selected part is previewed in the Switch dialog The above step completes a part selection Ly For other settings such as memory see the Reference Manual Function APP2 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts Numerical Data Display Character Display Message Display Bar Graph Pie Graph Panel Meter Statistic Graph Closed Area Graph and Calendar Parts This section explains the procedure for setting 3D numerical data display parts Also follow the same procedure when placing the other parts 1 Click the Num Data Display icon Oo J U an 2 The Num Display dialog is displayed Click the Parts Select button 3 The Num Display List window is displayed When the desired 3D parts file is already displayed go to step 5 Click the Parts File but
278. mode graphics can be displayed provided that Internal is chosen for Command See Chapter 7 Entry Mode for more information on the entry mode and to Chapter 9 Graphic Display for the graphic mode in the Reference Manual Function O Data Block Dsp This option is active when the data block area is set on the screen The initial block number is indicated on the screen provided that Internal is chosen for Command For more information on the data block area see Chapter 7 Entry Mode in the Reference Manual Function 2 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net O Le D a o Sg O 5 o 3 lt O 5 3 D 3 F U D 5 O Chapter 2 Screens O Display Path of Animation This option is active when animation setting is made When the path of animated graphics should be depicted check this box For more information on animation see Chapter 17 Animation in the Reference Manual Function O Base Screen Den This option is active during editing of graphic library multi overlap or data block When a screen or multi overlap should be displayed in editing check this box Menu Dsp Tab Window near rr mg a brad emilee a Irrel i DB mi big io Er HL Dep cole ae SD EE gr M Offset Mark Dsp This option is active during editing of graphic library or data block Choose whether or not to
279. mory on the Simulator screen 8 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Operation Procedure Creating SIM File s Automatically Refer to the following flowchart for the procedure of starting up both GVWIN and the Simulator creating SIM file s based on the currently open screen data file and then performing a test SIM files are always kept in their most recent statuses as determined by screen transfer or update of screen data It is not possible to save SIM file s due to the fact that it is automatically updated each time it is started up Open screen data on GVWIN Transfer screen data from the GVWIN editor to the GV series Transferring screen data and the I F driver page 8 4 Connecting a personal computer with the GV seriespage 8 5 Start up the Simulator Starting up the Simulator from GVWIN Start Simulator communication Starting communication with the GV series Use the SIM file to perform a test Testing bit memory Testing word memory Stop Simulator communication Stopping communication with the GV series 8 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Creating a New SIM File The procedure for creating a new SIM file and then performing a test is shown below The SIM file name memory
280. ms Page Block Editing The Page Block Edit window consists of one window as shown below Follow the procedure below 1 Click the block No 0 cell under Group No Setting is shown in the cell as default 2 The dialog now shows as the following Specify a group number for Group and message line numbers respectively for Start and End Enter numbers using the arrow buttons or through the keyboard 4 62 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 3 To check the contents of the messages click the Reference button The corresponding Message Edit window is displayed Z b phe ke ie je lp a ECK O DZ E CH Rp ez inane Soest cn Ska ja Pei A Z re AN MAREAS Lag 4 Perform the same steps for editing block No 1 and after y90 g abed Copying and Pasting or Deleting Page Blocks Follow the procedure below to copy and paste or delete page blocks 1 Click the block number to be copied or deleted 2 The clicked line is highlighted entirely Select Copy or Delete from the Edit menu E e pe g ee s Je fr Jl in BE ae STA ones E A ap AS Ia AA 2 ie id Ra a8l Ki These commands can also be selected from the right click menu y To select multiple block numbers at one time hold down the Shift key and click AS top and bottom block numbers 4 63 CTi Automation Phone
281. munication For the GV with Ethernet communication the simulation via Ethernet is not possible however it is possible with serial communication using the AIGV8103 cable TE e By starting up GVWIN and the simulator simultaneously on a computer either software can be operated independently by switching the active window The operations of the parts placed on the screen can be checked just between the computer and the GV series Therefore both screen creation and debugging become possible on one computer and time can be saved A test sheet based on GV40 50 60 screen data memory called an SIM file is created on each screen One SIM file is created for each screen Additionally an SIM file can be created based on the memory addresses of any edit screen system setting normal overlap multi overlap data block or data sheet Composition Hi 3 Q The Simulator is automatically installed when screen creation software GVWIN is installed Operation Procedure Possible Simulation e Automatically create SIM files based on the screen data file currently open on your personal computer and perform a test See page 8 2 This is used when the Simulator is started up from the GVWIN editor The SIM file created cannot be saved e Create a new SIM file and perform a test See page 8 3 An SIM file can be created freely The SIM file created can be saved y SIM File A memory file used to read and write PLC me
282. n pr 2 40 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button y Message Display Parts x When placing a graphic such as a frame behind a message display part the use of Modify Part from the Edit menu or the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon is recommended The background should be sized so that it can display the longest message IT For registering a part background see Appendix 3 Part Editing Table Data Display Part Table data display parts are not included in parts files They are placed by setting the corresponding dialog e o a H D O D 3 D D o LU r Gi Click the Table Data Display icon on the tool bar The Table Data Display dialog is displayed an EE ee E WOE Tinm Ae In fi Lrs br Cat ka H Bes L e m nice REETZ E ME Lens A EES gr i ES a HE Cd H bat ri E EL LS Een D el GC DR For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 5 Data Display in the Reference Manual Function Clicking OK brings up a dotted box and a mover tool cross cursor Click it in the desired position The table data display part is placed L To bring up the Table Data Display dialog again double click the placed part or click the h Detail Prop Change i
283. n Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques O Ignore Measure Line Choose whether or not the dimension lines in DXF file are ignored O Monochrome Reverse Display Color Choose whether or not inverting to black on white is executed When a file is imported into the GVWIN editor white on black or some other color line is used for display as default O Ignore Particular Layer Choose whether or not layers not to be converted are specified Specify the names of such layers instead of their numbers Graphic Library No O Specify When blocks are used in a DXF file choose whether or not they are registered in the graphic library After setting click OK Function 9 Convert to Rich Text Format The contents of the screen data can be converted to the Rich Text file with extensions RTF as the same image as printing This function makes it possible to check the screen setting or the image picture without using paper Finally only the necessary data can be printed out through a word processor application software on a personal computer AA ai ros I ae SOL d ELL META Glink se mu P eke lef Erlet Emr p iHa ip er af HE seer bt dis Ember Liber eer lta ES Br ot T f ELE Sacre Ber pa MT ihe roe Le ai Plt Eee Eel Tose LEA japar ieee Papen Calero gt bessi 7 19 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 2
284. n Division No Error occurring position 7 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques L Difference between Error and Warning AS E denotes an error If you attempt to transfer data indicated with E to GV Data has some error is displayed and data cannot be transferred correctly Be sure to transfer data without any error W denotes a warning This is a moderate error that is detected due to discrepancy in setting but does not cause any problem in operation on GV Checking Method for Details To check the details of the error or warning double click the line or click the line right click the mouse and select Detail from the menu The Error Check dialog shown below is displayed kl a ccoo See Anite ile L Kette CW DIV D iScrte n Ho Bett E U Huf er E Tei teh Dei a Ap CS a Gm desa Pal ton sora il Bese 2 EUC En Double click hes Mes Dl ai Lair Lite dr i ee pl Le LA Cred Fe REg ad A e mg di CARE E I From the right click menu 4 O LI Right click Menu VIEW It is possible to jump to the error occurring position Detail Refer to the explanation above Latest Information The latest error information is displayed Error Restoration This item is valid for some kinds of err
285. n H Rau ltd Overlap ii Data Black D Mies e eg H FITER A micri Bock I Fage Alark TE lrect Alack Scream lack D Cata Sheet Page i cra Lib D fni mian Frame te Graphic Lib H D Graphite Lib 1 D AE Lib d D E Lib 3 D dra Lib 4 D druipghie Lib D fraphic Lib 6 D raphis Lib F D K nedh Lib E D Graphic Lib Y D Ire Char 1h D Ex Char 32 1 Teta Bytes 3085667 5775160 byta Pear eee When Use Cross reference is Checked Ex Messages CURA Werth DATE 0038417 time 16 20 30 te lerta PLO RTT EET Fi Cee File sume th yata Eng dl FR Heeeage Groep D Graup Ha D Gem Berle m0015 Rican Ena lea Enlays m00151 Loud Midi Errar Cua fom Eplay ADODI YJ Mo FOH Jean kelay DUNS Morria Absorption Check Ema Les dem Relay MERILA wack Deti Enw Lee See Pelay m00155 ag Core Eran Stop E Hea Eelay m001 5S Sub Costra Ey Sle om Tum Eplay ADA Faria Unfaslered Dm le Cum Bem kelay MODE Mo Toll Les Fem Belay Bibi Dotaom Tool L ss Belay Wii Tee Dock Liss Enlay MODE Lire isscmpitrn Eiai Las Leen Ee lay SOOT ora Parts Heeeng on rey Lisch kelay mb014 Tray Rear Dear Cipened L ss Relay MERIH Mp Troy Pilate LSe kulay MODIS Tray Fate Leg Opened d 16 Ee lan motes ss Fem Rela MEDIS Cam hem kelay MODE Las Loe EP lay BODIE LJ s Use Eelays BOD SS Part Pads mp ol peat hy rat Cross reference 6 10 CTi Automat
286. n available on screens lt OD n ge a O D Under line This command is checked as default Only the registered messages are underlined For registered messages containing spaces etc this command can be used when counting the number of characters in the messages iipie ji Dpi Dei y Toad Ea m0 Jugen Wi io Pen Eat e Lies Re Tipis E reve ronnie Display Environment Selecting this command bring up the Display Environment dialog This setting is valid only when the language selection function is in use IT For more information on the function see Chapter 29 Language Selection in the Reference Manual Function 4 35 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Display Change This command is valid only when alarm display in the sampling function is in use Selecting this command switches the display as the following Ip te Drees ren A a eee Loi Wer Tae oe E Lees Y 1 a E i s pa e AFA i ie EEE AA SCH SE 2 IS Saal En ER m j Sea Ind F Hal Ip D BE IS ges IZ mar EE e ma EFE a Ces OT SA ii e na g D e Dia be DIN obs ei Le H Te DI The commands below are added to the Display menu No cidos In umd Le y When this command is selected line EN J numbers are displayed films De Relay No pi pica When this command is
287. n the inner and outer radii must be 16 dots or more To Trend Graph Trend Sampling Editing Procedure The part registered in this section is used for trend graphs and also for display area parts for trend sampling mode Trend Graph Part Edit window 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 2 Click the New Part icon A dotted box and a mover tool appear 3 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new graph part is placed gt 4 Double click the part The Trend Graph dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window TOD 5 Select the trend graph part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon APP3 24 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Modify Part window 6 The Modify Part window for the trend graph part is displayed Edit the part or change its size 7 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part 8 Close the Modify Part window Attach scales to the outside of the graph part The frame automatically fits the graph with scales in size m Q J O O O D o pmj D O m D O 5
288. n this box is unchecked the dialog data reverts to the default If a switch or lamp part is changed from 2 notch OFF ON type to 3 notch OFF ON P3 to P8 make sure to uncheck O Save Setting before selecting the 3 notch type Io 7 Display Pattern This setting is active only when a switch or lamp part is selected The displays of the OFF ON and P3 to P8 patterns can be shown 8 Comment field This field indicates the comment on the part Comment can be entered only during part editing Open the Switch List window during part editing and click this field It becomes active for comment entry 2 24 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Parts Placement Ex Switch 1 Click the Switch icon The Switch dialog is displayed e A Hara Earn Estad Lino Le E Jeu i re F H Si U La AAA E Se T irp i e D j Li r El E mh T aF a F arcs H L tz keep OD 3 D gt Lamm 2 When selecting a different part click Parts Select and select the desired switch part 3 Click the Place button in the Switch dialog A dotted box and a mover tool cross Cursor appear in the screen edit window Faria 4 Click the mouse in the desired position The switch is displayed 2 25 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation
289. nagement Screen Data bie 7 29 File Management Part Fleitas 7 35 File Management File Copy 7 39 File Management File Deletion A 7 40 File Management File Division and Combination ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 41 File Management File Comparison ccccccccncccccnnncccncnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnonononononnnnns 7 43 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN SITU ALOR EE 8 1 Elle CN 8 1 S OID O SOM EE 8 1 Operation Procedure eegene 8 1 A A 8 4 Starting Upa EE 8 6 Starting and Stopping Communication sssaeno0aanannnneeensenennnnntnnnnrnnenrnnnrnrreeerenene 8 7 Setting Items Necessary for Communication 8 9 ADOT SIM EE 8 12 TESIS A dt 8 17 ICAA 8 21 MENU giel ln EE 8 28 A e o A a 8 31 Chapter 9 Wizard A A EN T 9 1 Opening the Wizard Dialog 9 1 Wizard Usage Examples cccooconiocononinnn coco EEN aa aeaaeai 9 2 Radio Button Creation encante adi 9 2 A O A I 9 6 trend Grab ET tii aa a de eds 9 11 Deleting Placed Pals 9 16 Appendix 1 Fonts WAV OCS Ol ROMS a ota APP1 1 ROME SUN aenea e APP1 2 PAV AMA E F ON EE APP1 3 HK Gothic and AK TIMES und APP1 4 Appendix2 3D Parts S Bl ac EE APP2 1 dn BEE EE APP2 1 With the Model GVA Crin a APP2 15 Wit RENE 50 60 E APP2 21 CUSTOMIZINO acct acts a ci de e te ae al teed O APP2 23 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 041
290. net AFI Registration Outline of Registration Hems 4 1 Contents of Registration Iems 4 2 TS E 4 3 Calling A AAA 4 3 oreen EdINNO recinto idad iii 4 3 Graphie LID sonal toos sae 4 4 Graphic Library Giruchure AA 4 4 Calling the Graphic Library s seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 4 Graphic Library Editing swisicicsevevcatecunsssucedsvlavineseusowsadads 4 5 Graphic Library Environment Getpng 4 17 d U UE EE 4 20 Multi overlap Gtruchre rnrn rnrn nrnna 4 20 Calling a Multi overlap eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 20 Multi overlap Editing essa idas 4 21 Other Eeer 4 23 A A iisi 4 25 Data Block e 4 25 Calling a Data Block ooooooooooccccococcocococonconononnnnnnrnnnnnnno 4 25 Data Block ECM Le E 4 26 Data Block Environment Setting cccccccccccccnicncinnnoo 4 27 A state aeeetotnncvancembneee 4 28 Message e 4 28 Calling a Message sssssssssessersrererrrerrreresrsrsrsrsrersrenn 4 30 Message Editing EE 4 31 Message Display Environment Setting 4 35 d 4 37 Patern SUUCTUIG senges egen 4 37 Calling a Pattern ccccccsssssesessseeeseeeeeesseseseeeeeeeesseeeees 4 37 Paer CUNO BE 4 38 Transforming Pates iiinsaissuiiioin dais 4 47 Bitmap Import and Giorage nenn ne rnnr nnne 4 49 Pattern Environment Gettmg eeen 4 53 Placing a Patel nto 4 54 To be continued CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net
291. ng Ho Setting Click around this point 4 66 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 2 The Direct Block setting dialog is displayed Diari Beck Ty pr Ha de 3 Click the No 0 button under Line The following dialog is displayed Bel Hrt Hoi _ SE ie ome Fo 4 Specify numbers for Message Group and Line line number Click OK 5 The next No 1 button becomes active Perform the same procedure using the button y Clicking a set number button makes the Copy Insert and Delete buttons active Use them as necessary lied Uksi Mo 1 1 4 67 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Q D O s W O O A Chapter 4 Registration Items 6 When the dialog setting is concluded click OK The previous window is displayed Perform the same procedure for the next block number ne Teh OMe OA TR gt 4 l Cae FF APEE EE er et ee eS Set aj A o e Copying and Pasting or Deleting Direct Blocks Follow the procedure below to copy and paste or delete page blocks 1 Click the block number to be copied or deleted 2 The clicked line is highlighted entirely Select Copy or Delete from the Edit menu Du Te Ee D
292. ng this command brings up the Size Change dialog Sam Change Lal ef t e Cidra A Ste T TED e a LS lU Ge The available setting ranges are as follows Width X 1 800 Height Y 1 600 Color 8 color 16 color 128 color 32k color If a size change is made during pattern editing or when a pattern has been o completed the created pattern data is deleted Transparent Color Setting When a pattern is animated in the graphic relay mode and the screen background is set to any color other than black the pattern is displayed in the XORed color With this transparent setting however the actual pattern color can be displayed Set the color that you do not want to display as transparent when the pattern is placed on the screen Only one color can be set as transparent for each pattern When setting a color as transparent the transparent color is reflected even when placement is not animated Take care to draw the pattern so that it falls within the 4 088 dot size limit pattern size X size x Y size Ex When a pattern is created and placed on the screen it differs in the following ways depending on whether or not a color is set as transparent Se Set Zeg dt Ee Zeg a Eed Zei Se a a ei Se e Eet Ser Eed Ee r Sei eg Pattern Place M Transparent Color Green O Transparent Color None Screen Screen 4 48 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info
293. not error history records are necessary It is necessary to know the errors currently occurring in this example Therefore select Not Necessary Click the Next button 3 Select in which order error messages are to be displayed Select Order of Registered Messages Relay D pmj o C n D Q OH Go x lt D 3 ul CH wn Relay The relay mode is established on completion of setting Click the Next button 9 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard 4 Four types of message displays are previewed Foren Tarte En Wen Lesen Pull down menu Select a color as desired Click the desired type from the four The upper right type is selected in this example The selected type is enclosed in a red frame Click the Next button 5 The selected display image is displayed Bore Tarte i eats Poar Com akj Target Memory Setting Allocate a memory bit for error message display RO is allocated in this example O With Sub display Relay sub Check this when detailed information should be displayed as a sub message Uncheck the option in this example Click the Next button 9 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard 6 Specify the number of error messages memory bi
294. ns the functions and types of available parts as well as notes on their placement on the screen Part Types There are the following types of parts The display area and keypad parts are not included in this table These parts are available with MP parts and do not function independently SP se CI A SP Tan O SP Tails S SP Oharacte play SP vessada OOOO SP bl daa play OOOO wen w Reys E w messe o o we ey w paan E se ewon O o s pegan oo O se Pasme se Sais par graph SP Sais pie graph se meagan O O S se oseaan CC E w feee A e 1 weem we Tam weem w arm play o Time play SP oara O S w wem E CS o meam o w mmya AN be lt D N S 5 o U D O ap D 5 F 2 17 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens MP Animation Not available with GV40 50 60 and GV42C Video display Available with GV52 62 only JPEG display Available with GV52 62 only SP Single part functioning singly selected from a parts file MP Combined parts functioning in combination with other parts Item functioning as per dialog setting Screen library is not a part Itis used to place a screen library element including registered parts etc on screens Before placing a screen library element check its registered items For more information on the screen library see Chapter
295. ntry mode on the base screen For more information see Chapter 7 Entry Mode in the Reference Manual Function 2 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Receive Slice Level Specify the word count of PLC data that the GV reads one time Depending on the PLC that is used the maximum number of words that can be read one time varies If your setting exceeds that limit the value reverts to the maximum that can be read one time for that PLC The default is 40 words As for the speed of data display it is recommended that the receive slice level be lowered for a PLC with a fast scan time and raised for a PLC with a slow scan time A For more information on the processing speed etc see Appendix 2 Process Cycle in the Reference Manual Function P2 Tab Window a a e rra Lies IS bl j T F cher E a a sro bind KE ml lt a ul ea Sir bina Es SE VE E wn P Bt RI but at DI d This tab window is not valid when universal serial is selected as the PLC type PLC Mem of Source Internal Mem of Target When you mainly use PLC memory for the macro and also directly use PLC memory for macro commands a read to PLC memory occurs and as a result the display speed is slowed To avoid this copy memory necessary for each cycle to the internal memory and execute macro commands in the internal memory
296. nu When the editing layer has been changed from Overlap to Base the overlap disappears When the editing layer has been changed from Base to Overlap again the overlap appears on the screen The same setting is available in the Others tab window to be displayed by selecting Display Environment from the Display menu on ed a ai Gual Decker See Piedad M Figo Gol Wen wal teg Le o Ena n MEN gt em ig J Ge WT EN EE AAA Le rl a y Ee ms Tot e A Ad di R as le clan E Bau Ud ipis ads Slee re ee A D Leger Ill fren eo 2 36 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Call Multi Overlap For a call or multi overlap make settings for calling the overlap on the screen Register both call and multi overlaps in multi overlap editing Hi For the overlap registering procedure see Chapter 4 Registration Items Clicking the Call button brings up the Overlap Call dialog Clicking the y Multi button brings up the Overlap Multi dialog lt wi U DI tel z 2 5 Q ul a ude fm Hr 2 010 Fe IT For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 2 Overlap in the Reference Manual Function By clicking OK the Overlap icon is registered in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen To recheck the dialog data click
297. nual are subject to change without prior notice If the specifications of the software do not correspond with the contents of this manual the software specifications have priority No liability is assumed by Matsushita Electlic Works Ltd with respect to the influence brought by the result of using the software or this manual You may use this software on a single central processing unit About Trademarks e Windows Word and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries e All other company names or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders e Programmable logic controllers PLCs are products of their respective manufacturers CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net About Manuals This manual describes functions and capabilities of drawing software GVWIN for the GV series Following manuals are available for the GV series Manual Name Reference No _ No Contents Reference Manual E 888 GVWIN structure operations editing procedure etc ARCT1F377 Operation required when creating screen data are explained Reference Manual ARCT1F376 Functions of the GV42 52 52 and GV40 50 60 are explained in Function details GV42 52 62 Hardware ARCT1F375 Hardware specifications connection with PLCs and wring Manual diagrams of the GV42 52 62 are containe
298. numbers of parts already placed on screens In the case of parts limited in number using the same division number may prevent these parts from working normally For more information on screen library see Chapter 4 Registration Items If the alarm display relay mode has division No 0 YY MM DD hh mm ss The time display in a screen library must have a division number other than 0 a a ee ee ei e NI ee ee ee Ne ee eler ei RI Division Number Check To check the division number of a part placed on the screen follow the steps below Select Display Environment from the Display menu In the Detail tab window check TT DIV No for Detail A A De H aifbg Ga ia H Vi sr ile Laa i Leah Se Mai e tet Mai Tes SW a ess LI dea 3 Tea eg Cen D bibas oe e Lami llame Or select Item List from the Display menu to open the item list All division numbers used on the screen are listed For more information on Display Environment setting see page 2 10 For more information on the item list see Chapter 1 Basic Operation 2 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Screen Structure Screen Resolution Screen resolution varies with models of GV There are three kinds as shown below X axis dots 0 639 799 Y axis dots 0 GA O pmj D D gt O O 3 D O LD
299. o pmj D gt O m D O 5 U o ech Composition of Calendar Parts The calendar part consists of several calendar items Each calendar item can be enlarged or moved separately within the part area MM A Any calendar item can be moved within YY DDhh es the part area of the calendar part SUN gt mm Calendar items can be moved only within the area of the calendar part 10 Determine whether or not to display calendar items of year month day hour minute second and day of the week in the Calendar dialog When O Display is unchecked in the tab window of a calendar item the item is not displayed APP3 31 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing i ip tthe Mig 6 Vatter Me un Jeep 5 Hin M s hi Editing Procedure The procedure to edit and register a new calendar part consisting of year month and day is explained below Calendar Part Edit window 1 Click the Screen List icon In the screen list window double click the desired box for registration 2 The Calendar Part Edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 9 E Oaa Ss 3 Click the New Part icon A dotted box and a mover tool appear 4 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new calendar part is placed A YYMMDDhhmmssSUN
300. o be deleted from the Part auxiliary tool box 2 When its tool bar is displayed click the Delete icon When its dialog is displayed click the Delete button 3 The confirmation message appears Click Yes when deleting the icon The icon is deleted from the Part auxiliary tool box e Copy When copying the function registered in the Part auxiliary tool box bring up the item list 1 Select Item List from the Display menu Diir Dja Eet Ber pla 2 30 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens 2 The Item List window is displayed Items containing no mouse coordinates correspond to icons in the Part auxiliary tool box a uta Ll pl FA Ie HE Dip Shee iG E Ci 1E Rb rrr eed IN PLE arij Che jit Se LE Pai CEA LEA Ir RS s ET DI he Pe ea N E Tha S SR Le E ara Lid piri ss bien jitg G t Gre Deal il i i Tra Peet a 10 ei ej Tes tar IS AA ab Se ere fi TE Imi Mth Er Pie IHR Ere E 15 Us Maha Dien d os ee eer 3 Click the item to be copied It is highlighted Sp 3 lt D n o V D O D D 4 Select Copy from the Edit menu or click the Copy icon UR Te Li lorie irr a sell Ke A Gra La AR FE Tak E Fila Bis md A EIS E eee A Se TH re Pisa i EE EHEM n gt F E Ejmi Er i Has Bre E CF Dier Corpa RES JA
301. o display item is used it is possible to automatically place an overlap using a macro command for video quality adjustment EI For more information see Chapter 18 Video Display in the Reference Manual Function Function 11 Custom Part A maximum of 512 items or parts can be registered in the custom parts file with extensions G2F GVF3 The file is independent of screen data files and registered parts can be used for creating screens Operation Procedure Registration in Custom Parts File 1 Choose and copy the part or item to be registered as a custom part 4 O LI 2 Select Custom Part from the Tool menu The sub menu is displayed Click New 3 512 boxes are displayed in the Custom Part window 4 Click the box for registration Its number is highlighted in red Paste the copied part or item in the box that is highlighted The copied part or item is pasted E oom E nai E a E aw 7 21 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques L Tile the screen edit window and the tray icon display window Hold down the AS CTRL key and drag the chosen item to the tray window The item can also be registered in this manner 5 Click the Save icon for saving the file The message Will save custom part file untitled appears 6 Click Yes The Select Custom Parts File to Save dialog
302. ock Structure ai a E et Ra eens 4 55 Calling a Macro BlOCK EEN 4 55 Macro Block Editing NEE 4 56 Page BOG EE 4 61 Page Eelere 4 61 Callling a Page Bloc ais a E es 4 61 Page BIOGK EJUN raii e ei o eS 4 62 Bn e e E 4 65 Direct BlOCK te id 4 65 an cel BIO 4 66 Direct Block EIN E 4 66 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net SONOS OG EE 4 69 Sereen eeler EI 4 69 Calling a Sereen BIOCK E 4 69 screen Block lr e EE 4 70 UE 4 72 TAGS THUG UOT E 4 72 calino a EE 4 72 RI ee eaaa A A 4 73 BEEE E 4 75 DataSheet SII ios 4 75 Galling a Dala Sheen e ed e a ES 4 76 Data Sheer Edi asii o iria cia 4 76 Data Sheet Environment Setting cccccccccccccconocononnnnnnnnnnonononononenanannnonononininonos 4 79 Sreem LID 2 eebe EE 4 80 Screen Library Str ctUre satis A ee 4 80 Calling a Screen Library coccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnononnnnnonononnnnonnnornnonnnnnnnnnnnnns 4 80 screen Library EdINO EE 4 81 Placing a Screen INV eco cri ten 4 84 WIUITIPIA qua ge Sa ads 4 84 Animatio For theGV52 62 except for GV42C occccocccccccccccncononncnononoononnnnnnnnnnnnononononanannnos 4 85 Animation Function tte EE 4 85 Calling the Animation FUNCION oda 4 85 let ei EIN oa 4 86 Frame EGINO KE 4 88 Chapter5 Transfer Before Using the GV Geries 5 1 A E cused use usscenceneecnarscedeact 5 1 SOLOS ALG NSC eege edel ege 5 2 SCRECN BEA RR E E 5 3 PP a
303. ocoonccnncnnnnns 4 17 e 4 5 parameter crninu 4 6 Macro DICK EE 4 55 MESSAGE EE 4 28 environment setting ccccccccooncnnnnnnnnno 4 35 multi overlap EE 4 20 EIER 4 1 pade DIOCK EE 4 61 Dai a 4 37 bitmap import and storage n 4 49 environment Setting cccccccnonnncnnnnnnnns 4 53 JA O 4 54 transforming isaac 4 47 EISE A 4 3 screen DIOCK eseu 4 69 screen Dray cia aae aia 4 80 EE 4 72 relay MOde arna eege 2 46 relay SUD MOde ete seston idle eileen 2 46 right click MEDU EE 1 32 re 1 38 S Sample 2 51 SO a iaa 4 3 Dackgrounad color sumi Ae ees 2 7 A one cee Aertel eee 2 6 COMPOSI OWN EE 2 1 2 5 Keel te WE 2 5 SCREEN DIOCK ences rta Eed 4 69 screen data transfer on Ethernet cccc 5 14 SCreen IDA ci aoe See 4 80 Dl eege 3 37 Srecni LIST be cusueataac hance N AEN 1 23 Screen Setting dialog ooooococconcnnnccnncnonoos 2 7 Select Environment cccccccssssssseseeeeeceeeeeeeeaseeeees 1 41 jii CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net INDEX S A A 8 1 PA eTa E Ea 8 7 communication Sida dido 8 7 Eeer 8 7 communication Setting 8 9 COMPOST pisaa 8 1 A dee See 8 31 Deele EE 8 4 JOON peace te ai ei ege 8 28 memory ee E 8 23 Meroen trocitos sed 8 23 MGI WEE 8 28 Operation procedure cccccccccececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 2 9197 A y PRE POPE E sa csaiatiaacetensasaess sts
304. omation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Each message is given a group address message group number and line number as well as an absolute address line number only Ordinary addresses groups Absolute addresses Message No Message No None 0000 to 0255 0256 to 0511 0512 to 0767 0768 to 1023 1024 to 1279 1280 to 1535 1536 to 1791 7 1792 to 2047 2048 to 2303 2304 to 2559 2560 to 2815 2816 to 3071 3072 to 3327 3328 to 3583 3584 to 3839 3840 to 4095 4096 to 4351 lt D n ge a O be 1 0000 to 0255 4352 to 4607 0000 to 0255 4608 to 4863 0000 to 0255 4864 to 5119 20 0000 to 0255 5120 to 5375 2 0000 to 0255 5376 to 5631 22 0000 to 0255 5632 to 5887 23 0000 to 0255 5888 to 6143 4 29 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Calling a Message Select Message from the Item menu The Message dialog is displayed Specify the message group number to be opened and click OK ben Peer Setting Message Edit Window The following window is displayed Oe bo ir de 1 dea IR mel heel HE ML Ta Le pais Fe ee Leg Jun ts TT CERS AT dl AFRI EE aa AT 7 1 ert ie Dik 4 30 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Emai
305. omation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Program Extension prg The GV series system program is not transferred automatically with the screen data When the editor software GVWIN has been updated transfer the GV series system program to the GV series Io Transferring Procedure 1 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu 2 The Transfer dialog is displayed Select Program for Transfer Data 3 Click the PC gt button The Open dialog is displayed Select the system program file corresponding to the model of the GV series pe m mA p w oe ED Leg MEE a aE rd Lea En pag fai Ce ELT or mag O A The list below shows the GV series models and their corresponding system files GV62S G2_5000 prg GV60 a org oun Sr prg G G24000pg 5 18 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer 4 Click Open Data transfer starts On completion of transfer bring the GV series to the STOP mode Main Menu local main screen Check the system program version on the screen 2003 4 1 09 23 30 Screen Data Information Size 5832704 Connection 1 1 Signal Level RS232C PLC Stat No 0 Editor MJ1 Never turn off the GV series during system program transfer Io Font Data Extension ftd Only when the sc
306. omm Parameter Write Area DT00100 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div 0 DT00100 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div 0 NTANANN Carann NAln B Baen Nlitm Dienlaw Dine N 6 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Print Printing Examples Screen Output Gi Verid gare 2004 48 12 TIME 10 20 30 Selected PLC MATSUSHITA MEWNET File Comment Pile Narda ta WEN tt ergen Hu O Tat List Output QVM Verio ware 2004 4212 Time 10 70 0 Selected FLO RATS A RT File coment File Mane DA AE Ag ae EFE Screen Mob T Screen Settin d Background PCL 19036 Blink Ra BCL 0 Blink Moe nle G Tem Select Memory WM Traneter of PLS Memory Bot Ve Racatva Slice Lewel 4 OPERAR Macro Hoe lla CLOSE Macro Bot Wee CYCLE Macro O00 Local Funcion Switcher Wwe Superiepoze Trengparent falar fl lend Ya lu f animation Transparent Coler 25 475 BY ola is tie Hoo Sei ech C tr isater CPP SAO CT OG 499 GFF Char ho 0H On Char Function Ho Caitpnut Mesory elo So Gy tpt action AL Lene Pere 0012000 DEFE olor fo Designaci n Frame Color Ho fee i gnarl gr OF Colors Hp Designation Fram Color Ho Deeiqgniati om Dras Hode EEP Process Cyc le High Speed OR Macron not Use GFRRACPO HO USE Inter lack hat ling Rot Use Coste Eitnag F o m Fils fame feowhla 410 bmp li Hot Use Flash File Hare es 14411 Fee 6 8 C
307. on is selected for Block Specify the block or library number of the contents that are applied to the sub display of the original relay message O Same Screen Click M this option when the original relay mode screen and the screen to be called as a screen block are the same In the case that relay messages are linked to different data blocks respectively it is convenient that only the data block numbers are switched on the same screen according to the currently active message For this operation in the Screen Block Edit window change only the numbers for Block No related to the same screen Register several screen blocks of the same screen number with Same Screen checked M With these settings a screen call is set where different blocks are displayed depending on the activated relay bit activation Set the previously described Screen No to be the same as the relay mode o screen number With this screen block settings are finished 4 71 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Tile For painting a graphic such as a box or circle a paint pattern can be selected from eight default types and eight patterns that you register yourself Tile Structure A maximum of 8 tiles can be registered The size of one tile is 8 x 8 dots White dots specified on a tile are regarded as areas in the foreground color
308. on the computer while the GV series is communicating with the PLC and transferring only added or altered data to the GV series Since the data to be transferred is limited as mentioned above transfer time will be shortened Preliminaries With AIGV8103 IT For the contents of arrangements see page 5 5 Computer 0000000 AlGV8103 GV series PLC op O D D Se OU DI Di Di LI OD SS Select Editor Port for Modular Jack 1 in the Modular Jack dialog selected from the System Setting menu 0 On Ethernet IT For the contents of arrangements see page 5 5 Computer V series With PLC GV42 52 62 GV40 50 60 AIGV833 5 23 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Online Editing Procedure Online editing is performed during screen editing Open the desired screen data file Iloc 1 Select On line Editing from the File menu or the right click menu Fe Ed ep iea Fai ken paimi U N ss Chie F rs Ll i Cates or 2 If there is a discrepancy between the screen data on the GV series and the screen data being edited on the computer the following inquiry message appears When no discrepancy is found go to step 4 K Ier e eat dl rer reen gn mi
309. ordance with the specified voltage and wattage Over voltage over wattage or incorrect cable connection could cause fire malfunction or damage to the unit e Be sure to establish a ground of GV The FG terminal must be used exclusively for the unit with the level of grounding resistance less than 100Q e Prevent any conductive particles from entering into GV Failure to do so may lead to fire damage or malfunction CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Notes on Maintenance and Operation e Matsushita Electric Works Ltd is not responsible for any damages resulting from repair overhaul or modification of GV that was performed by an unauthorized person Do not use thinners for cleaning because they may discolor the GV surface Use alcohol or benzine commercially available Do not use a sharp pointed tool when pressing a touch switch Only experts are authorized to set up the unit connect the cables or perform maintenance and inspection GV is equipped with a lithium battery Lithium batteries contain combustible material such as lithium or organic solvent Mishandling may cause heat explosion or ignition resulting in fire or injury Read this manual and related manuals carefully and handle the lithium battery correctly as instructed If a data receive error occurs when GV and the counterpart PLC temperature controller etc are started at the s
310. ors For more information consult your local distributor 7 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 2 Memory Use This window indicates the remaining memory and items registered in screen data files Operation Procedure Opening Closing the List of Memory Use 1 Select Memory Use from the Tool menu 2 The List of Memory Use window is displayed 3 To close this window click the x Close button at the upper right or the click the upper left icon and select Close Bringing Up the Detailed List of Edit Items 1 Click the box of the desired item on the List of Memory Use window 2 The list of items is displayed The boxes with registration are shown with an 113 H x 3 To go back to List of Registration Number click the O List box gt The list of the desired items can also be chosen from the Display menu while AS the List of Memory Use window is displayed 7 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 3 Memory Address Use It is possible to retrieve memory addresses that are used in the files currently being edited Operation Procedure 1 Select Memory Address Use from the Tool menu 2 The Memory Address Use dialog is displayed Specify
311. ound color and click OK The graphic is shown on the background colored as specified laurel ern EF Ce Mersin fit cite P G t Dal D a Sb O O E e Q ZA lt 4 19 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Multi overlap Overlaps are registered in multi overlaps Multi overlap Structure A maximum of 1 024 multi overlaps can be registered One multi overlap is registered per editing window Multi overlap Overlap part Overlap part A maximum of 1 024 multi overlaps can be registered Calling a Multi overlap 1 Select Multi Overlap from the Item menu The Multi Overlap dialog is displayed 2 Specify the multi overlap number to be opened and click OK 4 20 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Multi overlap Editing Placing an Overlap 1 Click the Overlap icon on the tool bar cte Lo Dreem pa Par pen Buren Seine Toot Ware Kap RR Ee ER Los SC BC e A 2 The Overlap Normal dialog is displayed Lis Lagi hora z BE E 5 TS 3 T Usin Button T Comus PLE mae ag be DES l Sunes enone IT For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 2 Overlap in the Reference Manual Function When the dialog
312. phic is too large to fit in the part area click this icon to enlarge the frame so that it fits the whole part including the graphic The Frame Auto Fit icon functions in the same manner This command is inactive for overlap parts because graphics cannot extend beyond the part areas Frame Manual Fitting The frame of a part can be adjusted manually using the mouse For more information see page APP3 12 Switch Area Setting This command is used to reset the switch area operating area For more information see page APP3 11 Move Start End Angles Separately This command is used to adjust pie graph or panel meter part angles The Move start end angles separately icon functions in the same manner For more information see page APP3 20 Symmetry Pie Graph This command is used to symmetrically adjust pie graph or panel meter part angles The Symmetry icon functions in the same manner For more information see page APP3 21 Same Start End Angles This command is used to modify pie graph or panel meter part shape forming a complete circle The Same Start End Angles icon functions in the same manner For more information see page APP3 21 With Internal Circle This command is used to add or delete an inner circle to or from a pie graph With Internal Circle icon functions in the same manner For more information see page APP3 21 Paint Position Setting Fit Area with Graphic This command is valid only for th
313. pied to the target line o A O DA fr EM Sege Ier ee To MACETA o SEI ca SCC VE Cem O NEEN E E O MI AL Peers Y ep 33M o RUE 1 0010 5 5u 0061 AA Sall Sich Su 6010 ADOOS Sari t 19 0N When copying multiple lines at one time click the top number of the lines hold down the Shift key and click the bottom number of the lines Hold down the Shift key and EG oma I i click the bottom line number a a E e B Multiple lines from the specified top to the specified bottom are selected Click the Copy icon Click the top number of the copy target lines Click the Paste icon The copied lines are displayed from the specified top line 4 59 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Deleting Lines Click a line number to be deleted and select Delete from the Edit menu The selected line is deleted 11 De Eh Drais lee Gye ete Taai O Gei ne o mn mp pm rm When deleting multiple lines at one time click the top number of the lines hold down the Shift key and click the bottom number of the lines Selecting Delete from the Edit menu deletes the lines from the specified top to the specified bottom 4 60 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Page Block Chapter 4 Registrat
314. placed pattern or graphic number regarded as 0 specifying a positive value calls a pattern or a graphic of a smaller number and specifying a negative value calls a pattern or a graphic of a greater number 3 Pattern No 3 No e No 6 No HAPB When 3 is specified under Incremental Input with pattern No 8 placed on the screen pattern No 5 is called No Enter a number in this parameter field when Absolute Input Incremental Input or Incremental Input is selected This number designates the order of the allocated memory address WT SOT sl M Hr bp ge 5 fijaci n fe I jeenrserdsl brad El Cem 4 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 4 12 Parameter Setting Items The following table indicates parameter items valid for each graphic Start point end point 1 Line Continuous line Box Parallelogram Polygon Circle Arc sector Ellipse elliptical arc elliptical sector Text Pattern Paint Graphic call Dot Data display Point 0 n coordinates Start point end point Start point PX2 PY2 PX3 PY3 Center coordinates radius start angle number of angles Center coordinates radius Center coordinates radius start angle end angle Center coordinates X radius Y radius Start point coordinates of the first character bottom left Star
315. play item display and comment display Pl owe PR Mi E EE RA LAND y WE DT POGICS 28 ICT itait Laat i de 1LANb Fum di LAME bapu Is Ip mat T our UT oo ITA LAME bippumm Dp GO DTT 1 2 Lae UHT Eat deg 0000 94 LARP 2400400 i Gi Haer 5000101 Di heer pelts qe Di hier Sylar DI ege 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Address Shows the address 2 Setting value Shows the setting value currently entered 3 Display type Shows the display format currently set 4 Data length Shows the data length currently set 5 ASCII display Shows the current setting value in ASCII code 6 Item display Shows the placement layer division number and item number 7 Comment display Shows comments For an automatically created SIM file this display shows the switch lamp OFF characters as well as the allocated functions L Sheet background color xX Gray sheet An SIM file automatically created from the GVWIN editor or an SIV file White sheet A newly created SIM file Be careful about the following points at the gray sheet e The display type returns to the default whenever transferring the data e lt is impossible to add a new memory e It is impossible to save the setting value To perform these operations create the white sheet However even with white sheet the setting data in the interna
316. position OU LA O O O D o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O wa When the desired screen is not included on the Screen List window show the vertical scroll bar or click Jump from the Display menu and specify the desired screen number ltem List Items on the edit window can be checked on the item list Calling up the Item List Select Item list from the Tool menu The Item List window is displayed pa ire ot 1a Ply p Li ey el CMT ei TEL Timp TE r he HRS lte SLL EU Che Lon e Deal E Y ij CES ra j ET Chai EEG Ka Ae i 38 25 Tug rey Li be ie Pet 095 ee TL T Chi Tre Paaji EIER D Zitat III G TE j Iifar it Va rj a Pig A eae 1 27 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Utilizing the Item List Tile the item list and the edit window When the desired item is clicked on the item list handles are shown around the item indicating that the item is selected Selected on the screen fl I ww OD e ng E KE A hon E S a iE AE AA ais a le em mn pl E ewe lial are i jj rara is Tr di e Is Feed 11 TES ee ee IA Mic RR aoe ar TA i Bier ard 318 Se Click here eee Ee Pd 11 ZA A te Caraga Dei ka If an item cannot be found visually on the screen when you would like to change the setting
317. r e AIGV8103 e RS 232C cross cable page 5 30 e GVWIN or communication software HyperTerminal etc D O pmj D D 5 O UI e GN eb L I h D Send side computer e Modem Accessories RS 232C cable modular cable AC adaptor e GVWIN Data Transfer Procedure Receive side GV series 1 Connect the modem on the receive GV series side to a computer according to the instruction manual 2 Transfer AT commands to the modem see the following page 3 Disconnect the modem from the computer Connect the modem to the GV series See page 5 30 4 Seta baud rate between the GV series and the modem see page 5 36 Send side computer 1 Connect the modem on the send computer side to a computer according to the instruction manual 2 Start up the GVWIN software Transfer AT commands to the modem see the following page 3 Make settings for communications between the computer and the modem see page 5 31 4 Transfer screen data Online editing is not allowed 5 25 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer AT Command Setting 1 Start up the GVWIN software Select Send AT command from the File menu If the GVWIN software is not available on the receive side follow the steps below using communication software such as HyperTerminal 2 The AT command dialog is displayed Al c
318. ransferring the data check that PLC I F driver type is UNIPLC20 on the Main Menu screen of the GV series avs2s eege System Information LE DRV VER 1 210 NI EH PROG VER 1 000 ey 300 1 000 1 000 UNIPLC HK Gothic N A Screen Data PLC EE d MATSUSHITA MEWNET Error Stop Information a een d Time Out a 50 sec Size 5832704 Retry Connection 1 1 Baud Rate 19200 8 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN L UNIPLC20 This is a type of I F driver used when a personal computer and the GV series communicate using the Simulator The file named UNIPLC20 TPB is automatically transferred Connecting a Personal Computer with the GV Series Connect the GV series to a computer using the data transfer cable AIGV8103 On the GV series side use MJ1 modular jack 1 On the GVWIN editor select Modular Jack 1 Editor Port in the Modular Jack dialog selected from the System Setting menu GV series Computer AIGV8103 ET Modular 8pin Modular Jack 1 Editor Port in the Modular Jack dialog under System Setting LA It is possible to use the Simulator only when GV series and PLC are 1 1 connection It x is impossible to use the Simulator when GV series and PLC are 1 norn 1 connection Hi 3 Q 8 5 CTi Automat
319. raph type pull down menu is displayed z HOE fw JE oOo Pees W eng Inisial Lac Sarrat w et Interne Circle Complete Flourd watt Internal Duc Zare W Inter Circle Symmetry W Internal Circle Complete Flourd Wilh Internal Dyck Airini 3 Choose Without Internal Circle Symmetry for example A dotted box and a mover tool appear 4 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new pie graph part is placed 5 Double click the part The Pie Graph dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window 1 APP3 19 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing 6 Select the pie graph part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 7 The Modify Part window for the pie graph part is displayed Edit the part or change its size MM The pie graph has a size limit e The radius of a pie graph without internal circle must be 16 dots or more e The inside radius of a pie graph with internal circle must be 10 dots or more and the difference between the inside and outside radii must be 16 dots or more TI O 8 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part 9 Close the Modify Part
320. reen size 7 10 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques 5 Choose the number of colors of the pattern GV40 50 60 8 16 or 128 colors GV42 52 62 8 16 or 128 32000 colors 6 Click OK The message Will Register to No x appears When the registration destination is the correct one click Yes To change the destination click No Clicking No brings up the Specify Bitmap Read dialog Specify the desired number Ex If the following screen is converted to a pattern it changes as shown below 4 O LI Pattern size 120 x 90 7 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 6 Copy Image to Clip Board The screen being displayed on the computer can be copied to the clipboard The copied image can be imported into word processing software etc L The following edit items can be copied to the clipboard AS e Screen e Graphic library e Multi overlap e Data block e Screen library Operation Procedure 1 Bring up the desired screen on the computer 2 Select Screen Image from the Tool menu The sub menu is displayed Click Copy to Clipboard 3 The following dialog is displayed When reversing the monochrome color on a screen click Yes When keeping the pres
321. reen data to be transferred contains font data that is different from the font data in the GV series the font data including the Main Menu local main screen data file is also transferred automatically Afterwards font data transfer will be executed automatically if any changes are made to the font data in the screen data LU O D D Se OU Di Di LI OD SS The list below shows the font types and their corresponding font data files Fnt_jpn2 ftd Fnt_eng ftd Fnt_twn ftd Chinese simplified Fnt_chn ftd L 12 point font data is automatically transferred for the fonts of Gothic English Western Europe HK Gothic and English Western Europe HK Times It is not necessary to select these files 5 19 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Temp PLC2 Only when the screen data to be transferred contains the temperature control network PLC2Way settings that are different from the settings in the GV series the temperature control network PLC2 program is also transferred Afterwards the temperature control network PLC2 program transfer will be executed automatically if any changes are made to the program in the screen data When the editor software GVWIN has been updated choose Temp PLC2 for transfer to the GV series Ex Font This option is valid when the screen data contains the Gothic Engli
322. rh Fea i ville Ten Lins ge fer le LI me Im 2 Select the desired options for Foreground and Line Type For sectors select the desired options for TC Paint O Frame Background Frame Color and Tile 3 Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point 4 When the mouse is released the arc or sector is displayed 5 Clicking the mouse to the desired position draws the arc or sector LI Start point End point 3 14 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Ellipse 1 Click the Ellipse icon in the Screen Drawing dialog The following dialog is displayed Hp Grech cows PieGeaph See Tred Gia Souk Hi Teel ne Ide Ire re fo alces Ed cal fa m Poli y Select the draw type Drag from the start point to the Drag from the center for a end point of the box where an E the major radius inscribed ellipse is drawn O LI Start point End point Select the desired options for O Paint O Frame Foreground Background Frame Color Tile and Line Type 2 Drag from the start point to the end point An ellipse is drawn Elliptical Arc and Elliptical Sector Click the Elliptical Arc or Elliptical Sector icon in the Screen Drawing dialog The following dialog is displayed Hp coja PieGeaph ese Tred bsg Sr i Mell Test Les Be Ende Ire
323. rical data display e Character display e Message display Bar graph Pie graph e Panel meter e Statistic graph e Closed area graph Calendar Setting Procedure A lamp is used as an example for the following customizing procedure Also follow the same procedure in the case of the other parts 1 Open the Lamp dialog Open the Customize tab window 2 Click O Custom Bitmap y Checking O Custom Bitmap deletes the 3D parts setting APP2 22 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts 3 Select a bitmap file from Bitmap Selection If the Bitmap Selection column does not include the desired bitmap file click the Refer button and select the desired one The bitmap file is copied to the GVW Parts User folder and displayed under Bitmap Selection Ne Tia Coe r L Zeg br mT jen 1 Use this button to delete unnecessary bitmap files from the AGVWPartslUser folder Deleting a file currently being used causes error No Parts stored in the GVW Parts User folder are listed 4 The selected bitmap and its file name are displayed The file is opened In the case of a lamp part as many tabs as the notch number of the part are provided therefore a bitmap can be selected individually Perform step 3 in each tab window Han hame feel Leto IT For information on L Flash refer
324. rical data display part is placed conos ui AR The top left corner of the part moves to TO 1234 LEY E the clicked position 4 Double click the part The Num Display dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window 10D 5 Select the numerical data display part by clicking Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 6 The Modify Part window for the numerical data display part is displayed Edit the part or change its size pc o gt Meoma L For a numerical data display part with a painted box it is recommended that the box color WW be specified for Background in the Char Prop tab window of the Num Display dialog and that Transparent be unchecked With Transparent checked a flickering will occur on the GV screen when the data on the display part is changed and the data display speed will be slow Background color Foreground color 12344 Painted box APP3 14 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing 7 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part Pare Cadel OP Gel SS l 8 Close the Modify Part window Num Display Part Edit window 9 The former
325. rmation as shown below miil 2 re i p k igisi W i Sm BSR mer Diren Pe Pp Sere Deg lol geste Le ld GA TE Ey 4 gt GF i Feet er 1 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Menu bar Clicking each menu brings up a drop down menu Operations and edit items available with the GVWIN editor are indicated Hi For more information on the menu items see page 1 11 Icon Bar The icon bar contains the following icons a ado RENCIA e gt E 2 Version 0 LA O O O D a o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O om information New File Screen List Open Next Save Preview Transfer Skip Start Simulator Switch Lamp Display Print On line Run Select Detail Prop Change Division Number The current division number is indicated This number should be used for identifying the division when placing parts or items IT For more information on the division number see Chapter 2 Screens 1 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Tool Bar The tool bar contains icons that are equivalent to some menu items in the menu bar There are three tool bars Parts Tool Bar A Each icon has the function shown below For more information on use and setting items See the relevant chapter
326. round Select a color to be displayed by clicking or dragging Background Select a color to be displayed by right clicking or right dragging Pen Select a dot size for the line command O Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is necessary For more information on transparent color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the Reference Manual Function Line Command Usage 1 Select a foreground color background color and dot size Pen 2 Inthe Pattern Edit window drag the mouse A line is drawn with the specified size pen in the color for Foreground Drag 3 To draw in the color for Background right drag the mouse 4 40 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Box Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Foreground Select a color to be displayed by dragging U D 5 Background Select a color to be displayed by right dragging or by dragging with the M Paint option checked see the next O Paint Check this when painting boxes With a check mark drawn boxes are painted in the color for Background O Frame This is active with M Paint checked With a check mark th
327. round color of a data block L When a data block is called its background setting is ignored and thus only the x registered data is recognized as a target 1 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed 2 Open the Menu Dsp tab window 3 Select the desired background color and click OK The data block is shown on the background colored as specified 4 27 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Message It is possible to register user s desired texts in the message editing area Texts for the relay mode message mode bit sampling alarm display parts that will vary according to the circumstances are registered in this area and can be displayed by the message display function Message Structure The message editing area is divided into 24 groups each of which can contain 256 message lines Therefore you can register a maximum of 6 144 lines Message Group No 0 Group No 1 Group No 2 Group No 23 Message No O AAAAAAAAAAAAA No 0 No 0 No 0 Message No 1 BBBBBBBBBBBBB No 1 No 1 No 1 i E See E Message No 255 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ No 255 No 255 No 255 The maximum permissible number of characters per line depends on the number of displayed dots specified for the GV No of displayed dots Max number of characters 1 byte 4 28 CTi Aut
328. rt are displayed Part Edit window LA The base color of the Part Edit window can be changed so that the image of the part can x be obtained when it is placed on the screen Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed Open the Menu Dsp tab window Choose the desired color for Background See page APP3 39 Saving and Closing Part Files Fm Edt ipe Esta H Hes Pinia pairo ei Dei F Leni Mem Fide Plana Guat Fee Ech Qu Application 1 For a new part file select Save or Save As from the File menu Give the file a name 2 When overwriting an existing file select Save from the File menu 3 Select Quit Part Edit from the File menu This step completes part editing By selecting Quit Application in the File menu the GVWIN editor is terminated APP3 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing Editing Procedures for Each Part Editing Overlap Parts In overlap parts the basic part areas equal the part areas in size Editing Procedure Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Overlap Part Edit window 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened m Q 3 O v O O 4 Q C pmj D gt O m Q O 5 U o ech New Part
329. rts different displays for ON and OFF P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 should be created Notches A maximum of seven types of the switch or lamp part are available such as two different displays for ON and OFF three different displays ON OFF and another etc The relation between patterns and notches is shown below Notches Patterns 2 notch OFF ON 2 patterns OFF ON another type 3 patterns OFF ON other 2 types 4 patterns m A TU ke O O D OQ pmj D LI h O m GN O gt U Q Determine the number of notches when placing a new part Note that once the number of notches has been chosen it cannot be changed later 0 For a 2 notch switch or lamp part two different displays for ON and for OFF should be created For a 3 notch part three different displays are required Likewise register as many graphics as required for the notches 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 of the switch or lamp part 2 notch gt 3 notch STOP gt oy _ ON Editing Procedure Ex 2 notch switch part Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Switch Part Edit window 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened APP3 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing 2 Click the New Part icon 2 notch to 8 notch can be c
330. s entered the allocated addresses are incremented by two words or bits 0 LA O O O D o O 5 O a Eck Dy D m Q e O wa Copy to the Selected Screen The item selected on the edit window or on the Item List window can be pasted on multiple screens at one time Follow the steps described below 1 Click or drag the desired item on the screen Or click the item on the Item List window 2 Select Copy to Selected Screen from the Edit menu The following dialog is displayed ered loge ln Papit EI T b Pes ia ered zg M Not Paste to the Unregistered Screens When the selected item should not be pasted on unregistered screens check this box To paste the selected item on unregistered screens remove the check mark Range Designation Set the range of screens where the selected items should be pasted 3 Click OK Paste operation is performed When paste operation on the last screen number specified for Range Designation has been completed this last screen is opened If paste operation is performed on a layer Such as an overlap where the number of items per screen is limited and the number reaches the limit the error message Do you cancel paste action to selected screen is displayed IOoe To cancel Copy to Selected Screen that you performed click Undo Paste to Selected v x Screen in the Edit menu 1 37 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 36
331. s is switched to the RUN mode and the GV series starts communication with the PLC System Information SYSTEM PROG VER 1 000 Screen Data Information Size 5832704 gt gt RUN mode Connection 1 1 Baud Rate 19200 SE Sr RS232C Data Lebgth PLC Stat 0 ou Bit 1 arity Odd Send GE 0 msec Editor MJ1 5 34 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer H an Error Occurs The following error message will be displayed due to faulty communication cable connection or PLC or GV series parameter setting mismatch Check for these probable causes and restart communication RUN Communication Error Time Out Screen No Received Code No If the following error message is displayed a screen number that does not exist may be specified in the read area memory address n 2 After the GV series starts communication RUN mode with the PLC it displays the screen specified in the read area address n 2 Check and correct the setting in the memory address gt D op O MD OD gt O Q lt Q 02 OD Screen No Error 5 35 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer MEMO Please use this page freely 5 36 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 We
332. scale Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button O Long Line When this box is checked M long gradation marks are attached to the scale at the specified pitch When this box is not checked LJ long gradation marks are not attached Pitch 1 16 This option becomes active when M Long Line is checked Set the pitch for long gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button Short gradation mark Pitch za Line Long gradation mark 3 31 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Drawing Method Depending on the selected draw type the drawing method varies Drawing from the Center 1 Select the left icon for the draw type 2 Make the required setting on the dialog beforehand 3 Drag from the center to the desired radius 4 When you stop dragging a line is displayed Click the mouse at the start point of the arc 5 Move the cursor clockwise portion to be erased or counter clockwise portion to be drawn along the arc and click on the end point Counter clockwise L Start point End point 6 Clicking the mouse draws the pie graph scale 3 32 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing
333. screens for the first number to the last number are selected at one time Hold down the SHIFT key and click Click first 6 Drag one of the selected screen to the copy target box All the selected screens are copied to the target file window at one time by releasing the MOUSE T D lt S 5 D O be 3 D 3 7 31 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques 7 When selecting screens to be copied individually click the screens one by one while holding down the CTRL key Hold down the CTRL key and click 8 Drag one of the selected screens to the copy target box All the selected screens are copied to the target file window at one time by releasing the mouse Even if screens to be copied are selected individually their copies appear in the consecutive boxes in the target file window TD Change to a Different Item 1 Select Change Display from the Display menu with the screen list window open 2 The Change Display dialog is displayed Choose the desired item and click OK 3 The corresponding window appears 7 32 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Copying Items by Designating Item Numbers e When any of the following items are selected from the File Managing
334. screens or messages can be copied to a different file 2 Parts can be copied between part files 3 Entire files can be copied 4 Unnecessary files can be deleted 5 A file occupying large amounts of memory can be partitioned and recombined 6 Files can be compared Es JE Iess foe Pe es Qe WI Cen kl Pest Coslada A Fa E A AA Vis AS A TES Vie i opi EA ai A O o AU N T dj de lie ge 7 27 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 uowapeuen l Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Files for File Management The following two types of files can be handled by the file management function When copying files specify two files with the same extensions 1 Screen data file with extensions G2 or GV 2 Part file with extensions G2P or GVP The file management function is not available for files with different extensions Io Screen Data File Management One file can be copied entirely Also selected items in the file can be copied to a different file File BBB Screen Copying only screen No 2 lee With screen data file management the items are copied by the categories shown in the Item menu such as screens graphics library messages patterns tiles and external characters In addition animation tables system setting
335. sed brings up the preview of the placed image 4 51 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Redraw When any setting Dither or Pseudo Gradation has been changed click Convert depressed and Redraw The image according to the change is previewed In the case of the GV40 50 60 When the O Use 3D Parts in the Environment Setting tab window opened in the Unit Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu setting is changed the pallet is also changed and the colors of the placed bitmap vary accordingly To bring the bitmap to the initial condition repeat pasting operation of the bitmap E Storing in a Bitmap File The pattern currently being opened can be stored in a bitmap file extension bmp 1 Select Save As Bitmap File from the Tool menu The following dialog is displayed ool ite pes a Leta fe Neen Lor L ckt Partes Change Memos D Leet lo Mich Ted Fong Es hora B ss Fike Lee 2 Give aname to the file and click Open The pattern is now stored as a bitmap 4 52 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Pattern Environment Setting The Display menu includes the following commands Display Environment The following dialog is displayed
336. selected the LI allocation of memory used for alarm a Ske display is displayed Pond Eed 2 Linder Fe Memorize Depa Evert Checked lines are stored in alarm Chore d Deler Esteras message history records Unchecked zik R lines are not stored in history records Een Hu WAV hewn When this command is selected the ee Flo column that indicates settings with without Sound Dees ER sound output is displayed WAV File No When this command is selected WAV file numbers are displayed Sound Priority When this command is selected the order of precedence is displayed E Mail When this command is selected the column that indicates settings with without e mail is displayed Ly Refer to Reference Manual Function for more information on the following For alarm display see Chapter 10 Sampling For sound output see Chapter 20 Sound For e mail see Chapter 27 E Mail 4 36 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Pattern Patterns are the areas where bitmap files are imported and graphics are drawn in dots and then registered Pattern Structure A maximum of 1 024 patterns can be registered Pattern No 0 No No 5 No 6 No 1023 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 AS Beer Soda The maximum capacity per pattern is 128 kB The maximum permissible number of dots are the same as the n
337. setting is concluded click Place 3 A dotted line box as large as an overlap is displayed with a cross cursor 4 Click the mouse in the desired position The overlap is placed If necessary change the position or the size 4 21 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Editing in Overlap When placing items such as switch parts or graphics change over the editing layer from the base to an overlap The procedure is the same as that in screen editing 1 Place an overlap part in multi overlap editing Check that icons for drawing and parts except for Overlap are inactive EE Je Wie es DRA CS ED tos m The editing layer is now changed from the base to an overlap Icons for drawing and parts except for Overlap become active Edo Edi Diy Dias Pai Den Speer Tool bebe Dee ogee B A sen t mess SOR 08 Rete gen Bit ETA ay ee a nie Be 3 Place desired parts or graphics on the overlap When an overlap is selected as the editing layer the overlap cannot be moved or enlarged reduced To allow these operations select Base from the right click menu Le 4 22 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Other Settings Make the following settings as desired for multi overlap
338. sh Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times font data The Gothic font data is divided into these three kinds 12 point data automatic font setting data and manual font setting data The automatic font setting data is handled as screen data The 12 point data is transferred as font data The manual font setting data is included in the expansion font data When any changes are made to the manual font settings in the screen data select this option and transfer the data y However when Memory is selected for Transfer Device the expansion font AS data manual font setting data is also transferred as the screen data together with the automatic font setting data SRAM Data This option is valid when the GV series uses an SRAM cassette or built in SRAM With this option setting data is backed up at the time of SRAM cassette battery change For more information see the SRAM Cassette Instruction Manual Station No Table When the temperature control network as well as a temperature controller model FUJI MPCO4P is used the station number table becomes available With the station number table in use this Station No Table option becomes valid When the screen data is transferred to the GV series first the station number table is also transferred automatically It is not transferred automatically afterwards When any changes are made to the table transfer the table data to the GV series 5 20 CTi Automation
339. sheet the number of characters etc in the Data Sheet Page Setting dialog Select Data Sheet Setting from the Edit menu The Data Sheet Page Setting dialog is displayed K pias Ope Te pk ey 4 76 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Set each option in the dialog referring to the description below Memory This option determines the first page of printing The details of memory are as follows Number of pages to be printed For more information on usage see Chapter 14 Data Sheet in the Reference Manual Function Characters Line 16 152 Specify the number of characters per line of data sheet Lines Page 2 152 Specify the number of lines per page of data sheet Paper Clicking this button brings up the sheet size selection dialog Select the sheet size and the sheet orientation O sab 0 gt D d O Use Character Graphic Print When this option is checked charts can be printed out clearly The specified number of lines also changes How this relates to the printout paper is shown below mo e Atlandscape 15 inch landscape MN Printed out images differ as shown below O Use Character Graphic Print M Use Character Graphic Print No O data No 0 data EE No 1 data No 1 data 2 ee No 2 data No 2 data No 3 data No 3 data 4 77 CTi Au
340. splay area 08 APP3 29 GISDIAY EE APP3 29 A a on E APP3 9 A sete arn tes APP3 38 GOUNE ouia APP3 1 EE ee APP3 7 panel meter maria APP3 22 EES orae e E APP3 19 statistic graph bar ceeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeees APP3 23 statistic graph pie occccooooccnnccccconononnno APP3 24 switch and lamp iia APP3 9 AO NEE APP3 12 creating ON display ooooocccncoo APP3 12 FANO ee AAA APP3 12 Y A EE Ee APP3 15 part frame Setting cere APP3 12 switch area setting APP3 11 SWITCH GIG EE APP3 13 EE EE A APP3 24 trend sampling ccoccococcncnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnn APP3 24 part file creating procedure concoccnncnciniciceneninineninininos APP3 4 creation and storage ccccoooococccoconnnnncnnnnnnnns APP3 4 A APP3 34 Rica UE 1 15 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net D parts ene 2 26 enlargement reductiON cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 27 notes on parts placement ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 18 DIACEIMGME E 2 25 ll Ee EEN 2 55 bar graph pie graph cceeeeeeeees 2 48 calendar display 2 52 data block area ANEN 2 47 data display cia 2 40 ss A A 2 47 graphic mode and graphic relay mode 2 50 interval timer oooocccnncnncnccnnccnnonnnccnnnnnnnnnnos 2 54 dE di 2 56 MAC O ee Eed 2 54 MEMO pad erarnan eege 2 54 MeEMOLY Card EE 2 55 MESSAGE mode cocccocnnnnnccncnnnnnnconnnnnnnananenons 2 46
341. stern Europe to English Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times the following alarm message appears uwii O O OOO O o o EE pl are detras e am ta mad he el pr P cara the e 8 carrot Ss p re Pis ral Ha bache la beis rr oe a When Yes is clicked the English Western Europe font is converted into the HK Gothic or HK Times whichever is selected that is in the number of points closest to the X enlargement factor of the English Western Europe font If no backup copy of the screen data is saved click No and save a backup copy If you attempt to change a Font setting from English Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times to English Western Europe an alarm message appears as well The table below shows the character sizes in relation to font conversion English Western Europe gt HK Fonts HK Fonts gt English Western Europe X enlargement factor X and Y enlargement factors APP1 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts Font Setting for Individual Functions With English Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times selected for Font the character property setting made for a function part or mode is altered to the setting for the HK font S D Ex Text in drawing created from Draw and Text S Soren Ce ori 7 E a aL Da bah Zoe Pem
342. sword should be entered when opening the screen data file or downloading the transferred data on GV A password ensures security against unauthorized access Manage the password on your own Note that Matsushita Electric Works is not liable for any damages resulting from unknown password 1 42 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Memory Use Tab Window Some information that is displayed by selecting Memory Use from the Tool menu is displayed in this tab window Lo e iii ba Us jar Malhas besl Pk Ges HEEN ges Th Para Leal Last Dira sa Lib L y apta iiil I aim rd a el PS EH AA E zj OU LA O O O D o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O wa Es cc bm tg UK rn r Lie o gs Cp a O Shorten the Title Display Check this box when you prefer short window titles that are displayed on top of the editor For more information on the title indication see page 1 6 M Create Backup File A backup file with extension bak is always created when saving a screen data file If not necessary remove the check mark O Auto save Check this box to save the screen data automatically When the box is checked the time period for auto saving can be set Set the desired time interval for auto saving in minutes Setting range 10 to 60
343. t aN oole AeA 3D Parts 3D Parts EE APP2 1 LE KE APP2 1 With the Model GV42C cccccsseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeanees APP2 15 With GV40 50 60 ccccceseceeeceesseeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeanees APP2 21 GUSTO 09174 E stent ee eee eee eer APP2 23 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation i Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts 3D Parts 3D parts provided from Matsushita Electric Works will aid in more realistic display of parts on the screen This chapter explains the 3D parts setting procedure on the screen and the notes on usage The explanation slightly varies with the edit model GV42 52 52 or GV40 50 60 Check the model in use and the corresponding explanation For the functions of parts see the Reference Manual Function Oo J U an With GV42 52 62 This section provides notes on 3D parts usage and the setting procedure for the GV42 52 62 Read the following thoroughly in advance 1 For the model GV42C see page APP2 15 in this chapter Notes on Usage Parts File Matsushita Electric Works provides ten 3D parts files for the GV42 52 62 Depending on the components selected at the time of installation the installed parts files vary e Installed as standard only O Program Files is checked 3DStd G2p Switches lamps 2
344. t Save Overwrites the currently opened copy target file e Copy Target Save As Click this option to give a different name to the currently opened copy target file for saving e Copy Source Open Opens a copy source file e Quit File Managing Quits File Managing e Quit Application Quits the GVWIN editor 7 34 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Management Part File 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select Parts File The File Manage Part dialog is displayed 3 Specify the desired files for Copy Source and Copy Target respectively Files can be selected by clicking Reference 7 Dsg Irsch uowapeuen l 7 35 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques 5 Choose the item for copy and click OK The copy source and target file windows are displayed The source file window is placed above the other 6 Click the part to be copied in the copy source file window The part number is highlighted in red 7 Drag the part to the desired box in the copy target file window If a part has already been registered in the box the message for overwriting confirmation appears y Copy of Parts in Consecutive Numbers AS 1 Click the first part of the parts
345. t after being unpacked it is brought to either status at power on e Communicating with the PLC RUN mode e Showing the Main Menu local main screen stored in the GV series STOP mode communication stopped 2003 4 1 09 23 30 Screen Data Information Size 5832704 Connection 1 1 Baud Rate 19200 Lebgth 8 SE SE RS232C Data PLC Stat No 0 Stop Bit 1 arity Send Delay 0 msec S 10 en Test ES Screen data transfer is allowed in either status However it may be necessary to bring up the Main Menu local main screen STOP mode to make data transfer possible For more information see page 5 12 At the time of screen data transfer from the editor software computer to the GV series If the editor software has a GV series system program containing functions that are not supported by the GV series the computer transfers the system program as well to the GV series Otherwise the program is not updated If the screen data contains any font data other than Japanese 32 the computer transfers the font data as well to the GV series If the set PLC model is different from the previously set model the computer transfers the I F driver file as well to the GV series loc 5 4 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Data Transfer Methods Data Transfer via AIGV8103 Screen data is transferred from a computer
346. t capable of flow control setting short circuit RTS and CTS 25 pin connector Modem 25 pin AIGV8103 9 pin of the modem EE For a modem that is not capable of flow control setting short circuit RTS and CTS Connection between Modem and Telephone Line Connect the modular cable accompanying the modem between the modular jack LINE for telephone line on the back of the modem and the telephone line modular socket If the distance between the modem and the telephone line is as long as tens of meters data transfer failure may occur op CH D OD D OU Di Di lt Q D 02 gt OD Connection between Modem and Computer Connect the RS 232C cable accompanying the modem between the RS 232C connectors on the back of the modem and on the computer 5 31 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Screen Data Transfer 1 Start up the GVWIN software Open a screen data file to be transferred 2 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu 3 The Transfer dialog is displayed 4 Check 4 MODEM Click the Detail Setting button 5 The Modem Comm Setting dialog is displayed Hohn Lg Seley KA E WEN sal Pon ZS sas ae eed E gt Tae F TOME f PULSE GT ETET E OE Cara Serial Port COM1 COM8 Select a serial port Baud Rate 9600 19200
347. t point top left coordinates pattern number Start point Start point library number Start point Start point bottom left coordinates of the first numeral 1 Paint is not depicted normally when Action Animate is selected in the Parameter Setting dialog 2 For information on data display parameters see page 4 16 Continuous line points 0 n coordinates When continuous lines are drawn like this parameters can be set for seven points CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items 2 Parallelogram e PX2 e PY2 e PX3 e PY3 3 Pattern e Start point The top left corner of the pattern becomes the start point Parameter No 1 Getters gt eee No 2 de e Pattern No When a parameter for pattern number has been set commanding the pattern number brings up the corresponding graphic Pattern No 0 No 1 No 2 No 3 Pattern No 0 No 2 No 3 4 13 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net D ZA Q O O E e Q lt Chapter 4 Registration Items 4 Paint start point The start point coordinates can be changed by a command from memory specified with a parameter In this case only REP is available therefore the previous paint ex circle remains o Ace hh Data Display
348. ted To confirm whether the communication is established or not check if the Communication icon is depressed Also Comm is displayed on the status bar of the Simulator during communications Hi 3 Q SR E E op ai E 1 o Si When the Simulator is started from the Windows menu the communication is not started In this case start the communication by following the steps described below 8 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN 1 Choose Start from the Communication menu Or click the Communication icon The GV series has established the communication with the computer wf ia 2 The simulator state displayed on the screen is changed from Stop to Comm MATSUSHITA HEWMET San gt MATELEHITA HEWHET SEH Stopping Communication with the GV Series 1 Choose End from the Communication menu Or click the Communication icon The communication between the GV series and a personal computer stops The Main Menu screen is displayed on the GV series automatically S Sa LISS a 2 The Simulator state on the status bar is changed from Comm gt Stop To restart communications click Start from the Communication menu or click the Communication icon 8 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiau
349. ted for Action select and Message is selected for lamp Internal for Command Action select and External for Commana Limited to 12 points Limited to 12 points Data sampling Numerical data and character displays Bit sampling Message in display area Relay sampling as mentioned for Relay as mentioned for mode Relay mode Alarm display Message in display area Limited to 12 points numerical data display Memory card mode File number and record File name and record name Variable number displays in display displays in display area area Calendar display Calendar numerical data and text Time display Time display Table data display Numerical data display and text Character and message Variable in drawing displays Text in drawing Displayed characters Multi text Displayed characters Data sheet None Refer to the notes on the following page APP1 10 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts 0 In the case of the matrix type GV40 50 60 Spacing of characters is different between the matrix type and the analog type The matrix type shows characters based on dots at regular intervals The 10 space between characters varies with the specified number of points a O 20 point size characters in the relay mode F Touch switch Analog switch Touch switch Matrix switch 9 i O M
350. tem placed on the screen and click this menu The Prop Change dialog is displayed Select Environment For more information see Select Environment page 1 41 Division No Setting Changes the division number indicated in the upper right corner Screen Setting Used for specifying the screen background color etc For more information see Chapter 2 Screens Edit OPEN Macro Edit CLOSE Macro Edit CYCLE Macro Used for setting the macro for the currently open screen For more information see Chapter 2 Screens Local Function Switch Setting Used for setting function switches for each screen For more information see Chapter 1 System Setting in the Reference Manual Function Select All Selects all items placed on the screen Delete All Deletes all items from the screen Clicking this a menu brings up the dialog shown on the right EN A When Yes is clicked all the items are deleted from the screen A Display Menu Tool Bar 1 13 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Shows or hide the tool bars Clicking this menu brings up the Tool Bar dialog When the box is unchecked the corresponding tool bar disappears from the screen Check the box to show the tool bar Status Bar This menu is checked as default The status bar is shown at the bottom of the editor scr
351. ter icon on the drawing tool bar The Parameter Setting dialog is displayed DA ABC e 1d de GALES Puta walima IL orzel E Te Deg das E ren esa Se ee zd ER HE lt a Era RH For the description of setting the dialog refer to the following 3 When the dialog setting is concluded click OK The options in the Parameter Setting dialog vary with the selected graphic For o more information see page 4 12 4 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net D a Sb O O E e Q ZA lt Chapter 4 Registration Items Parameter Setting Dialog Action When moving transforming or changing graphics the new one is placed over the previous one or the previous one is cleared before the new one is placed on the screen Select either manner Replace The new graphic is placed over the previous one Therefore the previous one remains on the screen r OOO Animate Only the new graphic is placed on the screen 5 Se SE E AE Wi Wi Ze Wi H H b H Vy a ka 1 I Pay my H Sun ee er E wf wf b S eet E When you go to a setting item and click its Set button the Parameter dialog is displayed REIS 1 M ahinki iras eeii AP Pintura inp ffi ewe No Setting No memory is allocated 4 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web
352. the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen To bring up the dialog again click the icon 2 56 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens Color Types and Settings This section explains the color types available with the GV models and their setting procedure Color Types Available color types differ depending on the models of GV ink O Si O lt CH D 09 D o WM OH Q 09 Available x Unavailable Not applicable Color setting procedure varies with the color types Refer to the following pages for more information 2 57 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Screens 32 000 color Type The color pallet shows the basic 16 colors as default When selecting a color other than the sixteen click the far right button W on the pallet The following dialog is displayed BERERE RRR REE a ee A rat 3 Dese Cube Gesi Pallet 1 Shows the 128 color pallet for the GV40 50 60 Pallet 2 Shows the 3D parts color pallet for the GV40 50 60 Pallet 3 Shows the default color pallet 128 color type only for the GV42 52 62 Daae Cul Gesi Sie Pallet 1 Pallet 2 Pallet 3 2 58 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web
353. the arrow buttons T V Press the Setting Finished button to finish the selection Options 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 After the Setting Finished button is pressed the switches and function switches on the Main Menu screen do not work for 15 seconds 0 D Ya Pressing the Setting Finished button sends AT commands to the modem AS automatically and sets the baud rate between the GV series and the modem 3 The Main Menu local main screen is displayed automatically Modem Connect Mode automatically appears under Editor MJ1 4 When a modem is not used for screen data transfer specify Not Used for Modem Comm Baud Rate For screen data transfer while a computer is connected with AlGV8103 specify Not Used for Modem Comm Baud Rate Joan LU CH D OD gt O Di lt Q 02 a OD Stat No 192 168 1 6 PORT 10000 MAC 0050FF000035 q Editor MJ1 Y POWER Pressing Editor MJ1 brings up the Extendeo Function Setting screen a ET Setting Finished Ethernet Informati rans Speed 101 PINO GY Pressing Setting Finished brings up the Main Menu local main screen again eg tat PORT 10000 q Modem Connect Mode MAC 0050FF000 5 29 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Description of Connections we
354. tiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing L Switch Grids As default M Place Switches on Switch Grids is checked Switches are placed and enlarged reduced or switch areas are moved along switch grids With the matrix type GV40 50 60 switch areas can be moved only along switch grids Keep M Place Switches on Switch Grids checked With analog switches switches can be moved dot by dot regardless of switch grids To do this select Display Environment from the Display menu open the Grid tab window and uncheck L Place Switches on Switch Grids Preparation for Creating the ON Display of a Switch Part When creating a switch part the ON display is placed on top of the OFF display When the ON or OFF state of a switch is distinguished only by color change the ON and OFF displays of the switch must be in the same position To create the ON display after the OFF display has been created copy the OFF display in the Modify Part window then paste the copied display to the Modify Part window for the ON display and finish it as the ON display 9 After editing the OFF display copy the display for creating the ON display 10 Close the Modify Part window The former Switch Part Edit window is displayed The OFF display as created appears in the window Switch Part Edit window 11 Create the ON display of the switch Click the ON icon in the tool bar m A TU ke
355. tiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts APP2 26 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net TREI Par o e APP3 1 Components of Parts cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees APP3 2 Modifying Parts In Screen Data Files APP3 3 Parts Modifying Procedure AAA APP3 3 Creation and Storage of Part Files APP3 4 Creating Part Files scsceceopccveacesecacctencedetecdvedeapendsceade des APP3 4 Saving and Closing Part Fies eee APP3 6 Editing Procedures for Each Part APP3 7 Editing Overlap Parts APP3 7 Editing Switch Lamp Rate APP3 9 Editing Data Display Partei APP3 14 EIA a e DE APP3 15 Editing Graph Parts E APP3 17 Editing Display Area Parts for Data Sampling APP3 29 Editing Calendar Paris scrciescssacaessncseseataceectannnenrennaete APP3 31 Editing Display Area Parts APP3 33 Printing the Part Part File APP3 34 Printing Procedure E APP3 34 Part File Management APP3 36 Part File Managing Procedure 0 eee APP3 36 Part Editing Menu oocccccccccnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnncncnnnonnnnnos APP3 38 In a Part Edit WINDOW E APP3 38 In a Modify Part Wimdow APP3 42 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation i Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info cti
356. tion Setting Button Clicking this button brings up the Option Setting dialog For an explanation of the options refer to Option Setting Dialog Print Button Click this button Printing is executed as specified 6 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Print Printing the Currently Opened Window Y Set the options in the Option Setting dialog in advance Select Printer o Setting from the File menu Select Present Window Printing from the File menu At the same time a printing start command is given and the currently opened window is printed out as specified in the Option Setting dialog When the Memory Address Use List ls Opened The Memory Address Use list is displayed on the editor window as follows e ee eee E net ree e ll ET i WH z i A at E AAA ES d 9 Mp39014 JULIA m However it is printed out as below by clicking Present Window Printing GVWIN Ver 2 00 DATE 2003 02 26 TIME 11 30 58 Selected PLC MATSUSHITA MEWNET File Comment File Name D data DEMO_GV52S G2 Memory Address Use Cross reference DTO00000 DTO9999 DT00000 Comm Parameter Read Area DT00001 Comm Parameter Read Area DT00002 Comm Parameter Read Area DT00003 Buffering Area Sample Control DT00050 Comm Parameter Write Area DT00051 Comm Parameter Write Area DT00052 C
357. tiple graphic items can be selected and rotated at one time 1 38 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Flip The following graphic items can be flipped on the specified axis Applicable graphic items Line continuous line box parallelogram polygon circle arc sector ellipse elliptical arc paint including frame scale Operation Procedure Select the desired graphic item When handles are shown click Flip or icon The following Flip dialog is displayed 0 LA O O O D o O 5 O a e Dy D m Q O wa free a i Giza E La Haspr d Ane Direction Vertical Horizontal Select the axis to flip the graphic item Position Left Right Up Down Center Select the position to place the graphic item with respect to the selected Direction O Copy When the check box is turned on M the graphic item is copied at the flipped position while the original one remains in place When this is not checked the graphic item is flipped Clicking OK performs flip operation Align Items can be aligned on the screen Clicking this menu brings up the following sub menu Sido ar A kafe Paye Che Te Ak ste k ng eg Ka cal aad a Che Lei bau Switch Lamp Centering This command is valid when there are characters on the switch or lamp Select the desired
358. to a GV series unit while a RS 232C cable AlGV8103 is connected between the modular jack MJ1 on the GV series and the computer Arrangements e GV series e Cable AIGV8103 3 m Available from Matsushita Electric Works Computer GV series AIGV8103 gt gt gt gt Hi CH MII oO OD o Modular jack D If Modular Jack 1 Editor Port is not set in the Modular Jack dialog 8pin e selected from the System Setting menu press the SYSTEM key and then F1 key on the GV series The GV series is brought to the Modular Jack 1 Editor Port in the Modular STOP mode Main Menu local main screen Jack dialog under System Setting D OD 5 5 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Transfer Data Transfer on Ethernet Screen data is transferred on Ethernet while a computer and a GV series unit are connected via LAN cable Arrangements e GV series e Ethernet cable With a cross cable data transfer is possible between a computer and a GV52 62 1 1 even if they are not on a network e Ethernet communication interface unit AIGV823 This optional unit is necessary for Ethernet communications with GV42 52 62 or GV40 50 60 Since GV52 62 is equipped with a built in LAN port the optional unit is not necessary The AlGV823 unit is available from Matsushita
359. to be copied 2 While holding down the SHIFT key click the last part of the parts to be copied 3 Check that all the desired parts numbers are highlighted Drag one of them to a box in the target file window 7 36 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques L Copy of Parts by Selecting them Individually h 1 While holding down the CTRL key click parts to be copied one by one 2 Check that all the desired parts numbers are highlighted Drag one of them to a box in the target file window The copied parts are displayed consecutively 7 uowapeuen l 7 37 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Menu for Parts File Management Before closing the copy target file window choose whether or not to save the copied data 0 D Clicking File brings up the following menu items Fie Ect ipa pics ope Taga Rea Cora Tage Dean Copy Tagai E eva Cope ag 5 it Ei Copy Source Open hat File Wee Lg Seechen e Copy Target New Creates a new copy target file e Copy Target Open Opens a copy target file e Copy Target Save Overwrites the currently opened copy target file e Copy Target Save As Click this option to give a different name to the currently opened copy target file for saving
360. tomation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts Setting Procedure This section explains the 3D switch parts setting procedure Also follow the same procedure when placing lamps 1 Click the Switch icon 2 The Switch dialog is displayed Click the Parts Select button Hore maaie bal La i DI la Fi 3 The Switch List window is displayed When the desired 3D parts file is already displayed go to step 5 Click the Parts File button imik A F EL z Ar APP2 18 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts 4 The Select Parts File dialog is displayed Select a 3D parts file 3Dfront_128 G2p or 3Dside_128 G2p ai Thaw Pal DE F gl Kan FOOT iese POP Sr elt im Der Ett Sain eiis eee PaT Miam ei i CS CH lr d OO U U a Peete ee eg F ey 6 The following message appears Click Yes The 3D parts color pallet becomes available page APP2 15 in this chapter Tirar pet ee ed ee ee AA d Hee ih en he JUMP lt gt These buttons scroll up down the parts list Parts File Click this button when selecting another parts file Select Click this button to select a switch part APP2 19 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation n
361. tomation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Drawing Tools for Data Sheet Line Icon Straight lines can be drawn by dragging It is possible to draw lines only horizontally or vertically Continuous lines as well as diagonal lines are not available oa Box Icon Only boxes without painting can be drawn Text Icon Enter a text as desired into the text field and drag the mouse over the edit window The text can be placed Character enlargement is limited to X 1 x Y 1 Only when TC Enlarge X is checked however the X size is doubled Data Display Icon Clicking this icon brings up the following dialog Cre Bo vaa Des pe Sl Geet F M Eph En Lee F Cee Sige Papy kee US L Sid bi iow Tyne EED Tae Lap mi wn PE RW Character enlargement is limited to X 1 x Y 1 Only when O Enlarge X is checked however the X size is doubled L Calendar Display x A calendar display can be set on a data sheet using a numerical data display The calendar data is stored in system memory addresses s160 to 166 By placing the calendar data with numerical data display on a data sheet the calendar is also printed out at the time of data sheet printing 4 78 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Data
362. tomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN Setting Items Necessary for Communication This describes how to make settings necessary for communication between a personal computer and the GV series To check the communication setting stop the communication with the GV series If the following settings are made incorrectly the GV series and personal computer will not communicate normally PE Click on the File menu Make settings for PLC Type Baud Rate COM Port and Memory Setting Res LSV Ela ops dan PLE Type Bua Ge LM Por h Ree Sans a 1 PLC Type Set the PLC type corresponding to the screen data transmitted to the GV series 2 Baud Rate Set the baud rate for communication between a personal computer and the GV series This has no relation to the actual communication baud rate between the GV series and the PLC 3 COM Port Set the RS 232C COM port for the personal computer Hi 3 Q 8 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN 4 Memory Setting The starting address is either 0 or 1 for each device Determine the starting address for the device and then enter the correct number of words For example if you are testing DTO to DT300 the number of words for DT will be 301 If you check O Make All Data Cleared all the memory
363. ton APP2 13 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts 4 The Select parts file dialog is displayed Select a parts file 3DStd G2p or 3Dnow_p2 G2pl lik pes ch Make sure to select either 3DStd G2p or 3Dnow_p2 G2p parts file Any files o other than these two show only 3D switch lamp parts 5 3D parts are displayed in the Num Display List window Hu Zapp Leift eee ee eee eee FS JUMP lt gt These buttons scroll up down the parts list Parts File Click this button when selecting another parts file Select Click this button to select a switch part APP2 14 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts Color Select This option is used to select a color from eight Has Lia Pai Dal Laia Oo J U an Select the desired part and color Click the Select button 6 The selected part is previewed in the Num Display dialog The Color Select option is valid to change the color The above step completes a part selection E For other settings such as memory see the Reference Manual Function With the Model GV42C This section provides notes on 3D parts usage and the setting procedure for the GV42C Read the following thoroughly in advance Notes on Usag
364. ts 10 is specified in this example Click the Next button 7 Register error messages Message registration field Message Group No of Registered Target 0 23 Specify a message editing group number Q el E o Q O be m x Y 3 fol D n Leave the number setting as default generally To change select a number with no registered message Ioe Message registration field Register error messages In step 6 10 is specified as the number of error messages Register ten lines of messages Message Color Select a message color as desired 9 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard Click the Next button 8 Attached parts are available es a EE TT Scroll Switch Uncheck the option if message scroll switches are not necessary Click the Finish button 9 Across cursor is displayed Click it in the desired position URETS m Ami eee Y O ceed O LA ev WT E ade oe uh en an Cf La ta S fm Fe phig Je des Px TT AA MN omalis i m at T TECER T oe A 2 KW a E LUN MENO Y og E A ECK HO CG Rep Isi LIZ m e iE fe L EDa Feta TALEE en e o o bd HE a KO eh ka 9 10 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Wizard Trend Graph Display This section explains the sett
365. ts APP1 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts Font Setting When performing font setting select Font Setting from the System Setting menu TENTENE T Erg sange E nz irga Ea ems A fF 2 Jk W er Akt ios etapa Lempa H pad By transferring screen data together with the selected font file to the GV series the font can be displayed on the GV series Generally only one type of font is available in one screen data file With the language selection function however it is possible to specify multiple fonts in one screen data file and to select one font For more information see Chapter 29 Language Selection in the Reference Manual Function Iloc APP1 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 1 Fonts Available Fonts English Western Europe Fonts The following languages are included in the English Western Europe Fonts 3 nm Latin 1 o e Icelandic e Irish o e Italian e English z e Dutch e Swedish e Spanish e Danish e German e Norwegian e Portuguese e Finnish e Faeroese e French Chinese and Chinese Simplified Screens in Chinese or simplified type Chinese can be created Korean Screens in Korean using the Hangul alphabet can be created APP1 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894
366. tting dialog selected from the System Setting menu and check L Transfer Comment op CH D OD D OU Di Di lt Q D 02 gt OD O All Data Transfer This option is valid when Memory is chosen for Transfer Device When the option is checked screen data I F driver file GV series system program and font data are transferred during communication with a memory card LJ Transfer Through Ethernet Check this option for communications with a GV series unit on Ethernet while a cable AIGV8103 is not used MODEM See page 5 25 Check this option for communications with a GV series unit via a modem while a cable AIGV8103 is not used Transfer PC gt From computer to transfer device PC lt From transfer device to computer PC lt gt Data comparison between computer and transfer device Info This is valid only when Memory is chosen for Transfer Device Memory card data check is allowed Up date of System The GV series system program font data except for the Main Menu P local main screen and I F driver file are updated at one time Detail Setting Serial Port COM1 COM8 Select a computer port Baud Rate 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Select a data transfer rate between the computer and the transfer device This option does not apply to transfer between a PLC anda GV series unit The baud rate at 115 200 bps may be disabled for some computers Choose 57600 bps
367. umber of PLC O Compare Temp Control Station No This option is valid when the temperature control network is used Check this box to include the port number of the temperature controller Compare File No Compare Record No Choose these options for specifying addresses in the memory card 7 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 5 Copy Image to Pattern The screen being displayed on the computer can be registered as a pattern A pattern can be pasted to a screen change switch to show the target screen instead of text or can be used in various ways e Screen e Graphic library e Multi overlap e Data block e Screen library uN The following edit items can be registered as patterns Operation Procedure 1 Bring up the desired screen 2 Select Screen Image from the Tool menu The sub menu is displayed Click Make Pattern 3 The Size Change dialog is displayed Sim Change EU SR ouer Tiki T Son Tete 0 e e setae v When a normal overlap is placed on the screen the Layer dialog appears first AS Choose the editing layer to be displayed Click OK The Size Change dialog is displayed Ex For a screen with three normal overlaps Sow Change 8 Lal Fs Bee 5 KR Dun gt Colts E Dam Mr D Te d Zi 4 Specify X Size and Y Size of the pattern They can be set to the sc
368. umber specified for the edit model 800 x 600 dots 640 x 480 dots or 320 x 240 dots U D Calling a Pattern Select Pattern from the Item menu The Pattern dialog is displayed Specify the pattern number to be opened and click OK ben See Setra Late L ns Dear bagi usta Block HM gona gt Tanker Pese vs Dyar Blick crap Bloch Tie En Che 15 En the E S creer Libra Krees een 4 37 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Pattern Editing The following tool bar is provided for pattern drawing Pencil Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Foreground Select a color to be displayed by clicking or dragging Background Select a color to be displayed by right clicking or right dragging Pen Select a dot size for the pencil command O Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is necessary For more information on transparent color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the Reference Manual Function Pencil Command Usage 1 Select a foreground color background color and dot size Pen 2 Inthe Pattern Edit window draw a graphic by clicking or dragging the mouse It is drawn with the specified size pen in the color for Foreground iS
369. use this method This is useful in selecting a hard to find item y A maximum of 512 items can be displayed on one window When an item is selected the SW total number of the items placed on the screen and the line number of the selected item are displayed on the status bar When the number exceeds 512 click Next in the Display menu or the right click menu The hidden items come into view The current page number is indicated on the title bar of the window Lao oes EI SR Thar fy VE Uh T he JEFA ukj SUN eu Che ji gg CS AATE Cisi Fi LE ET Chai EE Maa ZC he LCB SEA Tug Eet Zeie Cha ht P Aia Le ral a ropa ib ast a Bi Bra zi eglIIE AAA E Bus Ces e E HTT EP S TE Ti ee Ped TA Eres PA G Dre Paw OR Fi i 1 28 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Changing the Display Format 1 Click the Display menu The menu as shown on the right iS Ess tal gt displayed F Be hiran er u 2 The following display formats are available SC ad fe jelatin O By Registration Q The items are displayed in the order in which items are D placed S By Division o The items are displayed in ascending order of division numbers D By Graphic m Only graphic items are displayed By Function The following dialog is displayed a i Cid M bascka ge naa iih Age Piel
370. values for the SIM file will be cleared berey Fei Hi sl Wrtigel D mie Be ik E F Si Di mmm E EA Be It is also possible to clear all the memory values by going to the Edit menu to Initialize v x Memory L Starting up the Simulator from the GVWIN editor and automatically creating an SIM file x e The PLC model set in screen data is displayed in the PLC Type tab window e The necessary words for Memory Setting are set automatically based on the memory data used in screen data e Additionally if there is a change in the memory used by screen data the setting value can be corrected by going to the File menu to Apply GVWIN Data 8 10 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Applications for GVWIN About SIM Files An SIM file is a memory file used to read and write PLC memory on the Simulator screen Timing of Creating or Updating SIM File Automatically When the GVWIN editor and the Simulator are both started up an SIM file is created automatically SIM file update timing 1 When you go to the Tool menu for GVWIN and select Start Simulator or 2 When screen data is sent from GVWIN or 3 When you go to the File menu for the Simulator and select Apply GVWIN Data Update occurs automatically in both cases followed by the display of an SIM file sheet on screen Names of Automatica
371. vironment for screens at one time The set environment becomes valid for all the screens Redraw 1 14 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Basic Operation Refreshes the screen display Draw Menu For more information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Part Menu For more information on the menu items see respective chapters Item Menu For more information on editing of each item see Chapter 4 Registration ltems Screen Allows you to perform screen editing Graphic Library Allows you to perform graphic library editing Multi Overlap Allows you to perform multi overlap editing Data Block Allows you to perform data block editing Message Allows you to perform message editing Pattern Allows you to perform pattern editing Macro Block Allows you to perform macro block editing Page Block Allows you to perform page block editing Direct Block Allows you to perform direct block editing Screen Block Allows you to perform screen block editing Tile Allows you to perform tile editing Data Sheet Allows you to perform data sheet editing Screen Library Allows you to perform screen library editing Multi Languages Used for the language selection function Animation Used for the animation function 1 15 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415
372. w ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net w Q O Z a SCH O o T Chapter 3 Drawing Tools 2 Click Place A dotted line box is displayed with the cursor 3 Click the mouse in the desired position The graphic is placed with the GLIB mark at the clicked position Immediately after placement the LIB mark is attached to the cursor Clicking the mouse again places the same graphic on the screen as long as the LIB mark is displayed To cancel graphic placement click the Select icon The LIB mark disappears To y The reference position of placing a graphic is the offset position on the AS graphic library For more information on the offset see Chapter 4 Registration ltems GLIB position on the screen OFF position in the graphic library A To call a graphic that is called with the graphic call command using another o graphic call command nesting a maximum of eight nests is possible 3 28 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Dot Clicking the Dot icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Be Gogh Gun Pepas enini aTe Lee Ip Lob IT JI Se Du w a Q O Z a SCH O o T Color For color selection see Chapter 2 Screens Pen Select the dot size Clicking the mouse on the screen draws
373. w is displayed APP2 6 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts Image A part selected from the parts list has different ON OFF and P3 to P8 patterns as per Image setting No below When making the ON and OFF patterns the same or interchanging the ON and OFF patterns as per Image setting Yes below use this button 1 When changing a pattern show the preview of the desired part and click the Image button The Image Setting dialog is displayed OO U U a 2 Select a pattern A setting example is provided below Colors are changeable The above step completes a part selection IT For other settings such as memory see the Reference Manual Function APP2 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix2 3D Parts Flash Function When 3D parts in the file 3DStd G2p or 3Dnow_pL1 G2p are used the OFF pattern and a pattern of ON and P3 to P8 can be displayed alternately like they are flashing The following explains the lamp flashing setting procedure Also follow the same procedure in the case of switches Setting Procedure 1 Open the Lamp dialog Open the Customize tab window The OFF pattern is previewed Note For O Custom Bitmap see page APP2 22 in this chapter APP2 8 C
374. window Pie Graph Part Edit window 10 The former edit window is displayed The modified pie graph part appears in the window L Icons for Editing Pie Graph Parts aS In the window for editing pie graph parts unique icons appear in the tool bar T ae eo fe ko C With Internal Circle D Same Start End Angles A Move Start End Angles Separately B Symmetry A Move Start End Angles Separately There are start angles and end angles for all pie graphs except circles These angles can be changed freely when the graph is edited Click icon A and click the part area of the pie graph Handles are shown around the part SENKEE Click this icon Click the part Handles are Drag either handle on start angle or end angle to the desired size Drag the start angle to Drag the end angle to change it change it APP3 20 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Appendix 3 Part Editing L B Symmetry h Unlike icon A this icon changes start angle and end angle simultaneously and symmetrically Click icon B and click the part area of the pie graph Handles are shown around the part Drag either handle to change both angles simultaneously and symmetrically R Drag either handle to change ae a E the start and end angles simultaneously and Click this icon symmetrically
375. yed 3 1 E ke Ma mi ain Weg ane Se DENKEN 219 E KSE BEA P wem ERA eiis Et nie s i ite fe To go back to the Animation VIEW dialog right click the desired folder Animation No xxxx and click Property 5 Double clicking a displayed folder Animation No xxxx brings up as many Frame folders as the number set in step 2 Sat EE ar Di El SES A AS o e SE em ul LEE Aa S k EX fei at gt Di O 5 T O s t est OD Q lt dl N O N D lt O D O a j O 3 Q lt N N mg fone bn Ore E Feres bo DODE i Fares ko DOC iy Fura bo DO 4 87 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Registration Items Frame Editing In the Animation window double click the desired Frame No xxxx under an Animation No xxxx folder The Frame Edit window is displayed JM Ip Eege re e Da ngg T Me a Des Lem y e ee Lat org ivy E B A em Y well e Dal 2 ewe P e ins Miro ie tee ajg Fe oo g Frame Structure A maximum of 1 023 frames from No 0 to No 1 022 can be registered The maximum capacity per frame is 128 kB The maximum permissible number of dots is the same as the number specified for the edit model 800 x 600 dots or 640 x 480 dots Frame Editing Frames can be edited in the same manner as for patterns Refer to the description of pattern editing page

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

NAiS GV42/52/62 Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents